Sedecal HF Series X Ray Generator Service Manual

Technical Publication
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
HF Series Generators
Pre-Installation
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION DATE REASON FOR CHANGE
0 JUL 15, 2002 First edition
1 SEP 20, 2003 kW corrections for SHF-5xx model
2 FEB 17, 2004 New equipments
3 SEP 15, 2005 Revision of environmental and electrical requirements
This Document is the English original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer.
The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS
The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their
application and meaning are described below.
DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT

IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT

HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR
DATA.
Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or

avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment
or data.
Note . Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent

information that is important to know but which do not necessarily
relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Responsibility of Purchaser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 PRE-INSTALLATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 ROOM REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3 Line Powered Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.4 Line Powered Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.5 Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.6 Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.7 Battery Powered generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.8 Battery Powered Ggenerators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.9 Interconnection and Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.10 Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
i PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
PI-1005R3 ii
Pre-Installation
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
This Pre-Installation document provides the information and data needed to

plan and qualify the customer site prior to equipment delivery and installation.
This document considers only the Generator and its associated components.
Product information, environmental and electrical requirements are specified.
For system-related requirements, such as room layout, and system

interconnections, refer to documentation provided with other subsystems.
1.1 RESPONSIBILITY OF PURCHASER
Site planning and preparation are the responsibilities of the purchaser. The
following points should be considered fundamental to the customers
Pre-Installation activities; addition work may be needed depending on specific
site circumstances:
• Install required material prior the delivery of the system components.
• Complete room floor, ceiling and wall finish.
• Install conduit, duct, and raceway.
• Install proper size junction boxes with covers at locations specified in the
installation plan.
• Install mains power of proper voltage output and adequate kVA rating.
• Install all safety devices according to this document and Local Codes.
• Provide current room dimensions, including hall way and entry door
sizes.
Note . Complete and proper Pre-Installation will avoid delays and

confusion.
PI-1005R3 1
Pre-Installation
This page intentionally left blank.
2 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
SECTION 2 PRE-INSTALLATION DATA
This section provides product information and illustrations showing physical

dimensions, weight, mounting holes and normal access areas for cabling and
service. (Refer to Illustration 2-1.)
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DIMENSIONS
COMPONENT WEIGHT
Length Width Height
LINE POWERED GENERATORS
Vertical Generator Cabinet

506 mm 468 mm 1101 mm 148 kg
with LF-RAC (LSS) or DRAC (HSS)
Compact Generator Cabinet

445 mm 360 mm 568 mm 72 kg
(for only 1 Tube (LSS))

592 mm 360 mm 690 mm 95 kg
(for 1 or 2 Tubes (LSS or HSS))
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS

500 mm 360 mm 790 mm 108 kg
with Capacitors Module
BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS
Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet

813 mm 436 mm 948 mm 235 kg
with Batteries Module
Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet

813 mm 436 mm 1223 mm 372 kg
with Batteries Module (17 A/h batteries)
PI-1005R3 3
Pre-Installation
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DIMENSIONS
COMPONENT WEIGHT
Length Width Height
STANDARD CONTROL CONSOLES
w/o Pedestal 433 mm 298 mm 123 mm 8 kg

RAD Control Consoles
with Pedestal 433 mm 298 mm 1023 mm 22 kg
w/o Pedestal 554 mm 360 mm 124 mm 12 kg

R&F Control Consoles
with Pedestal 554 mm 360 mm 1010 mm 35 kg
with Handswitch support 545 mm 290 mm 50 mm 6 kg

RAD Console Graphic Display
w/o Handswitch support 430 mm 290 mm 50 mm 6 kg
with Handswitch support 468 mm 290 mm 114 mm 8 kg

Touch Screen Console
(TPC 10” or 12”) w/o Handswitch support 360 mm 290 mm 114 mm 8 kg
Optional Pedestal for

298 mm 236 mm 930 mm 10 kg
RAD Console Graphic Display or Touch Screen Console
Note.-- Dimensions for no-standard Consoles are not indicated in this document.
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE AND PC UNIT

Touch Screen Console 400 mm 200 mm 400 mm 5 kg
PC Unit 480 mm 200 mm 400 mm 15 kg
PC Interface Box 130 mm 140 mm 46 mm 0.6 kg
Note.-- Specifications of Touch Screen Consoles and PC Units subject to change without notice.
4 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
METHOD OF MOUNTING
COMPONENT NORMAL METHOD OF MOUNTING
Floor freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to floor with

Generator Cabinet
four M10 (3/8”) bolts.
Control Consoles Desk freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to an optional pedestal.
Note: Anchoring hardware should be field supplied. For seismic areas all components must be anchored,
Local Standards should be applied.
MINIMUM RECOMMENDED FREE AREA FOR SERVICE ACCESS

SURFACE
COMPONENT
Left Side Right Side Front Rear Top Bottom
50 cm 50 cm 100 cm -- Completely
Generator Cabinet --
(20”) (20”) (40”) (see note) free
10 cm 10 cm Completely 10 cm Completely
Control Consoles --
(4”) (4”) free (4”) free
Note: Ventilation conditions requires to keep a minimum free distance of 15 cm (6”) from both lateral sides of the Generator
Cabinet and also the same distance from the rear side when the Generator is provided with High Speed Starter (fans for the
starter module).
PI-1005R3 5
Pre-Installation
Illustration 2-1
Generators
Cable Access
568
COMPACT
GENERATOR
(For only 1 Tube)
445
427.5
67 57 57 83 57 57 67 67.5
44
80
28
8
150
Wall Support
200
Generator
702
206
251
40
33
Floor Support
150
435
422
110
Wall and Floor Supports are options

224
19
40
315
6 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
Illustration 2-1 (cont.)

Generators
Cable Access
690
COMPACT
GENERATOR
(For 1 or 2 Tubes)
592
427.5
68 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 68 67.5
40 44
40
8
28
200
Wall Support
250
827
Generator
280
336
33 40
Floor Support
150
580 422
105
Wall and Floor Supports are options

234
19
40
462
PI-1005R3 7
Pre-Installation

Generators
CAPACITORS
GENERATOR
Cable Access
VERTICAL
GENERATOR
1101
790
Cable Access
Cable Access
Cable Access
1223
948
COMPACT-ESM COMPACT-ESM
GENERATOR GENERATOR
(with Batteries 17 A/h)
8 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation

Consoles
R&F CONSOLE
124
1010
PEDESTAL (optional)
Mounting Holes ø8
RAD CONSOLE
Cable Access
123
1023
PEDESTAL (optional)
Mounting Holes ø8
Cable Access
Cable Access
400
45
400
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE PC UNIT PC INTERFACE BOX

FOR PC
PI-1005R3 9
Pre-Installation

Consoles
TABLE SUPPORT
RAD CONSOLES -- GRAPHIC DISPLAY
WALL SUPPORT
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES (TPC)
PEDESTAL
THESE CONSOLES CAN BE MOUNTED ON A TABLE SUPPORT, WALL SUPPORT OR PEDESTAL
10 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
SECTION 3 ROOM REQUIREMENTS
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
LINE POWERED GENERATORS /

CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS
Temperature range of --40oC to 70oC Temperature range of --20oC to 40oC

Storage / Transport
Relative Humidity range of 10% to 100% Relative Humidity range of 10% to 100%
Environmental Conditions
Atmospheric Pressure range of 500 hPa to 1060 hPa Atmospheric Pressure range of 500 hPa to 1060 hPa
Temperature range of 10oC to 40oC

Operating (Battery Powered Generators: for a longer life cycle of batteries it is recommended a temperature around 22 oC)
Environmental Conditions Relative Humidity (no condensing) range of 30% to 75%
Atmospheric Pressure range of 700 hPa to 1060 hPa
In normal environmental circumstances the maximum heat output of the equipment can reach:
-- for Line Powered Generators 0.16 kW (544 btu/hr)
-- for Capacitor Assisted Generators 0.20 kW (682 btu/hr)
Heat Output -- for Battery Powered Generators 0.26 kW (890 btu/hr).
Components must not be allowed to overheat.

Overheating of components can cause system malfunction.
3.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
This Generator contains advanced circuitry which will maintain the selected
X-ray techniques during adverse line conditions. However, there is a limit to the
Generators ability to correct for inadequate line power.
To ensure proper operation:
• Do not under size the Distribution Transformer (Line Powered

Generators). It is recommended that the secondary of Distribution
Transformer has a “Star” configuration.
• Size feeder and ground wires per this document.
• Ensure and maintain input mains voltage to specification. Ensure that

the ground resistance is lower than 10 Ω.
The power requirements given here (wire sizes, etc.) are the recommended
specification. With the exception of high current carrying conductors and
grounds, low voltage connections are made with preterminated wires.
The installation should comply with all the electrical

requirements indicated in this document. These
requirements should be upgraded if Local Standards were
more stringent.
PI-1005R3 11
Pre-Installation
3.3 LINE POWERED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS
• Operation:
GENERATOR MODEL SHF-310 SHF-315 SHF-320 SHF-325 SHF-330 SHF-335
Max. Power kW 32 kW
Maximum mA 400 mA
Maximum kVp 125 kVp 150 kVp 125 kVp 150 kVp 125 kVp 150 kVp
Power Line A A B B C/D C/D
Max. Power kW 40 kW
Maximum mA 500 mA
Maximum Power kW 50 kW
Maximum mA 640 mA (or 630 mA under special order)
GENERATOR MODEL SHF-630 SHF-635 SHF-835
Maximum Power kW 64 kW (or 65 kW under special order) 80 kW
Maximum mA 640 mA (or 650 mA under special order) 800 mA (or 1000 mA under special order)
Maximum kVp 125 kVp 150 kVp 150 kVp
Power Line C/D C/D D (or E for 1000 mA)
POWER LINE
A B C D E
230 / 240 VAC, 230 / 240 VAC, 400 / 415 / 440 VAC, 480 VAC, 530 VAC,
Single-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz
Line voltage automatic compensation: ±10%.
Maximum line regulation for maximum kVA demand: 5%.
NOTES: -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.
-- For 80 kW Generators operating with lines at 400 / 415 / 440 VAC an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate
the line voltage to 480 VAC (or 530 VAC).
12 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
• RMS line current during a X-ray exposure, minimum line power required,
Generator stand-by consumption (W), the differential sensitivity (mA)
and the thermomagnetic breaker should be:
SINGLE-PHASE GENERATORS
LINE VOLTAGE
32 kW 40 kW 50 kW
208 VAC * 192 A 240 A 300 A
230 VAC 174 A 217 A 272 A
240 VAC 167 A 208 A 260 A
Minimum kVA required Maximum kW x 1.25
Stand-by Consumption 500 W
Differential Sensitivity
30 mA
(Earth Leakage / Ground Fault)
Differential, Thermomagnetic 50% of the RMS line current

(Fuses) and Contactor (RMS = momentary line current based on 100 ms X-ray exposures)
NOTE: -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.
THREE-PHASES GENERATORS
LINE VOLTAGE
32 kW 40 kW 50 kW 64 kW (or 65 kW) 80 kW *
208 VAC * 111 A 138 A 173 A -- --
230 VAC 100 A 125 A 156 A
240 VAC 96 A 120 A 150 A -- --
400 VAC 58 A 72 A 90 A 115 A 144 A
415 VAC 55 A 69 A 87 A 111 A 139 A
440 VAC 52 A 65 A 82 A 105 A 135 A
480 VAC 48 A 60 A 75 A 96 A 120 A
Minimum kVA required Maximum kW x 1.25
Stand-by Consumption 500 W
Differential Sensitivity
30 mA
(Earth Leakage / Ground Fault)
Differential, Thermomagnetic 50% of the RMS line current

(Fuses) and Contactor (RMS = momentary line current based on 100 ms X-ray exposures)
PI-1005R3 13
Pre-Installation
• Maximum Power Line Impedance. The Impedance of the Power Line in

the installation must be lower than the maximum value indicated below:
SINGLE-PHASE GENERATORS POWER

LINE VOLTAGE
32 kW 40 kW 50 kW
208 VAC * 0.045 Ω 0.035 Ω 0.028 Ω
230 VAC 0.055 Ω 0.045 Ω 0.036 Ω
240 VAC 0.060 Ω 0.045 Ω 0.036 Ω
NOTES: -- The above values comply with the Standard IEC-60601.2.7.

-- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.
THREE-PHASE GENERATORS POWER

LINE VOLTAGE
32 kW 40 kW 50 kW 64 kW (or 65 kW) 80 kW *
208 VAC * 0.070 Ω 0.055 Ω 0.044 Ω N.A. N.A.
230 VAC 0.087 Ω 0.070 Ω 0.056 Ω N.A. N.A.
240 VAC 0.094 Ω 0.075 Ω 0.060 Ω N.A. N.A.
400 VAC 0.270 Ω 0.220 Ω 0.170 Ω 0.135 Ω 0.110 Ω
415 VAC 0.300 Ω 0.240 Ω 0.180 Ω 0.150 Ω 0.120 Ω
440 VAC 0.340 Ω 0.270 Ω 0.200 Ω 0.170 Ω 0.135 Ω
480 VAC 0.400 Ω 0.320 Ω 0.240 Ω 0.200 Ω 0.160 Ω
NOTES: -- The above values comply with the Standard IEC-60601.2.7.

-- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.
14 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
3.4 LINE POWERED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE
Correct sizing of the feeder wires is critical to proper Generator operation. Wire
size is dependent on the Generator power, the line voltage and the distance
from the Distribution Transformer to the Generator Cabinet. The maximum
voltage drop during an exposure must not exceed 5% of the nominal mains
value.
It is recommended that the Distribution Transformer (Hospital) used as power

source have at least a power of the 25% more than the maximum power of the
X-ray Generator.
Recommended wire sizing is indicated in Table 3-1. These lengths are

measured from the Distribution Transformer to the Room Electrical Cabinet
(room disconnect). From the Room Electrical Cabinet to the Generator
Cabinet 16 mm2 (AWG 6) may be used as long as that length does not
exceed 6 m (20 ft). The maximum wire size that can be connected to the
Generator Cabinet (Input Line Fuse Holder) is 35 mm2 (AWG 2).
Table 3-1
Minimum Wire Size from Distribution Transformer to Room Electrical Cabinet
LINE WIRE SIZE AT:

GENERATOR
VOLTAGE 15 m 30 m 45 m 60 m
208 VAC * 50 mm2 AWG 1/0 95 mm2 AWG 3/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0 -- --
32 kW,, 1φ
φ 230 VAC 50 mm2 AWG 1/0 95 mm2 AWG 3/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0 -- --
240 VAC 50 mm2 AWG 1/0 95 mm2 AWG 3/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0 -- --
208 VAC * 35 mm2 AWG 2 70 mm2 AWG 2/0 95 mm2 AWG 3/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0
230 VAC 35 mm2 AWG 2 70 mm2 AWG 2/0 95 mm2 AWG 3/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0
32 kW,, 3φ
φ 400 VAC 16 mm2 AWG 6 35 mm2 AWG 2 50 mm2 AWG 1/0 70 mm2 AWG 2/0
415 VAC 16 mm2 AWG 6 35 mm2 AWG 2 50 mm2 AWG 1/0 70 mm2 AWG 2/0
480 VAC 16 mm2 AWG 6 25 mm2 AWG 4 35 mm2 AWG 2 50 mm2 AWG 1/0
40 kW,, 1φ
φ 230 VAC 70 mm2 AWG 2/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0 -- --
208 VAC * 35 mm2 AWG 2 70 mm2 AWG 2/0 105 mm2 AWG 4/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0
40 kW,, 3φ
φ 400 VAC 25 mm2 AWG 4 50 mm2 AWG 1/0 70 mm2 AWG 2/0 83 mm2 AWG 3/0
NOTE: -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.
PI-1005R3 15
Pre-Installation
Table 3-1 (cont.)

Minimum Wire Size from Distribution Transformer to Room Electrical Cabinet
WIRE SECTION AT:

LINE
GENERATOR
VOLTAGE 15 m 30 m 45 m 60 m
208 VAC * 83 mm2 AWG 3/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0 -- -- -- --
50 kW,, 1φ
φ 230 VAC 83 mm2 AWG 3/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0 -- -- -- --
240 VAC 83 mm2 AWG 3/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0 -- -- -- --
50 kW,, 3φ
φ 400 VAC 25 mm2 AWG 4 50 mm2 AWG 1/0 70 mm2 AWG 2/0 95 mm2 AWG 3/0
64 kW, 3φ
(or 65 kW, 3φ) 440 VAC 35 mm2 AWG 2 70 mm2 AWG 2/0 83 mm2 AWG 3/0 105 mm2 AWG 4/0
400 VAC 50 mm2 AWG 1/0 83 mm2 AWG 3/0 105 mm2 AWG 4/0 120 mm2 AWG 4/0
* 80 kW,
kW 3φ
16 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
3.5 CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS
• Operation:
G Single-Phase at 100 / 110 / 120 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.
G Line voltage automatic compensation: ±10%.
G 50 Hz / 60 Hz.
• Thermomagnetic Interruptor / Circuit Breaker rating should be:

G 8 / 10 / 12.5 / 16 / 20 A (1P+N).
• Differential Sensitivity: 30 mA
• Minimum kW required: 2.0 kW
• Line Impedance should comply with Standard IEC-60601.2.7.
3.6 CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE
The minimum recommended wire size for the line voltage is:
LINE VOLTAGE WIRE SIZE
100 / 110 VAC 4 mm2 AWG 12
208 / 230 / 240 VAC 2.5 mm2 AWG 14
PI-1005R3 17
Pre-Installation
3.7 BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS
• Operation:
G Single-Phase at 110 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.
G Line voltage automatic compensation: ±15%.
G 50 Hz / 60 Hz.
• Thermomagnetic Interruptor / Circuit Breaker rating should be:

G 10 A (1P+N curve type D).
• Differential Sensitivity: 30 mA
• Minimum kW required:
G without Stand-Alone option: 2.2 kW
G with Stand-Alone option: 0.5 kW
• Line Impedance should comply with Standard IEC-60601.2.7.
3.8 BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE
The minimum recommended wire size for the line voltage is:
LINE VOLTAGE WIRE SIZE
110 VAC 4 mm2 AWG 12
208 / 230 / 240 VAC 2.5 mm2 AWG 14
18 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
3.9 INTERCONNECTION AND GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
Every installation must be provided with a main line disconnect device

(thermomagnetic breaker) and the remote disconnect devices required at all
Consoles that are not located next to the line safety switch. (For more
information about interconnection and grounding refer to “Installation”
document).
Illustration 3-1
Interconnection Block Diagram for LINE POWERED GENERATORS
AUX. BOOST TRANSFORMER

DISTRIBUTION 1 ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET WITH WHEN POWER LINES IS 210 VAC OR BELOW OR FOR
TRANSFORMER LINE SAFETY SWITCH 80 kW GENERATORS WITH LINES AT 400 / 415 / 440 VAC
(Hospital, etc.) (Provided by customer) (Provided by customer)
3
CONTROL CONSOLE 2
or
Serial Comm.
SERIAL CONSOLE or TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE (TPC) GENERATOR
or POWER MODULE CABINET
Serial Comm.
TOUCH SCREEN PC PC INTERFACE BOX
HV TRANSFORMER
HV Cables
4
LF-RAC (LS)
or or
4 LV-DRAC (HS)
X-RAY TUBE
Note . For Serial Generators (RS232 / RS422): Console CPUs are located
inside the Generator Cabinet and Interconnections are factory made.
Only one cable (serial communication) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet
should be connected to the Serial Console, Touch Screen Console or
PC Interface Box.
CABLE RUN FUNCTION REMARKS
Single or Three Phase Power.

(1φ : 230 / 240 VAC) Connect to Room Electrical Cabinet according to the indicated
1 (3φ : 230 / 240 VAC or 400 / 415 / 440 / 480 VAC) electrical requirements. Customer supplied.
Ground.
Single or Three Phase Power.

(1φ : 230 / 240 VAC) Connect to Generator according to the indicated electrical
2 (3φ : 230 / 240 VAC or 400 / 415 / 440 / 480 VAC) requirements.
q Install an Auxiliar Boost Transformer when it is
required.
eq i ed CCustomer
sto e ssupplied.
pplied
Ground.
3 Control Signals and Ground Cable quantity depends on the options installed (AEC, etc.)
Stator Supply.
Provided with X-ray
X ray Tube.
Tube
Ground.
4
Generator provided with LV-DRAC requires a shielded stator
Field supplied.
cable. (Refer to “Installation” document).
NOTES: -- For wire size refer to Section 3.4. Consult to Local Standards for feeder and ground wire size requirements.
-- The system power ground point is located in the Generator Cabinet.
PI-1005R3 19
Pre-Installation
Illustration 3-2
Interconnection Block Diagram for CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS
ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET 1 1

with LINE SAFETY SWITCH
(Customer supplied)
(Customer supplied)
2
CONTROL CONSOLE
or
Serial Comm.
Serial Comm.
HV Cables
HV TRANSFORMER
3 LF-RAC (LS)
X-RAY TUBE
PC Interface Box.
Single-Phase Line.
The Unit is connected by a Line Plug.
100 / 110 / 120 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.
1 Power Line from a Room Electrical Cabinet with Safety Switch.
Ground. Line plugs and cable are Customer supplied.
Stator Supply.
3 Provided with X-ray
X ray Tube.
Tube
Ground.
20 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
Illustration 3-3
Interconnection Block Diagram for BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS
ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET 1 1

with LINE SAFETY SWITCH
(Customer supplied)
(Customer supplied)
2
CONTROL CONSOLE
or
Serial Comm.
Serial Comm.
HV TRANSFORMER
HV Cables
3
LF-RAC (LS)
or or
3 LV-DRAC (HS)
X-RAY TUBE
PC Interface Box.
Single-Phase Line.
The Unit is connected by a Line Plug.
110 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.
1 Power Line from a Room Electrical Cabinet with Safety Switch.
Ground. Line plugs and cable are Customer supplied.
Stator Supply.
Provided with X-ray
X ray Tube.
Tube
Ground.
3
Generator provided with LV-DRAC requires a shielded stator
Field supplied.
cable. (Refer to “Installation” document).
PI-1005R3 21
Pre-Installation
3.10 SAFETY DEVICES
Devices such as Safety Switch / Emergency Switch, Warning Light, and Door
Interlock Switch should be supplied and installed by the customer. (Refer to
Illustration 3-4.)
SAFETY SWITCH / EMERGENCY SWITCH
The main Safety Switch should be installed in the Room Electrical Cabinet
(Room Disconnect) (close to the Generator Cabinet), and provided with light
indicators for “Power On / Off”. It should be used for main disconnection, and
located in an accessible place where it can be seen and controlled during
operation and service.
Other Emergency Switches should be installed in accessible locations in the

room (near to the main entrance door or to the Control Console) for use in an
emergency. They should be connected to the Room Electrical Cabinet (Room
Disconnect) so that they cut power to the Generator when they are activated.
The rating of these switches should be: 10 A, 500 VAC, NC.
DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH
The Door Interlock Switch indicates to the operator when Doorways to the X-ray
room are open. It inhibits or not the X-ray generation, according to the Local
Standards and customer preferences.
This switch should be installed in the entrance door(s) and its connecting cable
should be routed to the Generator Cabinet.
WARNING LIGHT
The Warning Lights are signal lamps installed outside of the X-ray room (near
of the main entrance) that indicate:
1. The system is under voltage (red lamp “ON”).
2. X-ray exposure in process (yellow lamp “ON”) (for connection refer to

Installation document.)
The Warning Lights connection cables should be routed to the Generator

Cabinet.
Note . In any case, the installation must be in compliance with the Local
Regulation.
22 PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation
Illustration 3-4
Room Electrical Cabinet and Mains Connection
EC
Electrical Cabinet
DCB
TCB
CR
L L System
SS Ground Bar
ON OFF
WL1
GEN
EM WL2
EM DIS
LEGEND
EC: Electrical Cabinet (Room Disconnect) for powering X-ray equipment. (Customer supplied)
DCB: Differential Circuit Breaker.
TCB: Thermomagnetic (or Fuses) Circuit Breaker.
CR: Contactor controlled by the Safety Switch (SS).
SS: Safety Switch used for Generator main disconnection, with ON/OFF positions.
L: ON / OFF Indicator Lamps located on the Electrical Cabinet.
EM: Emergency Switch near to Control Console and/or to the Room main entrance.
GEN: Generator Cabinet.
WL1: X-ray Emission Indicator Lamp (yellow lamp) connected to the Generator Cabinet,
located outside of the X-ray Room (above the exam room entrance).
WL2: Warning Light (red lamp) located outside of the X-ray Room (above the exam room entrance).
DIS: Door Interlock Switch located on the main entrance(s).
PI-1005R3 23
Pre-Installation
24 PI-1005R3
IN-1052R0
Installation
(ONLY FOR GENERATORS WITH U-ARM POSITIONERS)

Installation
REVISION HISTORY
0 FEB 26, 2008 First edition
This Document is the english original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.

IN-1052R0
Installation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Pre-Installation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 General Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 UNPACKING, POWER LINE CONNECTION AND CABINET INSTALLATION . . . 5
2.1 Control Console Installation (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3 CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1 Cable Routing Inside Generator Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3.1.1 General Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2 High Voltage Cables Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

3.2.1 X-ray Tubes with Metallic Insert Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2.2 High Voltage Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3 X-ray Tube Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3.1 Stator Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3.2 Tube Selection Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.4 Interconnection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

3.4.1 Serial Interconnection RS232 / RS422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.4.2 Collimator Error Signal (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.4.3 Door Interlock Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.4.4 Warning Light Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.5 Collimator Lamp and System Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.6 Buckys (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.4.7 Tomo Device (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.4.8 Ion Chambers (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
IN-1052R0 i
Installation
Section Page
4 FINAL INSTALLATION AND CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.1 HV Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.2 Cable Fastening and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5 SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.1 System Interconnection Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.2 System Interconnection Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ii IN-1052R0
Installation
The Installation process depends on the Generator and System configuration.

Installation must be performed in the order indicated along this document.
Perform only the sections required to install this Generator.
1.1 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
The following hand tools and products are required for the Installation:
• Standard service engineers tool kit.
• Electric drill motor and assorted bits.
• Silicone Insulating Grease (proofing compound).
• Alcohol cleaning agent.
The following test equipment is required for Configuration and Calibration:
• Digital Multimeter.
• Non-invasive kVp Meter.
• Digital mAs Meter.
• Calculator.
• Only for AEC purposes:
G Sensitometer (only for Film).
G Densitometer (only for Film).
G Copper Plates for the Collimator Filter Holder (recommended):

2 units of 1 mm thickness,
1 unit of 0.5 mm thickness,
2 units of 0.2 mm thickness,
1 unit of 0.1 mm thickness.
G Acrylic Plastic Plates can be used Instead of Copper Plates:

6 units of 5 cm. thickness,
5 units of 1cm. thickness.
G Dosimeter (optionally).
• Only for Tomo purposes:
G Tomophantom tool.
IN-1052R0 1
Installation
1.2 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK
Prior to beginning installation, it is recommended to inspect the site and verify

that the X-ray room complies with Pre-installation requirements, such as:
• Incoming Line.
• Main Switch and Safety Devices.
• Conduits.
• Space Requirements.
(Refer to the “Pre-Installation” document.)
2 IN-1052R0
Installation
1.3 GENERAL CAUTIONS
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN STORAGE CAPACITORS OF

THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY
RESIDUAL CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING
DIODES ON THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS
ARE OFF, APPROXIMATELY 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS
TURNED OFF.
ALWAYS HAVE THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” CONNECTED IN

THE GENERATOR PREVIOUS TO MAINS POWER IS
ACTIVATED IN IT. IF THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” IS NOT
CONNECTED, PERMANENT DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO
IGBTS.
TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT TOUCH ANY

HEATSINK OF THE CIRCUIT BOARDS EVEN THE
GENERATOR IS TURNED OFF. PREVIOUS TO
DISASSEMBLE ANY BOARD, REMOVE ALL CONNECTORS
PLUGGED TO IT.
LINE POWERED GENERATOR:

THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE
POWER LINE, AND POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY
SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET
IS OFF. WHEN THE GENERATOR IS POWERED, THE NEON
LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2
(GENERATOR CABINET) IS ON.
INTERNAL PARTS OF THE GENERATOR (ALL FUSES, LINE

CONTACTOR (6K5), INPUT TRANSFORMER (6T2), ON/OFF
RELAY (3K3) AND LF-RAC MODULE) ARE PERMANENTLY
POWERED ON THROUGH POWER LINE ALTHOUGH THE
CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. BE SURE THAT THE SAFETY
SWITCH IS OFF BEFORE HANDLING ANY INTERNAL PART
OF THE EQUIPMENT.
IN-1052R0 3
Installation
4 IN-1052R0
Installation
SECTION 2 UNPACKING, POWER LINE CONNECTION

AND CABINET INSTALLATION
The Generator is shipped in one box to facilitate transport and installation.
Upon receipt of the X-ray unit and associated equipment, inspect all shipping
containers for signs of damage. If damage is found, immediately notify the
carrier or their respective agent.
It is recommended to install the U-Arm Positioner before than

the Generator. (Refer to the Positioner Service Manual).
1. Open the shipping box. Take out the Control Console (if provided),
Interconnection Cables, Cabinet Cover and other furnished parts. Do not
discard any packing material such as envelopes, boxes or bags until all
parts are accounted for as listed on the packing list.
2. Remove the packing material from the pallet.
3. Remove the Generator Cabinet from the shipping pallet, placing it near
its chosen room position. This operation requires at least two people.
4. When the equipment is unpacked, verify that all items on the customer
order are present, and the hardware and internal wiring is secure.
5. Check the part numbers / serial numbers of each component with its
identification labels, and inspect all pieces for visible damage. If any
damaged parts are found, repair or order replacements to prevent
unnecessary delay in installation.
Illustration 2-1
Compact Generators
IN-1052R0 5
Installation
6. Previous to install the Generator Cabinet on the upper side of the

Positioner Control Box, it is recommended to perform the Power Line
connection.
KEEP IN MIND THE GENERAL CAUTIONS FOR LINE

POWERED GENERATORS INDICATED IN SECTION 1.3.
DO NOT POWER ON THE GENERATOR UNTIL SPECIFICALLY

INSTRUCTED IN THIS SERVICE MANUAL.
7. The power supply line should conform with the Generator model defined
in the “Pre-Installation” document. Wire sizes indicated in this document
are relative to the power supply line and wire length. Verify that the power
line voltage and phase of the Generator coincides with the one for Room
Electrical Cabinet.
Note . As indicated in the Pre-Installation document, 16 mm 2 (AWG 6)

may be used from the Room Electrical Cabinet to the Generator
Cabinet provided that the length does not exceed 6 m (20 ft).
8. Route the Power Line Cables and the Ground wires to the Input Line
Fuses and Ground Studs in the Cabinet Frame (Ground Studs are above
the input fuses or close to the right side of the HV Transformer). These
cables can be secured to the Fastening Bar of the Cabinet and routed
internally along the rear side of the Cabinet (always apply Local Codes
for cable routing). (Refer to Illustration 2-2.)
Illustration 2-2
Cable Routing in the Line Powered Generator
Fastening Bar
Input Transformer 6T2

Power Line Cables
Ground Terminals
Input Line Fuses
6 IN-1052R0
Installation
9. For Single Phase Generators, connect the Power wires L1 and N (L2)
to the Fuse Holders of F3 and F4 (right side of the Cabinet), and the
Ground wire to the Ground stud in the Cabinet Frame (above these fuses
or close to the right side of the HV Transformer).
SINGLE PHASE GENERATORS ARE FACTORY DELIVERED

TO OPERATE ON PHASE AND NEUTRAL. IN CASE OF
CONNECTING THE EQUIPMENT TO A TWO-PHASE LINE,
REPLACE THE NEUTRAL CARTRIDGE WITH THE FUSE
SUPPLIED WITH THE GENERATOR.
10. For Three Phase Generators, connect the Power wires L1, L2 and L3
to the Fuse Holders of F3, F4 and F5 (right side of the Cabinet), and the
Ground wire to the Ground Studs in the Cabinet Frame (located above
these fuses or close to the right side of the HV Transformer).
Three Phase Generators do not need Neutral (N) wire connection from
the Line. If the unit is provided with the optional Fuse Module, connect
the Neutral (N) wire from the Line to the Neutral Stud below F3 Fuse
Holder.
Illustration 2-3
Power Line connections
Input Transf. 6T2
GND Studs
GND Stud
L1 Input Line
L2 Input Line
L3 Input Line
Neutral Stud
(optional)
IN-1052R0 7
Installation
For 80 kW Generators, the power supply line must be 480 VAC (or
530 VAC). If the Generator is supplied with an external step-up
autotransformer, it will include the cables to connect the autotransformer
to the Generator Cabinet. Power line should be connected to the
autotransformer terminals according to the line.
480 V
(or 530 V)
415 V
400 V
SEP-UP TRANSFORMER 380 V
Input: 380 VAC / 400 VAC / 415 VAC, Three-Phase.

380 V
Output: 480 VAC / 530 VAC, Three-Phase. 400 V
415 V
Max Power Output: 80 kW, 10% duty cicle
(approx. 5 seconds / minute) 480 V
(or 530 V)
380 V
Rising Temperature: 40oC 400 V
415 V
480 V
(or 530 V)
11. The whole System (Tables, Spot Film Devices, etc.) can be switched
ON/OFF when the Generator is switched ON/OFF. For this, power the
System through the output terminals of the Line Contactor 6K5 (upper
contactor close to the Input Transformer). These terminals are located
underneath the Line Contactor 6K5.
Illustration 2-4
Line Contactor 6K5
Line Contactor 6K5
Input Transformer 6T2
Output Terminals
8 IN-1052R0
Installation
12. Three-Phase Generators can be provided with an optional Fuse Module

mounted on Module-12, for switching ON/OFF the whole system when
the Generator is turned ON/OFF.
For this, connect the Neutral (N) wire from the Line to the Neutral Stud
below F3 Fuse Holder. Power the System through the Output Terminals
12TS4 (U, V, W, N, GND) close to Fuses F14, F15, F16.
Illustration 2-5
Power Line connections in the optional Fuse Module
GND Studs
Input Transf. 6T2
GND Stud
L1 Input Line
L2 Input Line
Terminals 12TS4
L3 Input Line
Neutral Stud
13. According to the nominal voltage of the line, verify or connect the
wire “:” to the indicated terminal (TB) of Transformer 6T2. This wire is
factory connected to 230 VAC (for 1-Phase), 400 VAC (for 3-Phase) or
480 VAC / 530 VAC (for 80 kW 3-Phase Generators). (Refer to
Schematic 543020XX).
Note . For 220 VAC power line, connect the wire “:” to the 230 VAC
terminals. For 380 VAC power line, connect the wire “:” to the
400 VAC terminals.
6T2 Terminal Strip
6T2
IN-1052R0 9
Installation
14. After connecting the Power Line Cables, secure them to the Fastening
Bar using cable ties if they are routed over the Fastening Bar, or using
a suitable clamp if they are routed through the Round Cable Outlet on the
Rear Cover of the Cabinet (always apply Local Codes).
15. The Generator Cabinet is installed on the upper side of the Positioner
Control Box as follows.
BACK COVER Upper Cable Entrance

(HV Cables, Stator Cable)
(27.16”)
COMPACT
690
GENERATOR
65 462 65
21 37 52 2.55” (18.18”) 2.55”
R9.5
8.38”
213
(23.62”)
600
CONTROL BOX
50 28 21
Lateral Cable Entrance

Anchoring Holes
These steps are also described in the Positioner Service Manual.
a. Place the Control Box on its final position of the room, keep in
mind:
G the length of the Column Harness (approx. 1.5 m) that goes

from the Column of the Positioner to the Control Box,
G the length of the High Voltage Cables (X-Ray Tube -- HV

Transformer in the Generator Cabinet),
G the Swivel Arm movements.
(Refer to Room Layout illustrations in the Positioner

Service Manual)
10 IN-1052R0
Installation
b. Level the Control Box using the Adjustable Leveling Legs. Keep
the Base at the maximum distance from the floor.
Seismic areas and other conditions require to secure firmly the

Control Box to the floor through the mounting holes at its base. In
this case, place the four spacers (provided) under the base and
secure them to the floor. Keep the four Leveling Legs at the same
height than the spacers.
Cable Access
Spacer for using in Seismic Areas
Adjustable Leveling Legs
c. Assemble the supplied Back Cover for the Generator Cabinet to

the upper side of the Control Box using two M6x20 screws
(supplied).
Back Cover
Fixing Screws
Control Box
d. Remove the four Adjustable Leveling Legs from the base of the
Generator Cabinet.
IN-1052R0 11
Installation
e. Hang the Generator Cabinet on the Back Cover and secure it to

the Control Box using four M6x20 screws (supplied). At least two
people are required for this operation. Fix the two screws that join
the rear side of the Cabinet to the Back Cover.
Generator Cabinet
Back Cover
Hook
Fixing Screws
Control Box
f. In some cases, due to transport safety requirements, the HV

Transformer is shipped out of the Generator Cabinet. Install the
P2--Shield P1 P3 HV Transformer inside the Cabinet (upper area) and secure it with
the respective anchors or plates, then connect the following cables
from the Power Module to the corresponding terminals on the HV
Transformer:
G P2-Shield (2 thin wires), P1 and P3. Connect these cables to

the stud-brass terminals using two wrenches to tighten the
nuts (one to hold the base nut in place and the other to tighten
the nut over the cable) and avoiding twisting the studs. Ensure
that the connection is secure and properly tightened.
G Ground wire to Ground stud.

J1
Ground Wire / GND Stud
G Connector J1.
THE HV TRANSFORMER HAS TO BE SECURED WITH ITS

ANCHORS OR PLATES INSIDE THE CABINET. OTHERWISE
P1, P2 AND P3 STUDS MAY BE IN CONTACT WITH THE
CABINET FRAME AND PRODUCE A SHORT-CIRCUIT.
12 IN-1052R0
Installation
g. Leave a working area around the Generator Cabinet until its final
installation.
Cable Access to the Generator Cabinet
(HV Cables, Stator / Thermostat, AEC, ...)
Emergency Switch-Off Button
ON / OFF Button
16. Verify that the power supply line is “OFF” in the Room Electrical Cabinet.
Verify that the power line to the Generator is cut when the Emergency
Switch(es) is(are) activated.
17. Cut the cables to the appropriate length and remove insulation from both
ends of the power and ground wires. Connect them to the respective
terminals in the Room Electrical Cabinet.
18. Install the Control Console as indicated in Section 2.1.
IN-1052R0 13
Installation
2.1 CONTROL CONSOLE INSTALLATION (OPTIONAL)
1. Control Console can be freestanding, wall supported or mounted on an

optional Pedestal. Console is provided with several mounting holes on
the bottom for anchoring to the Pedestal or another support.
Console CPU Boards and AEC Control Board can be located inside the
Console (standard) or inside the Generator Cabinet (for Serial
communication).
2. When a Pedestal is used, secure the Pedestal to the floor through the
anchoring holes on its base and place the base cover. Attach the Console
to the Pedestal using the mounting holes on the bottom of the Console.
3. When the Console is wall supported, secure the support to the wall and
attach the Console to the support using the mounting holes on the bottom
of the Console.
4. Leave a sufficient working area around the equipment until its final
assembly.
14 IN-1052R0
Installation
SECTION 3 CABLE CONNECTIONS
This section provides the information necessary to connect the Generator

Cables with the system and options.
Note . For more information about electrical requirements and cable

connections, refer to the “Pre-Installation” document and
Section 5 “System Interconnections” at the end of this document.
Note . Identification of some terminal connections (TB, TS), boards, etc...

along with this document (text and schematics) may have a prefix
number which indicates the module number in the equipment.
(a.e. TS2 as 4TS2, 10TS2 or 11TS2).
Some safety devices such as the Safety Switch / Emergency Switch, Warning
Light, and Door Interlock Switch are supplied and installed by the customer.
Verify that safety devices have been properly installed and routed during the
Pre-Installation procedure.
3.1 CABLE ROUTING INSIDE GENERATOR CABINET
3.1.1 GENERAL CABLE ROUTING
1. Before connecting the Interconnection cables within the Generator

Cabinet, cables must be first connected to each Device (Positioner,
Tables, Buckys, etc.) and routed through the raceways. Remove the
ferrite blocks of the cables (factory clamped) when it is required to carry
out a correct routing, then re-install the ferrite blocks where they originally
were around cables.
Cables Entrance (upper side of Wall Support
2. Inside the Generator Cabinet, all Interconnection cables must be routed

over the Fastening Bar (upper rear bar) of the Cabinet Frame minding the
upper Cable Outlet at the rear side of the Cabinet Cover. (Refer to
Illustration 3-1).
IN-1052R0 15
Installation
Illustration 3-1
Cable Routing in Compact Generator
Fastening Bar
Stator & Interconnections

Cables Outlet (rear side)
Cable Ties

Cables Entrance
Cable Ties
Fastening Bar
Input Transformer
Power Line Cables
Ground Terminals HV Cables
Input Line Fuses Stator & Interconnections Cables
Power Line
Cable Entrance
Input Transformer

Cable Entrance
Power Line Cable Entrance
Input Line Fuses
16 IN-1052R0
Installation
3. For Generators with the Low or High Speed Starter located on a shelf
(Module 10 or 11), Stator and Interconnections Cables have to be routed
internally through the Cabinet close to the HV Transformer.
In order to avoid signal interferences, it is strongly

recommended to fold and fasten close to the Generator
Cabinet the portion of cables not routed (see picture below).
Never wrap in circles.
YES NO
4. Connect all cables as indicated in Section 3 “Cable Connections”.
5. Secure all cables to the Fastening Bar using cable ties after all
cable / wire connections are complete.
3.2 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES CONNECTION
FOR GENERATORS WITH A HV TRANSFORMER WITH

DOUBLE X-RAY TUBE RECEPTACLES (ANODE / CATHODE
TO CONNECT TWO TUBES): CONNECTIONS OF THE
FILAMENT LEADS “FIL-1 RTN” (J4-15) AND “FIL-2 RTN”
(J4-16) ON THE INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD HAVE BEEN
INVERTED. THESE CONNECTIONS ARE FACTORY SET.
(REFER TO SCHEMATIC 543020XX).
3.2.1 X-RAY TUBES WITH METALLIC INSERT ENVELOPE
In case of X-ray Tubes with a Metallic Insert Envelope, it is required to connect

the wire from the Metallic Insert Envelope to the Black Banana Plug connection
on the HV Transformer to obtain a correct mA measures. For these X-ray Tubes
the part number of the HV Transformer has to be coded in revision A or higher
(a.e. A6094--16A). (Refer to Section 5.2 -- Map 54302035).
IN-1052R0 17
Installation
3.2.2 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
Connect the HV Cables in the HV Transformer (Generator).
These cables must enter into the Generator through the cable outlet on the
upper side of the Cabinet and then attached to the fastening bar (upper rear bar)
of the Cabinet frame minding the upper cable outlet at the rear side of the
Cabinet cover.
The Terminal Pins of the High Voltage cables are extremely

delicate and easily damaged. Therefore they must be handled
carefully. Make sure that they are straight and that the splits
in the pins are open (parallel to sides).
1. The mounting accessories of each termination plug are factory

assembled. For extended information refer to the HV Cable
manufacturer’s instructions located inside the HV Cable package.
Do not install the Silicone washer supplied with the HV

Cables.
2. Unscrew the grub screw of the ring nut. (Refer to the illustration below.)
Contact Pins Nipple Ring Nut
Termination Plug Grub Screw
Contact
3. Prepare the high voltage terminals that will be installed in the HV

Transformer. Put approximately 1 cm (0.5”) of HV Oil in the HV
Transformer receptacles (included in the HV cables package). If HV Oil
is not available, fill the receptacles using silicone paste provided with the
X-ray Tube.
4. Carefully insert the anode and cathode termination plug into the
respective receptacle socket (watch the nipple on the plug to ensure
correct positioning of the contact pins).
5. Hand tighten the ring nut. It must be secure. Tighten the grub screw.
18 IN-1052R0
Installation
3.3 X-RAY TUBE CONNECTION
3.3.1 STATOR CABLE
X-ray Tubes are equipped with the Stator cable installed.
A LV-DRAC (Low Voltage - Digital Rotatory Anode Controller) is required for

High Speed X-ray Tubes. Connections between LV-DRAC and Power Module
are factory made.
Route the Stator cable together with the HV cables to the Generator Cabinet.
Connect the Stator cable terminals to the indicated Terminal Block TS2:
TERMINAL TS2
STATOR WIRES
TUBE-1 TUBE-2
MAIN TS2-1 TS2-9
AUX (Shift) TS2-2 TS2-10
COMMON TS2-3 TS2-11
Note . Terminal Block TS2 may be marked as 10TS2 or 11TS2

depending on the Generator model.
Note . For Philips or Siemens X-ray Tubes refer to Interconnection Maps

I/F-021 or I/F-024.
IN GENERATORS EQUIPPED WITH LV-DRAC: THE LV-DRAC

OUTPUT CAN BE AS HIGH AS 1000 Vrms. FOR SAFETY
REASONS (TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCKS), THE STATOR
CABLE MUST BE SHIELDED AND BOTH ENDS OF THE
SHIELD MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND.
DUE TO ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMC)

PROBLEMS, THE IGBT’s HEATSINK IS NOT GROUNDED. IT
IS CONNECTED TO THE NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF THE
INPUT RECTIFIER. TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, BE SURE
THAT THE INPUT LINE IS DISCONNECTED AND THE
CAPACITOR BANK IS PROPERLY DISCHARGED BEFORE
MANIPULATING THE LV-DRAC.
MAKE SURE THAT STATOR WIRES ARE PROPERLY

CONNECTED. BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURE, CHECK
THAT THE ANODE ROTATES CORRECTLY.
IN-1052R0 19
Installation
FANS
Wires from fans should be routed with the Stator Cables, and connected to the
indicated terminal of the Generator Cabinet. Depending on the model of X-ray
Tube, the fans are powered at 115 VAC or 220 VAC. Make the following
connections to select the fan voltage.
For Compact Generators with the Low Speed Starter LF-RAC located on a shelf
at the bottom of the Generator (module-10), connect wires from fans to:
GENERATOR WITH LOW SPEED STARTER

TUBE
CONNECTION WIRES FROM FANS 115 VAC 220 VAC
10TS2-6 and 10TS2-7 TB4-T1 with TB1-22 or TB1-23 TB4-T1 with TB1-25 or TB1-26
AS TUBE-1
on the Generator Cabinet on the LF-RAC Board on the LF-RAC Board
10TS2-14 and 10TS2-15 TB4-T2 with TB1-22 or TB1-23 TB4-T2 with TB1-25 or TB1-26
AS TUBE-2
on the Generator Cabinet on the LF-RAC Board on the LF-RAC Board
For Compact Generators with the High Speed Starter LV-DRAC located on a
shelf at the bottom of the Generator (module-11), connect wires from fans to:
GENERATOR WITH HIGH SPEED STARTER

TUBE
CONNECTION WIRES TO FANS 115 VAC 220 VAC
11TS2-6 and 11TS2-7 wire marked “T1” with 11TS2-17 wire marked “T1” with 11TS2-18
AS TUBE-1
on the LV-DRAC Module on the LV-DRAC Module on the LV-DRAC Module
11TS2-14 and 11TS2-15 wire marked “T2” with 11TS2-17 wire marked “T2” with 11TS2-18
AS TUBE-2
on the LV-DRAC Module on the LV-DRAC Module on the LV-DRAC Module
20 IN-1052R0
Installation
THERMOSTAT OR PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL
If the X-ray Tube is provided with a Safety Thermostat (approx. 65oC) or

Pressure Switch (must be NC Contact), the two wires should be routed to the
Terminal Block TS2 in the Generator Cabinet and connected to the following
Terminals.
In case that the X-ray Tube is provided with a Safety Thermostat (approx. 65oC)
and a Pressure Switch (both must be NC Contacts), connect them in series
before routing, connecting both wire-ends to their respective Terminals in TS2.
THERMOSTAT WIRES TUBE-1 TUBE-2
THERMOSTAT SIGNAL TS2-4 TS2-12
THERMOSTAT COMMON TS2-5 TS2-13
Note . Terminal Block TS2 may be marked as 10TS2 or 11TS2

depending on the Generator model.
If an X-ray Tube is not provided with Thermostat signal, jump both connections
in the Terminal Block TS2 (refer to above table).
GND AND/OR SHIELD
The connection of the GND and/or Shield wire of the Stator cables depend on
the Generator model.
GENERATOR MODEL
CONNECTION OF
Number of X-ray Tubes Starter type and Location GND and/or SHIELD WIRE
LF-RAC (Low Speed)

1 or 2 Tubes 10TS2--8 or 10TS2--16
Lower Cabinet Shelf (Module 10)
LV-DRAC (High Speed) 11TS2--8 (for Tube-1)

1 or 2 Tubes
Lower Cabinet Shelf (Module 11) 11TS2--16 (for Tube-2)
IN-1052R0 21
Installation
3.3.2 TUBE SELECTION SIGNALS
Note . This section only applies to Generators with two X-ray Tubes.
The Tube Selection signals are available through two contacts free of voltage
located on the starter.
TUBE-1 SELECTION TUBE-2 SELECTION SELECTION COMMON
on the LF-RAC Board J1-10 J1-11 J1-12
11KT1-83 and 11KT1-71

on the LV-DRAC Module 11KT1-84 11KT1-72
(connect both)
3.4 INTERCONNECTION CABLES
This section identifies the cables and runs needed for Generator and System
Interconnection. Route and connect the interconnection cables from each
component installed in the system to the Generator Cabinet as indicated in
Illustration 3-2 and Section 5.2 -- Interconnection Maps “543010XX”.
Interconnection cables should not be routed into the same

conduit or cable raceway as the Power or High Voltage
cables.
22 IN-1052R0
Installation
Illustration 3-2
Interconnection Cables
GENERATOR CABINET
ATP CONSOLE CPU
POWER CABLE (factory supplied)

J1 J2
COMMUNICATION CABLE (factory supplied)

J3 J3
SERIAL COMMUNICATION (factory supplied) SERIAL COMMUNICATION

J14 J5
J7 or J8
ROOM DOOR CABLE
(customer supplied)
TS1
ROOM LIGHT CABLE
(customer supplied)
INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied) CABLES FROM BUCKY 1 & 2

J2 TS1 (ONLY FOR SYSTEMS WITH 1 OR 2 BUCKY)
(field supplied)
AEC INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied) TS2 STATOR, FAN & THERMOSTAT FROM TUBES
J5 (field supplied)
TOMO INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied) TS3

J13
COMPATIBILITIES ION CHAMBERS, TOMO DEVICES

BUCKY 3 & 4, IMAGE SYSTEMS
ADAPTATIONS (customer supplied)
POWER LINE & GND FOR

L1 / L2 / L3 / N / GND LINE POWERED GENERATORS
(customer supplied)
GND CABLES (factory supplied)
Note . For Serial Generators (RS232 / RS422): Console CPUs are

located inside the Generator Cabinet and Interconnections are
factory made. Only one cable (serial communication) from J5 of
the Generator Cabinet should be connected to the Control Box, or
PC Interface Box, or Serial Console.
IN-1052R0 23
Installation
3.4.1 SERIAL INTERCONNECTION RS232 / RS422
GENERATOR TOUCH SCREEN (TPC) USING A POSITIONER WITHOUT

TOUCH SCREEN
For Generator using a TPC, perform the following connections:
(Refer to Illustration 3-3)
1. Connect the AC Supply Cable (A7059--xx) from “AC Supply” connector

of the TPC to the respective terminals in TS1 of the Generator Cabinet.
2. Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from “COM1

(Generator)” of the TPC to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.
3. Connect the Handswitch Cable to the Handswitch connector of the TPC.
4. The TPC includes extra connectors for the Mouse and the Keyboard.
Connect them as indicated in the illustration below. In some cases, these
communication ports are used to interface the TPC with other devices.
Note . For futher information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052 and
A6188--03 at the end of this Document.
24 IN-1052R0
Installation
Illustration 3-3
Connection of the Generator Touch Screen (TPC) using a Positioner without Touch Screen
GENERATOR TPC
HANDSWITCH
HANDSWITCH
AC SUPPLY CABLE (A7059--xx)

TS1 AC SUPPLY
SERIAL CABLE (A7067--xx)

J5 COM 1 (GENERATOR)
COM 2 TOUCH SCREEN

(INTERNAL)
COM 3
COM 4
M (MOUSE) OPTIONAL MOUSE
KB (KEYBOARD) OPTIONAL KEYBOARD
Label of Operating System Licence

AC Supply Cable
Serial Interconnection Cable (COM1)
Handswitch
Other Connections (keyboard, etc.)
IN-1052R0 25
Installation
GENERATOR TOUCH SCREEN (TPC) USING A POSITIONER WITH

TOUCH SCREEN
For Generator using a TPC, perform the following connections:
1. Connect the AC Supply Cable (A7059--xx) from “AC Supply” connector

of the TPC to the respective terminals in TS1 of the Generator Cabinet.
2. Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--xx) from “COM1

(Generator)” of the TPC to J2 “Console” of the System Interface Panel
in the Control Box.
3. Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from J1

“Generator” of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box to J5 of the
Generator Cabinet.
4. Connect the Handswitch Cable to the Handswitch connector of the TPC.
5. The TPC includes extra connectors for the Mouse and the Keyboard.
Connect them as indicated in the illustration below. In some cases, these
communication ports are used to interface the TPC with other devices.
Note . For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052 and
A6188--03 at the end of this Document, and refer to the respective
Positioner Service Manual.
26 IN-1052R0
Installation
Illustration 3-4
Connection of the Generator Touch Screen (TPC) using a Positioner with Touch Screen
GENERATOR TPC
HANDSWITCH
HANDSWITCH
AC SUPPLY CABLE (A7059--xx)

TS1 AC SUPPLY
J5 SERIAL CABLE (A3352--xx)

COM 1 (GENERATOR)
COM 2 TOUCH SCREEN

(INTERNAL)
COM 3
POSITIONER CONTROL BOX COM 4
J1 (GENERATOR) M (MOUSE) OPTIONAL MOUSE
J2 (CONSOLE) KB (KEYBOARD) OPTIONAL KEYBOARD
J6 (REMOTE ON) ON
REMOTE ON CABLE (A9611--xx)
Label of Operating System Licence

AC Supply Cable
Serial Interconnection Cable (COM1)
Handswitch
Other Connections (keyboard, etc.)
IN-1052R0 27
Installation
VIRTUAL CONSOLE (PC) USING A POSITIONER WITHOUT TOUCH

SCREEN
Systems using a Virtual Console running on a PC usually must have a PC

Interface Box installed between the PC and Generator.
Perform the following connections:
1. Remove the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
2. Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--01) from J1 of the PC

Interface Box to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.
3. Connect the Handswitch Cable to J2 of the PC Interface Box.
4. Connect the Interface Box--Computer Cable (A3363--01) to J3 of the PC

Interface Box and the other end (2 connectors) to COM1
(Communication) and J1 (Auto ON/OFF) of the Computer connectors.
Note . J1 connector is only available in Computers provided with Auto

ON/OFF Board inside (factory installed).
5. Re-install the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
6. Check to set proper Line Voltage on PC. Plug the Power Line cable for
the Computer to a 110 VAC or 230 VAC socket.
Note . For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052,

A6188--03 and I/F-036 at the end of this Document.
Illustration 3-5
Connection of the Virtual Console (PC) using a Positioner without Touch Screen
GENERATOR PC INTERFACE PC (COMPUTER)

CABINET BOX
SERIAL CABLE (A3352--01) PC BOX / PC CABLE

J5 J1 J1
(A3363--01)
J2 COM1
HANDSWITCH
J3
POWER LINE CABLE

TO 110 / 230 VAC SOCKET
28 IN-1052R0
Installation
VIRTUAL CONSOLE (PC) USING A POSITIONER WITH TOUCH SCREEN
Systems using a Virtual Console running on a PC usually must have a PC

Interface Box installed between the PC and Generator.
Perform the following connections:
1. Remove the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
2. Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--01) from J1 of the PC

Interface Box to J2 “Console” of the System Interface Panel in the Control
Box.
3. Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from J1

“Generator” of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box to J5 of the
Generator Cabinet.
4. Connect the Handswitch Cable to J2 of the PC Interface Box.
5. Connect the Interface Box--Computer Cable (A3363--01) to J3 of the PC

Interface Box and the other end (2 connectors) to COM1
(Communication) and J1 (Auto ON/OFF) of the Computer connectors.
Note . J1 connector is only available in Computers provided with Auto

ON/OFF Board inside (factory installed).
6. Re-install the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
7. Check to set proper Line Voltage on PC. Plug the Power Line cable for
the Computer to a 110 VAC or 230 VAC socket.
Note . For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052,

A6188--03 and I/F-036, and refer to the respective Positioner
Service Manual.
Illustration 3-6
Connection of the Virtual Console (PC) using a Positioner with Touch Screen
GENERATOR CONTROL PC INTERFACE PC (COMPUTER)

CABINET BOX BOX
SERIAL CABLE (A3352--01) PC BOX / PC CABLE

J2 J1 J1
(A3363--01)
J2 COM1
J5 J1 HANDSWITCH
J3
POWER LINE CABLE

TO 110 / 230 VAC SOCKET
IN-1052R0 29
Installation
GENERATOR SERIAL CONSOLE
For systems using a Serial Console, only a Serial Interconnection Cable

(A7066--xx) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet must be connected to the J1 of
the Serial Console. (Refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052, A6188--03).
3.4.2 COLLIMATOR ERROR SIGNAL (OPTIONAL)
This option must be requested on the customer order. For systems using an
Automatic Collimator, the X-ray exposure can be inhibited due to a Collimator
Error. This signal can be used only for one Automatic Collimator in the system,
special interconnection should be required when two Collimators are present.
Connect two wires from the Collimator to Terminal Block 4TS3-20 (Collimator
Error signal) and 3TS1-18 (or another GND in this Terminal Block). Collimator
Error signal goes (through the Interface Cable) from 4TS3-20 in the Generator
Cabinet to terminal J2-6 in Connector J2 of the ATP Console CPU Board. If the
system is not provided with Automatic Collimator connect 4TS3--20 to GND
(3TS1--18).
3.4.3 DOOR INTERLOCK SIGNAL
Connect two wires from the Room Door Interlock Switch(es) to Terminal Block
3TS1-22 (Door signal) and 3TS1-23 (Door Rtn - gnd). If the X-ray Room is not
provided with a Door signal, place a jumper between both connections in
Terminal Block 3TS1.
At this point, proceed to perform the complete Configuration

and the Calibration procedures except for AEC. Once
Configuration and Calibration tasks have been performed,
proceed with the rest of the Installation and Calibration tasks.
30 IN-1052R0
Installation
3.4.4 WARNING LIGHT SIGNAL
Room Warning Lamp(s) can be externally powered, or internally by the Terminal

Block 3TS1. Room Lamp(s) must be connected through the Terminal Block
3TS1-47 and 3TS1-48 (internal relay on Interface Control Board) to enable the
Generator switches On/Off the Room Warning Lamps. (Refer to Section 5.2 --
I/F-008).
3.4.5 COLLIMATOR LAMP AND SYSTEM LOCKS
The Generator can supply power to the Manual Collimator Lamp and System
Locks (Table, Vertical Bucky, etc.)
Connect wires from the Collimator Lamp to Terminal Block TB7-3 (24 VAC) and
TB7-4 (0 VAC) of the Lock Board.
Connect wires from the Locks to Terminal Block TB7-5 (+24 VDC) and TB7-6
(0 VDC) of the Lock Board.
Lock Board
Note . When required, voltages (VAC and VDC) on TB7 can be changed
by connecting their respective wires to the other available
terminals on the Input Transformer 6T2. (Refer to Schematics
543020XX).
IN-1052R0 31
Installation
3.4.6 BUCKYS (OPTIONAL)
Connect the Bucky as indicated in the Section 5.2 (Interconnections Maps for
Buckys), and test them before connecting the Ion Chambers.
The following table represents the standard Bucky cable connections:
SYSTEM CABLE FROM BUCKY IS CONNECTED TO
Terminal Block 3TS1 of the Generator Cabinet

Systems with 1 or 2 Bucky
(Refer to Section 5.2 -- Bucky)
Terminal Block TB2 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”,

Systems with 3 or 4 Bucky located in the Generator Cabinet
(Refer to “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” and Section 5.2 -- Buckys).
Terminal Block TB1 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”,

The Bucky of a RAD only Table with Tomo Device located in the Generator Cabinet
(Refer to “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” and Section 5.2 -- Buckys).
Note . Optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” is required to install

more than two Buckys in the System. (Refer to the “Tomo / Bucky
Adaptation Board” and the Manual for the Bucky).
If the “Bucky Start” signal enters the Bucky through a relay or another inductive
device (a.e. a motor), it is mandatory to add the supplied R2--C2 close to each
Bucky, so they have to be connected on the terminal output of the Bucky
assembly. The R-Cs are attached to the Generator harness in a bag.
If “Bucky Start” signal enters the Bucky through an optocoupler, do not add the
supplied R2--C2 for the Bucky.
Note . The operations described above will prevent noises and

uncontrolled Bucky movements that can cause exposure cutting
or console blocking.
3.4.7 TOMO DEVICE (OPTIONAL)
RAD Only Table
The Tomo cable (A3083-01) from connector J13 of the “ATP Console CPU
Board” has to be connected to the Terminal Blocks TB1 and TB2 of the optional
“Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”, located in the Generator Cabinet.
The cables from the Tomo Device are also connected to the Terminal Blocks
TB1 and TB2 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”. Refer to the
“Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” for more detailed information and interface.
(Refer also to the Manuals of the Tomo Device).
Note . RAD only Table requires the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation
Board”.
32 IN-1052R0
Installation
3.4.8 ION CHAMBERS (OPTIONAL)
The “AEC Control Board” (A3012-XX) must be installed on the ATP Console
CPU Board before installing the Ion Chamber(s). The “AEC Adaptation Board”
(A3263-03) is also required. (Refer to the “Ion Chamber” Service Manuals).
Perform the following tasks in the order described:
Note . The Generator is only compatible with Ion Chambers that output
a positive ramp.
1. If an Ion Chamber requires High Voltage (200 to 500 VDC), the Generator
must include an Interface Control Board (version A3009-09/12) that
supplies this voltage.
The Interface Control Board must have Jumpers from W3 to W8 in “A”

position. This High Voltage is supplied through Terminal Block 3TS1-39
“PT SPLY” of the Generator Cabinet and sent with a wire to TB1-9 of the
“AEC Adaptation Board”.
ION CHAMBERS WITH HIGH VOLTAGE
PHILIPS AMPLIMAT
GE BVM CGR
BVM-CGR
AMP-Phenolic Connector DB 15 Connector
300 VDC 230 VDC 500 VDC 400 VDC
Notes: -- If the System included both GE and BVM-CGR Ion Chambers, Terminal TB1-9 must supply 270 VDC.
-- Philips Amplimat Ion Chambers can not be installed with GE or BVM-CGR Ion Chambers.
DO NOT CONNECT ANY ION CHAMBER TO THE

GENERATOR CABINET UNTIL HIGH VOLTAGE IS EITHER
VERIFIED OR ADJUSTED TO THE VALUES REQUIRED.
OTHER VOLTAGE COULD DAMAGE THE ION CHAMBERS.
Turn the Generator ON and verify voltage in TB1-9 according to the Ion
Chambers to be installed. If necessary, adjust the High Voltage at
Potentiometer R20 of the Interface Control Board. Turn the Generator
OFF after adjustment.
IN-1052R0 33
Installation
2. Connect each Ion Chamber cable to J1 (IC1), J2 (IC2), J3 (IC3) or J5

(IC4) of the “AEC Adaptation Board”. The code for the Ion Chamber cable
supplied by the Generator manufacturer is A3253--01.
Note . Same Ion Chamber types have to be installed in consecutive order

starting at J1 (IC1). In the case of using four Ion Chambers, IC3
and IC4 must have the same film/cassette combination.
Note . The Vacutec, AID or similar Ion Chamber type is directly

connected to the “AEC Adaptation Board”. For Comet Ion
Chambers, cable connection has to be made previously through
the Comet Preamplifier PA-021 and then directly to the “AEC
Adaptation Board”.
For other cases, a cable adapter is required. The Generator

manufacturer has the following cable adapters available: GE
(A3082--01), CGR-BVM (A3081--01), Philips Amplimat
(A3080--01/02 with DB-15 or A6727-01/02 with Phenolic
connector) and MEDYS (A6715--01).
34 IN-1052R0
Installation
Illustration 3-7
Four Ion Chamber Connection
* Connections free of voltage IC Adaptation

GENERATOR Cables
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD
(A3263--03)
ION CHAMBER Cable
J1 IC 1 PREAMPLIFIER
POWER INTERFACE Cable
TS1 TB1
ION CHAMBER Cable
ATP CONSOLE BOARD

J5 ION CHAMBER Cable
AEC INTERFACE Cable ION CHAMBER Cable

J4 J5 IC 4 PREAMPLIFIER
* Connections with IC Adaptation Cables

AEC ADAPTATION PCB
POWER INTERFACE CABLE

TS1 (Generator Cabinet) TB1
ADAPTATION CABLE*
J1 ION CHAMBER 1
(field supplied)
ADAPTATION CABLE*
J2 ION CHAMBER 2
TB1--9 (field supplied)
ADAPTATION CABLE*
J3 ION CHAMBER 3
(field supplied)
ADAPTATION CABLE*
J5 ION CHAMBER 4
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD
(field supplied)
AEC INTERFACE CABLE

J5 J4
3. Configure Jumpers from JP1 to JP8 and from JP13 to JP16 according to
the group of Ion Chamber type:
JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER TYPE
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8 JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4 B B B
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 B B A
IC1 = IC2 B A A
IC1 ≠ IC2 ≠ IC3 ≠ IC4 A A A
IN-1052R0 35
Installation
4. Each type of Ion Chamber requires a specified reference voltage for

“Area Selections” and “AEC Reset” signals:
G Vacutec, AID and Comet Ion Chambers require GND (TB1-10).
G MEDYS, CGR-BVM, GE and Philips Amplimat Ion Chambers

require +24 VDC (TB1-4).
The reference voltage is provided from: TB1-7 “Relay 1” for IC1; TB1-6
“Relay 2” for IC2; TB1-5 “Relay 3” for IC3; and TB1-8 “Relay 4” for IC4.
For each group of Ion Chambers of the same type, connect a wire
between each of the above mentioned terminals to TB1-10 (GND), TB1-4
(+24 VDC) or TB1-3 (+12 VDC) depending on the voltage required
(examples: for four MEDYS Ion Chambers add only a wire-jumper
between TB1-7 and TB1-4; or for one MEDYS Ion Chamber as IC-1 and
one COMET Ion Chamber as IC-2 add a wire-jumper between TB1-7 and
TB1-4, and another wire between TB1-6 and TB1-10).
DO NOT TURN ON THE GENERATOR UNTIL THE INPUT

SIGNALS OF ALL THE ION CHAMBERS ARE CONNECTED TO
THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE. OTHER VOLTAGE MIGHT
DAMAGE THE ION CHAMBERS.
5. Ion Chambers output must be 0 VDC when there is no-radiation

(No-Offset adjustment). If an Ion Chamber output has an offset, it must
be adjusted to 0 VDC with the respective Potentiometer.
Configure Jumpers from JP9 to JP12 and turn ON the Generator only to
adjust the following Potentiometers (if needed) according to the Ion
Chamber output:
JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER OUTPUT
JP9 (IC1) JP10 (IC2) JP11 (IC3) JP12 (IC4)
NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT A A A A
OFFSET ADJUSTMENT B B B B
TEST POINT AND POTENTIOMETER

TP1 -- R11 TP2 -- R8 TP4 -- R2 TP12 -- R5
(ONLY IF JUMPER IS IN “B” POSITION)
36 IN-1052R0
Installation
SECTION 4 FINAL INSTALLATION AND CHECKS
4.1 HV TRANSFORMER
This point does not apply to the hermetic HV Transformers

(black aluminium HV Transformers).
Ventilation Screw
The HV Transformer contains “Shell Diala AX” oil. Check that there is no oil
leakage. If leakage is found, remove the oil fill plug from the top of the HV
Transformer and verify that the oil level is within 20 mm (3/4”) from the top of
the HV Transformer. Add “Shell Diala AX” oil if necessary.
Unscrew the Ventilation Screw from the top of the HV Transformer.
4.2 CABLE FASTENING AND COVERS
Note . Before re-installing cabinet covers, perform the rest of the required
Calibration procedures (a.e. AEC).
Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure. Cables should be
correctly routed. (Refer to Section 3.1)
In order to avoid signal interferences, it is strongly

recommended to fold and fasten close to the Generator
Cabinet the portion of cables not routed (see picture below).
Never wrap in circles.
YES NO
Re-install the Cabinet covers and connect its internal ground wires. Power line,
High Voltage and Interconnections cables must go through the cover cable
outlet.
IN-1052R0 37
Installation
38 IN-1052R0
Installation
SECTION 5 SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS
5.1 SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION SIGNALS
All input signals are active low. This means the inputs must be pulled to ground
(chassis ground of the Generator) thru relay contacts, by a transistor or other
switching device. The current requirement of the switch is less than 10 mA.
Do not apply 115 / 220 VAC logic signals to any of the logic
inputs. If 115 / 220 VAC logic signals are used in the X-ray
table, these signals must be converted to a contact closure
by a relay.
The outputs signals from the Generator to the subsystem devices are usually
active low (switched to chassis ground of the Generator). The outputs are open
collector transistor drivers with a maximum current of 0.5 Amperes.
Table 5-1
System Interconnection Signals
SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
AUX BUCKY SPLY External voltage supply required for the Bucky motion, when this voltage is not +24 VDC.
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD A low signal to the Interface Control Board as a command to output a Bucky-1 (normally the Table Bucky) drive signal.
--BUCKY 1 MOTION This low going signal from Bucky-1 indicates Bucky-1 motion, and therefore the exposure is enabled.
BUCKY 1 DR This signal is originated from the Bucky supply of the Power Module when an exposure order. It starts the Bucky.
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD A low signal to the Interface Control Board as a command to output a Bucky-2 (normally the Vertical Bucky Stand) drive signal.
--BUCKY 2 MOTION This low going signal from Bucky-2 indicates Bucky-2 in motion, and therefore the exposure is enabled.
BUCKY 2 DR This signal is originated from the Bucky supply of the Power Module when an exposure order. It starts the Bucky.
--BUCKY EXP This low going (0 volts) signal starts the Bucky exposure. The signal originates on the Interface Board
BUCKY SPLY Voltage supply required for the Bucky drive command.
C--HT CLK Serial data clock to the HT Control Board. This clock synchronizes the C--HT DATA signal.
C--HT DATA Serial data to the HT Control Board. This data is synchronous with the C--HT CLK signal.
This active low signal indicates that NO EXPOSURE HOLD condition exists at the Collimator. This input is read only when the
--COLLIMATOR
Radiographic Tube is selected.
--DOOR This low signal is the interlock for the Door of the X-ray room.
IN-1052R0 39
Installation
Table 5-1 (cont.)

System Interconnection Signals
SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
--FLD1 DR A low signal to select the right field in the Ion Chamber.
--FLD2 DR A low signal to select the left field in the Ion Chamber.
--FLD3 DR A low signal to select the center field in the Ion Chamber.
HT--C CLK Serial data clock from the HT Control Board. This clock synchronizes the HT--C DATA signal.
HT--C DAT Serial data from the HT Control Board. This data is synchronous with the HT--C CLK signal.
This signal is low when the switch in the high voltage transformer is in the RAD position. This is a safety interlock which
--HT INL
prevents an exposure if the high voltage switch (in the HV Transformer) is in the wrong position.
This analogic signal (originates in the optional AEC Control Board) controls the output of the HV Power Supply on the Interface
HV PT CRL
Control Board. +5 volts programs the output to be 0 volts, and 0 volts programs the output to approximately --1200 volts.
IC GND GND for the IC SPLY.
IC1 INPUT This input is the output of the Bucky 1 Ion Chamber (normally the Table Ion Chamber).
IC2 INPUT This input is the output of the Bucky 2 Ion Chamber (normally the Vertical Bucky Stand Ion Chamber).
IC3 INPUT This input is the output of the Spot Film Ion Chamber.
IC SPLY Power supply for the Ion Chamber. This output should be within the range of 500 to 800 volts.
--LINE CONT A low signal energizes the main line contactor K5 in the Power Module.
Commands to the HT Control Board to boost X-ray Tube Filament to the value of mA selected and to start the X-ray Tube Rotor
--PREP
is RAD Tube is selected.
This low going signal indicates the system is ready to make an exposure (Prep cycle complete). This signal is used to interface
--READY
to certain peripheral devices such as Film Changers, etc.
This low going signal indicates the X-ray preparation or exposure. This signal is used to interface to the Room X-ray warning
--ROOM LIGHT
light.
--STRT DR A low signal to indicate the start of an exposure to the Ion Chamber.
--THERMOSTAT-1 This signal from X-ray Tube indicates the overheat of the Tube-1.
--THERMOSTAT-2 This signal from X-ray Tube indicates the overheat of the Tube-2.
40 IN-1052R0
Installation
5.2 SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION MAPS
Refer to the following maps for details of the wire connections.
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION
• Compact / Compact-ESM Generators.

System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54301045
• Serial Communication to Generator.

System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54301052
• RS-232/422/485 Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6188--03
• PC / Serial Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/F-036
• Metallic Case X-ray Tube Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54302035
• Earthing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/F-103
STATOR INTERFACE
• Philips Tubes -- Stator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/F-021
• Siemens Tubes -- Stator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/F-024
ROOM LAMPS
• Room Warning Light Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/F-008
BUCKYS
• Table Bucky Interface

(Liebel / Midwest / Ultravit / Dong-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/F-001
• Vertical Bucky Interface

(Liebel / Midwest / Ultravit / Dong-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/F-002
AEC -- ION CHAMBERS
• AEC -- VACUTEC / AID / COMET Compatibility

for more than one Ion Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/M-015
• AEC Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3263--03
IN-1052R0 41
Installation
42 IN-1052R0
FLUORO CPU BOARD CONNECTOR J1 / J10 TERMINAL BLOCK 3TS1
COMPACT GENERATOR CABINET
SIGNAL I/O PIN PIN I/O SIGNAL
--4 IN SEL O 1 1 O SUPPLY (BUCKY 1)
--9 IN SEL O 2 2 O BUCKY SPLY 1 FOR GENERATORS
CONNECTOR J4 +12 VDC O 3 3 O 0 VAC (BUCKY 1) LINE POWERED
V SYNC I 4 4 O BUCKY 1 DR
SIGNAL I/O PIN TO LINE
} VOLTAGE
--FT SW CMD I 5 5 I --BUCKY 1 MOT L1
C--FL DAT I 1 L2/N
FL START O 6 6 I BUCKY 1 MOT RTN
GND I/O 2 BREAKER
--CAM FL EXP O 3 --CAM FL EXP O 7 FLUORO CABLE 7 O GND L3
N.U. 8 8 O SUPPLY (BUCKY 2)
C--FL CLK I 4 ADAPTATIONS 9 O BUCKY SPLY 2
GND TO EARTH GROUND
FL--C DAT O 5 --ABS O 9
GND I/O 6 --6 IN SEL O 10 BOARDS 10 O 0 VAC (BUCKY 2) L3 only for Three Phase
BEEP O 11 11 O BUCKY 2 DR
FL--C CLK O 7
GND O 12 12 I --BUCKY 2 MOT
CAM SYNC O 8
--MEM EN O 13 13 I BUCKY 2 MOT RTN
+12V ISO I 9 FOR GENERATORS
--MEM GATE O 14 14 O GND
N.U. 10 BATTERIES POWERED
N.U. 15 15 O +12V
16 O --12V 1TB1--LINE
17 O +24V UNR
L
} (Line
18 O GND 1
22 I --DOOR N 2
TO SOCKET
ATP CONSOLE BOARD 23 O DOOR RTN GND 3 Voltage)
24 O --ROOM LIGHT
26 O 220 VAC SW
FLUORO A.E.C.
27 O 115 VAC SW
AEC CABLE 36 O --SF PREP
CONNECTOR J4 CONNECTOR J5 NOTE.-- For Generator with DRAC :
37 O --FL EXP
SIGNAL I/O PIN SIGNAL I/O PIN 39 O PT SPLY The ROTOR TUBE connections
C--FL DAT O 1 IC1 INPUT I 1 42 O IC GND are made to TS2 on the DRAC
--CAM FL EXP I 2 IC3 INPUT I 2 47 O ROOM LIGHT SUP
FL--C DAT I 3 --FLD1 DR O 3 TERMINAL BLOCK
48 O ROOM LIGHT SW 4TS2 / 10TS2 / 11TS2
FL--C CLK I 4 --FLD3 DR O 4 51 I PT INPUT
SIGNAL I/O PIN TO ROTOR TUBE
+12V ISO I 5 GND O 5 52 O --ALOE
GND I/O 6 IC2 INPUT I 6 MAIN T1 O 1
53 O --READY
C--FL CLK I 7 IC4 INPUT I 7 AUX T1 O 2
54 O 220 VAC SPLY COM T1 O 3
GND I/O 8 --FLD2 DR O 8
CAM SYNC O 9 --STRT DR O 9 --THERMOSTAT 1 I 4
THERMOST. COMM. I 5
FAN 1 O 6
TOMO CABLE
0 VAC O 7
TERMINAL BLOCK 4TS3 GND O 8
NOTE : PIN I/O SIGNAL MAIN T2 O 9
TOMO INTERFACE Signal for Thermostats go to 4TS3 1 I --THERMOSTAT 1 AUX T2 O 10
and then to TS2 or go directly to TS2 2 I --THERMOSTAT 2 COM T2 O 11
CONNECTOR J13 CONNECTOR J2 depending on Generator model 3 I THERM. COMM --THERMOSTAT 2 I 12
SIGNAL I/O PIN SIGNAL I/O PIN 5 I TABLE ERROR 13
THERMOST. COMM. I
TIME1 I 1 --GEN OK O 1 7 I --SFC (--PT SEL) FAN 2 O 14
TIME2 I 2 --SFD SEL O 2 8 O ALOE 0 VAC O 15
TIME3 I 3 --THERMOSTAT 1 I 3
10 O --GEN OK GND O 16
TIME4 I 4 --SF PREP I 4
--PS (DSI) SEL I 5 GND (THERM. COM) I/O 5 11 O --SFD SEL
--CINE (DSA) SEL I 6 --COLLIMATOR I 6 12 O --DIRECT SEL NOTE :
--HCF SEL I 7 TABLE ERR(COMP) I 7 15 O EXP OK TS2--6 is GND when
SPARE IN I 8 --ROOM LIGHT O 8 16 O --ACT EXP TS2 only has 6 terminals.
--TOMO PREP O 9 --READY O 9 17 O --AUTO OFF
--TOMO EXP O 10 EXP OK O 10 18 I ABC OUT / --LEFT
TOMO ON O 11 ABC OUT/--LEFT O 11 19 I EXT SYNC(FL DSI)
EXT REF I 12 --DIRECT SEL O 12 20 I --COLLIMATOR
GND I/O 13 PT INPUT I 13
INTERFACE CABLE A I Foot Switch Cmd.
EXP STOP I 14 EXT SYNC (FL DSI) I 14 B GND CONNECTOR 6J2
--FS O 15 SPARE IN2 I 15 C O Prep/Rdy Acq Rad
--SFC (--PT SEL) I 16 PIN I/O SIGNAL
D I Boost Fluoro
1 O GND
--FL EXP I 17 E I Digital Exposure
2 O +12V UNR
GND (DOOR RTN) I/O 18
I 19 3 O +12VDC
--DOOR
--THERMOSTAT 2 I 20 4 I --PWR OFF
--AUTO OFF O 21 5 I --PWR ON
6 O GND
SPARE IN1 I 22
ALOE O 23 7 O GND
--ALOE O 24 8 O +12V UNR
--ACT EXP O 25 POWER CABLE 9 O --12VDC
CONNECTOR 6J3
NOTE -- For Serial Cabinet :
POWER COMMUNICATION PIN I/O SIGNAL -- the Interface cable connections are factory
1 O --EXP made to 3TS1, TS2 and 4TS3 terminal blocks.
CONNECTOR J1 CONNECTOR J3 2 O C--HT DAT -- 6J2 is not supplied, Power cable is directly
3 I HT--C DAT connected in factory to J1 of the ATP Console.
SIGNAL I/O PIN SIGNAL I/O PIN 4 O --PREP
GND UNR 1 -- 6J3 is not supplied, Power cable is directly
I --EXP O 1 5 O C--HT CLK
I 2 connected in factory to J3 of the ATP Console.
+12V UNR C--HT DAT O 2 6 I HT--C CLK
+12VDC I 3 HT--C DAT I 3
COMMUNICATION CABLE 7 O HV PT CRL
--PWR OFF O 4 --PREP O 4 8 O --KV DWN LOCKS BOARD
--PWR ON O 5 C--HT CLK O 5 9 I LINE SYNC TERMINAL BLOCK TB7
GND UNR I 6 HT--C CLK I 6 SIGNAL I/O PIN
10 O --LINE CONT
GND I 7 HV PT CRL O 7 24 VAC LAMP O 3
11 O --BUCKY 2 DR CMD
+12V UNR I 8 --KV DWN O 8 12 I --BUCKY EXP 0 VAC LAMP O 4 } COLLIMATOR LAMP
--12VDC I 9 LINE SYNC I 9 13 I --HT INL +24 VDC LOCKS O 5
--LINE CONT O 10
GND 14 O --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 0 VDC LOCKS O 6 LOCKS
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD O 11 15 O --KV UP
--BUCKY EXP I 12 GND CABLE STUD +24 VDC LOCKS O 7 (Table & Tube Stand)
16 O GND 0 VDC LOCKS O 8
--HT INL I 13
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD O 14
--KV UP O 15
F F. GARCIA 01/09/06 NAME DATE SHEET / OF

54301045
HAND--SWITCH (or VET PEDAL SWITCH) Adaptation Boards DWG:
CONNECTOR J15 E CN 04/032 F. GARCIA 26/04/04 DRAWING F. GARCIA 04/04/99
SIGNAL I/O PIN HAND--SWITCH 1/2
COM O 1 (or VET PEDAL SWITCH) D New interface F. GARCIA 08/01/02 REVISED A. DIAZ 28/01/00 F E D C B A REV
PREP I 2
EXP I 3
C New interface F. GARCIA 02/02/01
N.U. 4 GND
B CN 00/211 F. GARCIA 04/01/01
STUD
COMPACT / COMPACT-ESM GENERATORS
A New interface F. GARCIA 05/05/00 SEDECAL
REV DESCRIPTION ISSUED BY DATE
NOTE.-- The Adaptation Boards are optional
GENERATOR CABINET
AEC
GENERATOR CABINET ADAPTATION BOARD
AEC
ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03)
(A3263--03) to J5 of ATP Console Board J4
3TS1
J1 to Ion Chamber #1
HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY (if required)
to J5 of ATP Console Board J4 39
3TS1 TB1 J2 to Ion Chamber #2
16
--12V 2 RF ADAPTATION BOARD J2 to Ion Chamber #2
+12V (A3514--04) TB1
15 3
J3 to Ion Chamber #3 TB1
+24V UNR 9
17 4
--12V
3 2 J3 to Ion Chamber #3
18 GND 10
4 +12V 3
+24V UNR
5 4
NOTE 2 GND 10
Depending on the Ion Chamber,
make jumpers configuration and NOTE
interface as specific schematic IM-xxx
Depending on the Ion Chamber,
make jumpers configuration and
TOMO / BUCKY
ADAPTATION BOARD
(A3261--03/05) TOMO / BUCKY
ADAPTATION BOARD
TB1 (A3261--03/05)
12 TB1
13
12
13
NOTE
Depending on the Tomo Device,
make jumpers configuration and NOTE
Depending on the Tomo Device,
make jumpers configuration and
Interconnection of Adaptation Boards Interconnection of Adaptation Boards

for a Generator without RF Adaptation Board for a Generator with RF Adaptation Board
F F. GARCIA 01/09/06 NAME DATE SHEET / OF

54301045
Adaptation Boards DWG:
E CN 04/032 F. GARCIA 26/04/04 DRAWING F. GARCIA 04/04/99
2/2
D New interface F. GARCIA 08/01/02 REVISED A. DIAZ 28/01/00 F E D C B A REV
C New interface F. GARCIA 02/02/01
B CN 00/211 F. GARCIA 04/01/01
SEDECAL COMPACT GENERATORS
A New interface F. GARCIA 05/05/00
SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE
Board
GENERATOR CABINET
J1
J1
+24 VDC UNR
1 1
3 PWR GND
CHASSIS GND 2
5
SPARE
3 NOTE: FOR GENERAL INTERCONNECTIONS REFER TO SCHEMATIC
7 4
9 RXD
5 54301045 (COMPACT / COMPACT-ESM GENERATORS)
11 PREP/EXP COMM
EXP ORDER 6
13 7
POWER ON
15 8
9
10
11
12
13
2 +24 VDC UNR
14
4 PWR GND
15
6 CHASSIS GND 16 SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR SERIAL CONSOLE (A7066--xx or A3149--01) CONNECTOR J5
8 SPARE 17 PIN I/O SIGNAL
TXD 1 I CTS ( RXD-- )
10 18
PREP ORDER 2 I RXD ( RXD+ )
12 19
14 POWER COMM 3 O TXD ( TXD+ )
POWER OFF 20
16 21 4 O RTS ( TXD-- )
22 5 SPARE PIN 5
23 6 O ACT EXP
24 7 O LOGIC GND
25 8 O CHASSIS GND
9 O CHASSIS GND
NOTES: 10 +12 VDC
RXD ON GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO TXD ON SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE 11 --ALOE NOTE: REFER TO SCHEMATIC A6188--02 FOR
TXD ON GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO RXD ON SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE 12 O PWR GND RS--232/422/485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
13 O PWR GND
14 O PREP/EXP COMM
15 I EXP ORDER
TPC or PC INTERFACE BOX 16 I PREP ORDER
17 I/O POWER COMM
18 I POWER OFF
CONNECTOR J1 19 I POWER ON
SIGNAL I/O PIN 20 SPARE PIN 20
CTS ( RXD-- ) I 1 21 SPARE PIN 21
RXD ( RXD+ ) I 2 22 DOOR
TXD ( TXD+ ) O 3 23 DOOR RTN
RTS ( TXD-- ) O 4 24 O +24 VDC UNR
SPARE PIN 5 5 25 O +24 VDC UNR
ACT EXP O 6
LOGIC GND O 7 SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR TPC (A7067--xx or A3352--01)
CHASSIS GND O 8
CHASSIS GND O 9 SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR INTERFACE BOX (A3352--01)
+12 VDC 10
--ALOE 11
PWR GND O 12
PWR GND O 13
PREP/EXP COMM O 14
EXP ORDER I 15
PREP ORDER I 16
POWER COMM I/O 17
POWER OFF I 18
POWER ON I 19
SPARE PIN 20 20
SPARE PIN 21 21
DOOR 22
DOOR RTN 23
+24 VDC UNR O 24
+24 VDC UNR O 25
NOTES:
RXD AND TXD ARE INTERNALLY REVERSED IN TPC OR PC INTERFACE BOX

REFER TO SCHEMATICS I/F--036 FOR OTHER PC INTERFACE BOX CONNECTIONS
NAME DATE SHEET / OF

DRAWING F. GARCIA 07/07/99
DWG:
54301052
1/1
REVISED A. DIAZ 24/01/00 C B A REV
C NC 03 / 050 F. GARCIA 08/03/03
B New schematic F. GARCIA 08/01/02
SEDECAL SERIAL COMMUNICATION TO GENERATOR
A Connections F. GARCIA 02/02/01
ATP CONSOLE BD. ( Multilayer )
J5 HARNESS
J14 J5
J2 J1 1 14 PREP/EXP COMM
POWER CABLE PREP/EXP COMM
2 16
1 1 PREP ORDER PREP ORDER
GND GND 3 15
2 2 EXP ORDER EXP ORDER
+12V UNR +12V UNR 4 18
3 3 POWER OFF POWER OFF
+12V +12V 5 19 POWER ON
4 4 POWER ON
OFF OFF 6 17
5 5 POWER COMM POWER COMM
ON ON
6 6
GND GND
7 7 TS1
GND GND
8 8
+12V UNR +12V UNR 15 10
+12 VDC
9 9
--12V --12V 52 11 -- ALOE
12 PWR GND
COMMUNICATION 18 13
J3 CABLE J3 GND PWR GND
17 24 +24 VDC UNR
+24V UNR
--EXP 1 1 --EXP 25 +24 VDC UNR
C--HT DAT 2 2 C--HT DAT 22 22
DOOR
HT--C DAT 3 3 HT--C DAT RS--xxx 23 23 DOOR RTN
--PREP 4 4 --PREP J8 51 21
5 5 PT INPUT
C--HT CLK C--HT CLK
1 6
6 6 ACT EXP ACT EXP
HT--C CLK HT--C CLK 2
RXD+ 2 RXD+ ( RXD )
HV PT CRL 7 7 HV PT CRL 3 3 See Note
8 8 TXD+ TXD+ ( TXD )
--KV DWN --KV DWN 4 20
9 9 +5V
LINE SYNC LINE SYNC 5 7 LOGIC GND
10 10 GND
--LINE CONT --LINE CONT
6 5
11 11 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD 7 4
12 12 TXD-- TXD--
--BUCKY EXP --BUCKY EXP 8 1
13 13 RXD-- RXD--
--HT INL --HT INL 9 8
14 14 CHASSIS GND
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD --BUCKY 1 DR CMD
9
15 15 CHASSIS GND
--KV UP --KV UP
/////
RS--232
J7
Note.-- Signals between ( ) when RS--232 Serial Communication
1
ACT EXP
2
RXD
3
TXD
4
DTR
5
GND
6
7
8
9

DWG:
A6188--03
1/1
REVISED A. DIAZ 04/04/04 A REV
A CN 04/148 F. GARCIA 09/09/04 SEDECAL RS--232/422/485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION

PC INTERFACE BOX
(A6509--01)
HAND--SWITCH
J1 J2 HANDSWITCH CABLE
(A3223--05)
14 1 PREP/EXP COMM
PREP ORDER
16 2
15 EXP ORDER
3
25 +24V UNR
13 PWR GND LAMP COMPUTER
CONNECTION AUTO ON/OFF

TO GENERATOR INTERFACE BOX--COMPUTER CABLE (A3179--01/02)
(A3363--01)
INTERFACE BOX CABLE 19 POWER ON J3 J1/J2
(A3352--01)
4 4
18 POWER OFF
J2
1 1
1
17 POWER COMM +12V
6 6 2
GND
5 COM 1
N.U.
RS232
2 TxD 3 3
3 RxD 2 2
7 GND 5 5
GND
21 //// STUD
PT INPUT
10 +12 VDC
11 --ALOE for external

connection
22 DOOR
23 DOOR RTN

I/F--036
1/1
C CN 04/148 F. GARCIA 10/09/04
B CN 03/050 F. GARCIA 09/05/03
A CN 00/148 F. GARCIA 07/07/00 SEDECAL PC/SERIAL INTERFACE
5 4 3 2 1
D D
Anode supply
Black
X-ray Tube
mA
mA -
C
Red C
Shunt
Shunt
mA +
B B
Cathode supply
A A

DRAWING F. Díaz 11/02/03
54302035
1/1
REVISED A. Díaz 11/02/03 REV
SEDECAL METALLIC CASE X-RAY TUBE CONN.

5 4 3 2 1
GENERATOR CABINET
(1) Central Ground

(5) (2) GND Stud
(6) (4)
(3) Cabinet Cover GND
ROOM (4) Back Panel GND

ELECTRICAL (7) (3)
CABINET (5) Front Panel GND
(6) Filter LF1 Cover GND
(7) Adaptations Panel GND
(8) Console GND (Bottom Panel)
(9) Console Support GND
(1) (10) Pedestal Tube GND

GND cable
(2)
( yellow/green, AWG #10 ) (11) Pedestal Cover GND
(12) GND STUD
(12) Note.-- (9) applicable only

GND for metallical Box Console
OPERATOR CONSOLE
HV TANK
GND cable
( yellow/green, AWG #10 )
See Note (8)
(9)
PEDESTAL
(Option)
(10)
(11)

I/F--103
1/1
REVISED A. DIAZ 30/06/04 REV
SEDECAL EARTHING DIAGRAM

STATOR ROTALIX 350/351 CONNECTIONS
100 200
AUXILIARY MAIN
1 2
2 3 4 3
4 5 6 5
6 7 8 7
9 10
COMMON
STATOR SUPER ROTALIX 350 CONNECTIONS
100 200
AUXILIARY MAIN
1 2
4 3 4 3
6 5 6 5
8 7 8 7
9 10
COMMON
NAME DATE SHEET / OF Interconnection

DRAWING F. GARCIA 09/09/98 Interconexión I/F--021
1/1
SEDECAL PHILIPS TUBES--STATOR INTERFACE

STATOR 100 CONNECTIONS ( BIANGULIX and OPTILILIX TUBES )
Estator 100
BIANGULIX and OPTILIX ( SIEMENS )
Output 0 Ia I Ib II
connector
AUXILIARY
COMMON
MAIN
Make Make
jumper jumper
NOTE
CONNECT THE STATOR CABLE AS SHOWN.
CHECK THE CABLE SUPPLIED WITH THE TUBE.
NAME DATE SHEET / OF Interconnection

DRAWING F. GARCIA 09/09/98 Interconexión I/F--024
1/1
SEDECAL SIEMENS TUBES--STATOR INTERFACE

Interconnection 1.-- For Generator Interface with control relay and externally powered
POWER TS1 X--RAY ROOM

MODULE
47
}
ROOM LIGHT SUP
115 / 220 VAC
48
ROOM LIGHT SW
ROOM
WARNING
LIGHT
Interconnection 2.-- For Generator Interface with control relay and internally powered
POWER TS1
MODULE X--RAY ROOM
115 or 220 VAC SW
*
add jumper
ROOM
47 WARNING
ROOM LIGHT SUP LIGHT
48
ROOM LIGHT SW
0 VAC
(in TS1-3 or TS1-10) *
* Select the power supply on TS1 according to the lamp voltage.

Add jumper to TS1-26 for 220 VAC or to TS1-27 for 115 VAC.
Interconnection 3,-- Additional option to meet some Local Electrical Codes
POWER
MODULE TS1
ROOM LIGHT SUP 47
Contact 7A 1/6HP
125, 250 V AC
3A 30 V DC
48
ROOM LIGHT SW

E I/F update F. GARCIA 20/06/04 DRAWING F. GARCIA 04/19/95
I/F--008
1/1
D I/F update F. GARCIA 02/02/02 REVISED A. DIAZ 04/19/95 E D C B A REV
C I/F changing F. GARCIA 05/05/99
B ROOM WARNING LIGHT INTERFACE
SEDECAL
TS1 changing F. GARCIA 24/05/96
A EMC F. GARCIA 29/03/96 INTERFAZ LAMPARA RAYOS--X SALA
TABLE GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY LIEBEL (Semi--Automatic)

INTERFACE PANEL
BUCKY MIDWEST
BUCKY INNOMED (IBC 430)
Interface Control Board
Semi--Automatic
Bucky +24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP
B1 BUCKY 1 MOTION TS1--5 J4--11

K5
EXP INT
B2 BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN TS1--6
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K5
B3 BUCKY 1 DR TS1--4 J4--8

BUCKY START
K5 BUCKY 1
(SEE DR CMD
NOTE 3) J4--9
R2
C2
B8 0 VAC TS1--3
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--2
TS1--1 ADD JUMPER TO
B4 115/220 VAC
{ TS1--26
TS1--27 for 115 VAC
for 220 VAC
GND
NOTE 1: Be sure that B2 terminal is

not connected to B3 terminal.
NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the
bucky according to AC input
NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and
C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown.
Don’t add that R2--C2 for Liebel--Flarsheim 8000 Series Bucky, and
remove resistor R36 and R37 in the INTERFACE CONTROL board.
NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal

B2 no está conectado al B3.
NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del
bucky según la entrada AC
NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%, y
C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra.
Para Bucky Liebel--Flarsheim Series 8000, no añadir esa R2--C2, y quitar
las resistencias R36 y R37 en la tarjeta INTERFACE CONTROL.
NAME DATE SHEET / OF Interconnection Cable

DRAWING F. GARCIA 15/03/95 Cable de Inerconexión I/F--001
1/4
REVISED A. DIAZ 15/03/95 8 7 REV
8 Interf. board revised F. GARCIA 14/03/08 TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE

7 Innomed added F. GARCIA 09/09/02 SEDECAL
REV DESCRIPTION ISSUED BY DATE INTERFAZ BUCKY MESA
BUCKY LIEBEL (Automatic) INTERFACE PANEL

Automatic
Bucky +24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP

K5
EXP INT
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K5

BUCKY START
K5 BUCKY 1
DR CMD
ADD J4--9
JUMPER
B8
(SEE TS1--3
(SEE NOTE 2) NOTE 3) 0 VAC
R2 ADD JUMPER
BUCKY SPLY
C2
TS1--2
ADD JUMPER TO
B4 115/220 VAC TS1--1
{ TS1--26
TS1--27 for 115 VAC
for 220 VAC
GND



2/4

BUCKY ULTRAVIT INTERFACE PANEL
BUCKY +24 VDC

K3 BUCKY EXP
1 BUCKY 1 MOTION TS1--5 J4--11

K5
EXP INT
2 BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN TS1--6
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K5
4 BUCKY 1 DR TS1--4 J4--8

BUCKY START
K5 BUCKY 1
(SEE
DR CMD
NOTE 3)
J4--9
R2
C2
7 0 VAC TS1--3
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--2
5
ADD ADD JUMPER TO
8 JUMPER 115/220 VAC TS1--1
{ TS1--27 for 115 VAC
TS1--26 for 220 VAC
GND
NOTE 1: Be sure that 2 terminal is

not connected to 4 terminal.
NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%;
and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown.
NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal 2

no está conectado al 4.
NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%;
y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra.

3/4

BUCKY DONG--A INTERFACE PANEL
BUCKY +24 VDC

K3 BUCKY EXP

K5
EXP INT
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K5
4 BUCKY 1 DR TS1--4 J4--8

BUCKY START
K5 BUCKY 1
(SEE
DR CMD
NOTE 3)
J4--9
R2
C2
2 0 VAC TS1--3
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--2
3
ADD ADD JUMPER TO
{ TS1--26
TS1--27 for 115 VAC
for 220 VAC
7 GND



4/4

VERTICAL BUCKY GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY LIEBEL (Semi--Automatic) INTERFACE PANEL

BUCKY MIDWEST
Semi--Automatic
Bucky +24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP

K4
EXP INT
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4

BUCKY START
K4 BUCKY 2
(SEE DR CMD
NOTE 3) J4--9
R2
B8 C2 0 VAC TS1--10
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
TS1--9
ADD JUMPER TO
B4 115/220 VAC TS1--8
{ TS1--26
TS1--27 for 115 VAC
for 220 VAC
GND



1/4
8 Interf board revised F. GARCIA 14/03/08 VERTICAL BUCKY INTERFACE

REV DESCRIPTION ISSUED BY DATE INTERFAZ BUCKY VERTICAL
BUCKY LIEBEL (Automatic) INTERFACE PANEL

Automatic
Bucky +24 VDC
K3 BUCKY EXP

K4
EXP INT
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4

BUCKY START
K4 BUCKY 2
DR CMD
ADD J4--9
JUMPER
B8
TS1--10
(SEE 0 VAC
(SEE NOTE 2) NOTE 3)
R2 ADD JUMPER
BUCKY SPLY
C2 TS1--9
TS1--8 ADD JUMPER TO

B4 115/220 VAC
{ TS1--26
TS1--27 for 115 VAC
for 220 VAC
GND



2/4

BUCKY ULTRAVIT INTERFACE PANEL
BUCKY +24 VDC

K3 BUCKY EXP

K4
EXP INT
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4
4 BUCKY 2 DR TS1--11 J4--7

BUCKY START
K4 BUCKY 2
(SEE DR CMD
NOTE 3)
J4--9
R2
C2
7 0 VAC TS1--10
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
5 TS1--9
ADD ADD JUMPER TO
{ TS1--26
TS1--27 for 115 VAC
for 220 VAC
GND



3/4

BUCKY DONG--A INTERFACE PANEL
BUCKY +24 VDC

K3 BUCKY EXP

K4
EXP INT
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4
4 BUCKY 2 DR TS1--11 J4--7

BUCKY START
K4 BUCKY 2
(SEE
DR CMD
NOTE 3)
J4--9
R2
C2
2 0 VAC TS1--10
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY
3 TS1--9
ADD ADD JUMPER TO
{ TS1--26
TS1--27 for 115 VAC
for 220 VAC
7 GND



4/4

GENERATOR
POWER
MODULE
TB1
AEC ADAPTATION BD. ( A3263–03 )
TS1 POWER INTERFACE Cable 9 ION CHAMBER #1
J1
42 1 1 ION CHAMBER Cable Preamplifier
IC GND 1
16 –12 VDC 2 7 –12 VDC 7
15 +12 VDC 3 8 +12 VDC 8

17 +24 VDC 4 9 GND 9
18 GND 8 5 IC1 OUTPUT 5

IC1 OUT
5 +12 VDC 3 CENTER AREA 3
FLD2–IC1
6 C1 C3 2 LEFT AREA 2
– 4 0.1 uF 100uF FLD1–IC1
7 U1 35V 6 RIGHT AREA 6
TP1 RP4 +12 VDC TP2 RP4 +12 VDC FLD3–IC1
jumper IC1 10K IC2 10K LF347
10 TP6 RP1 +12 VDC R12 R7 4 RESET 4
10K 5 6 RP3 3K01 1 2 RP3 3K01 + STRT–IC1
IC4 R6 11
10K 10K
5 6 RP2 3K01 R10 –9 R11 R9 – 13 R8 C2 C4 Screen
10K 1K U1 6 5 1K U1 2 1 1K –12 VDC 100uF
R4 – 6 R5
LF347 RP3
1K
RP3
0.1 uF
35V
CONSOLE 1K U1 6 5 1K 8 LF347
AEC INTERFACE Cable 10K 14 10K
J5 J4 LF347 RP2 C10 + 10
C9 + 12
+12 VDC TP5
7 10K 7 7 8 3 3 4 TP4 RP1
0.1 uF 0.1 uF
5 GND 5 C8 + 5 RP4 RP4
IC3 10K R1 GND
ION CHAMBER #2
0.1 uF 7 7 8 8 10K RP2 3K01 J2
4 10K 1 2
RP1 JP9 JP10 10K ION CHAMBER Cable Preamplifier
7 IC4 INPUT 7 8 10K B A
IC1 OUT
B A
IC2 OUT R3 – 2 R2 1 1
JP12 1K U1 2 1 1K
IC4 OUT –12 VDC
1 IC1 INPUT 1 B A LF347 RP2 7 7
1 10K –12 VDC
6 6 C7 + 3 +12 VDC
IC2 INPUT 0.1 uF 3 3 4 8 +12 VDC 8
RP1
2 IC3 INPUT 2 4 10K 9 9
JP11 GND
IC3 OUT
8 –FLD 2 DR 8 B A 5 IC1 OUTPUT 5
IC2 OUT
3 –FLD 1 DR 3 3 CENTER AREA 3
FLD2–IC2
4 –FLD 3 DR 4 2 LEFT AREA 2
FLD1–IC2
9 –STRT DR 9 6 RIGHT AREA 6
FLD3–IC2
Shield 4 RESET 4
K10 K6 K2 STRT–IC2
JP8 JP6 JP14 K15
A A Screen
C6 6 1 6 1 6 1 A 6 1
100uF B B B
35V CR2
1N4148 13 8 13 8 13 8 13
FLD2–IC1 FLD2–IC2 FLD2–IC3 8
J3 ION CHAMBER #3
ION CHAMBER Cable Preamplifier
C5 1 1
K11 K7 K3 K14
0.1 uF JP4 JP2 JP16
A A 7 –12 VDC 7
6 1 6 1 6 1 A 6 1
B B B 8 +12 VDC 8
CR3
1N4148 13 8 13 8 13 8 13 8 9
FLD1–IC1 FLD1–IC2 FLD1–IC3 9 GND
5 IC1 OUTPUT 5
IC3 OUT
K12 K8 K4 K13 3 CENTER AREA 3
JP7 JP5 JP15 FLD2–IC3
A A A 2
6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 LEFT AREA 2
B B B FLD1–IC3
CR4 6 RIGHT AREA 6
1N4148 13 8 13 8 13 8 FLD3–IC3
FLD3–IC2 FLD3–IC3 13 8
FLD3–IC1 4 RESET 4
STRT–IC3
Screen
TP3 K9 K5 K1 K16
JP3 JP1 JP13
ST
A A 6 1 A
6 1 6 1 6 1
R13 B B B
10K CR1
1N4148 13 8 13 8 13 8 J5 ION CHAMBER #4
STRT–IC1 STRT–IC2 STRT–IC3 13 8
1 ION CHAMBER Cable Preamplifier
1
7 –12 VDC 7
8 +12 VDC 8
9 GND 9
5 IC1 OUTPUT 5
IC4 OUT
JUMPERS JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12 Ion Chamber Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers 3 CENTER AREA 3
Type JP3,JP4,JP7,JP8 JP1,JP2,JP5,JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16 2 LEFT AREA 2
POS. A – NO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4 B B B 6 6
POS. B – OFFSET ADJUSTMENT RIGHT AREA
4 RESET 4
IC1=IC2=IC3 B B A
Screen
IC1=IC2 B A A
/ / /
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4 A A A
NAME DATE SHEET / OF DWG:

Note.– Compatible interface with preamplifier for Ion Chamber types : DRAWING F. GARCIA 07/08/96
IM–015
1/1
– Expos–AID REVISED A. DIAZ 10/10/96 A REV
– Vacutec 70145/70151
– Comet Ion Chambers with PA–021 Preamplifier
A Version 03 F. GARCIA 10/10/99 SEDECAL AEC – AID / VACUTEC / COMET COMPATIBILITY
--FIELD SEL 3
F E D C B A
TB1 J1
1 1
COMM COMM
2 7
--12 VDC --12 VDC
3 8
+12 VDC +12 VDC
4 9
+24 VDC GND
8 5
4 RELAY 4 IC1 OUT IC1 OUTPUT 4
5 +12 VDC 3
RELAY 3 -- 4 FLD2--IC1 CENTER AREA
6 U1 C1 C3 2
RELAY 2 LF347 100uF FLD1--IC1 LEFT AREA
0.1 uF
7 + 35V 6
RELAY 1 TP1 +12 VDC 11 FLD3--IC1 RIGHT AREA
RP1 +12 VDC RP4
9 TP6 IC1 10K C2 C4 4
IC4 10K R12 TP2 --12 VDC STRT--IC1 --RESET
R6 RP4 +12 VDC 0.1 uF 100uF
10 RP2 3K01 5 6 RP3 3K01 IC2 35V
5 6 10K 10K
GND R7
6 10K -- 9 R11 +12 VDC TP5
R4 --
6 5
R5
1K
R10
1K U1 56 1K
1 2 RP3
10K
3K01
IC3
TP4 RP1
10K GND J2
1K U1 R1
LF347 RP3 R9 -- 13 R8 1
J4 7
LF347 RP2
10K C10
8
10 10K 1K U1 2 1 1K 1 2 RP2
10K
3K01
COMM
5 +
5 C8 +
0.1 uF 7 7 8 14
LF347 RP3 R3 -- 2 R2 --12 VDC
7
7 7 8
GND 0.1 uF
RP4 C9 12 10K 1K U1 2 1 1K --12 VDC
RP1 + RP2 +12 VDC
7 8 10K 0.1 uF 3 3 4 LF347 8
8 10K JP9 1 10K
IC4 INPUT JP12 IC1 OUT RP4 C7 +
3 +12 VDC
IC4 OUT 4 10K
1 B A B A
JP10 0.1 uF 3 3 4 9
IC1 INPUT IC2 OUT RP1 GND
6 B A 4 10K 5
IC2 INPUT JP11 IC2 OUT IC2 OUTPUT
IC3 OUT
2 B A 3
IC3 INPUT FLD2--IC2 CENTER AREA
8 2
3 --FLD 2 DR FLD1--IC2 LEFT AREA 3
3 6
--FLD 1 DR FLD3--IC2 RIGHT AREA
4 4
--FLD 3 DR STRT--IC2 --RESET
9
--STRT DR
J3
K10 JP8 K6 JP6 K2 JP14 K15 1
COMM
A A A
6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 7
B B B --12 VDC
CR2
1N4148
8
C6 13 8
FLD2--IC1
13 8
FLD2--IC2
13 8 13 8 +12 VDC
C5 FLD2--IC3
0.1 uF 100uF 9
35V GND
5
K11 JP4 K7 JP2 K3 JP16 K14 IC3 OUT IC3 OUTPUT
A A A 3
6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 FLD2--IC3 CENTER AREA
B B B 2
CR3 FLD1--IC3 LEFT AREA
1N4148 13 8
13 8
FLD1--IC1 FLD1--IC2
13 8
FLD1--IC3 13 8 6
FLD3--IC3 RIGHT AREA
4
STRT--IC3 --RESET
2 K12 JP7 K8 JP5 K4 JP15 K13 2
6 1
A
6 1
A
6 1 A
6 1 J5
B B B
CR4 1
1N4148 COMM
13 8 13 8 13 8 13 8
FLD3--IC1 FLD3--IC2 FLD3--IC3 7
--12 VDC
8
+12 VDC
TP3 K9 JP3 K5 JP1 K1 JP13 K16 9
ST GND
A A 6 1 A
6 1 6 1 6 1 5
R13 B B B IC4 OUT IC4 OUTPUT
10K CR1
1N4148
3
13 8 STRT--IC1 13 8
STRT--IC2
13 8 STRT--IC3 13 8 CENTER AREA
2
LEFT AREA
6
RIGHT AREA
JUMPERS JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12 4 1
--RESET
POS. A -- NO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
POS. B -- OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
Note.-- Version 03 as CN 99/45
1
Ion Chamber Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers NAME DATE SHEET / OF
Type JP3,JP4,JP7,JP8 JP1,JP2,JP5,JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
DWG:
A3263--03
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4 B B B 1/1
IC1=IC2=IC3 B B A
IC1=IC2 B A A AEC ADAPTATION
/ / /
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4 A A A SEDECAL
ADAPTACION AEC
F E D REV DESCRIPTION ISSUED BY DATE
DB-1004R4
Data Book
Data Book
REVISION HISTORY
0 APR 1, 2001 First edition
1 FEB 10, 2003 Documentation update
2 JAN 25, 2005 Documentation update
3 NOV 2, 2004 Documentation update
4 OCT 26, 2006 Extended Memory Locations
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.

DB-1004R4
Data Book
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Installation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Maintenance History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 DATA TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
DB-1004R4 i
Data Book
ii DB-1004R4
Data Book
This Data Book is the register of the Configuration and Calibration data of the
Generator and the register of each Periodic Maintenance Service carried out.
Keep this book always with the equipment for reference.
Note . Enter the data with a pencil in order to modify them later due to
future changes.
If the HT Controller Board or the ATP Console CPU Board are

replaced, check specially that Extended Memory data have
not been lost or modified with the Board change. Compare
Extended Memory data displayed on the Console with the
values noted in this document.
Also, make some exposures using different techniques and

Focal Spot and check that mA stations are calibrated
correctly, if not perform Calibration procedures.
Note . Verify that “Configuration Control Sheet” and “Final Test Results”
pages from factory have been included with the equipment.
1.1 INSTALLATION DATA
Enter the following information.
HOSPITAL
INSTALLED AND TESTED BY DATE
DB-1004R4 1
Data Book
1.2 MAINTENANCE HISTORY
Enter the following information after each data modification in this book or
Periodic Maintenance Service.
DATE PERFORMED BY SERVICE NOTES
2 DB-1004R4
Data Book
SECTION 2 DATA TABLES
Table 2-1
3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board
3024SW1 POSITION OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
Table 2-2
3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board
Table 2-3
3024SW3 and 3024SW4 - ATP Console CPU Board
Note . Dip switch 3024SW3 and 3024SW4 is not used for configuration
but all their switches must be set in “Off” position.
DB-1004R4 3
Data Book
Table 2-4
3000SW2 - HT Controller Board
Table 2-5
Workstations
VALUE ON DISPLAYS
WORKSTATION PUSH
PUSH-BUTTONS
BUTTONS
ms AVAILABLE
(Draw the push-buttons or kV mAs mA
(kV Tracking) AEC AREAS
combinations in the cells) (Tube) (Device-WM) (AEC-IC)
(option)
WS1
WS2
WS3
WS4
WS5
WS6
WS7
WS8
WS9
WS10
4 DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-6
Jumpers in other Generator Boards
GENERATOR BOARDS JUMPERS POSITION
JP1 and JP2
HT CONTROLLER JP3, JP5 and JP6
JP4
FILAMENT CONTROL JP1
W1
INTERFACE CONTROL W2
W3 to W10
JP1, JP2 and JP3
JP4
JP5
JP6
Connector J8 configured for RS232 so:

JP9, JP10 and JP11 in “A”. JP7, JP8, JP21
and JP22 do not matter jumpers position
ATP CONSOLE CPU Connector J8 configured for RS422 so:

JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 and JP11 in “B”.
JP21 and JP22 do not affect jumpers position
JP12
JP13
JP14
JP15, JP16, JP17 and JP18
JP19
DB-1004R4 5
Data Book
Table 2-7
AEC Configuration
JUMPERS POSITION
AEC Control Board A3012--_____
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP4
JUMPERS POSITION
AEC Adaptation Board A3263--03
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8
JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6
JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
JP9 (IC1)
JP10 (IC2)
JP11 (IC3)
JP12 (IC4)
6 DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-8
Fluoro Configuration
OPERATION MODE
FIXED RATE PULSED FLUORO VARIABLE RATE PULSED FLUORO ABC
JUMPERS IN FLUORO CPU BOARD

INSERTED REMOVED
(A3213-XX)
W1
W2 Always inserted (installed)
JUMPERS IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD (A3024-XX)
JP4 Always in “B” position -- Camera
JUMPERS POSITION
RF Adaptation Board A3514--_____
JP1, JP3, JP4, JP8, JP9, JP10, JP12, JP13, JP14
JP2
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP11
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
JP20
JP21
JP22
JP23
JP24
DB-1004R4 7
Data Book
Table 2-9
Extended Memory Locations
MEMORY LOCATION VALUE MEMORY LOCATION VALUE
E01 E17
E02 E18
E03 E19
E04 E20
E05 E21
E06 E22
E07 E23
E08 E24
E09 E25
E10 E26
E11 E27
E12 E28
E13 E29
E14 E30
E15 E31
E16 E32
MEMORY LOCATION
(only for Capacitor VALUE
Discharge Generator)
E67
E68
E69
8 DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-10
Rotor Acceleration Time Configuration
3000SW2-2
OPERATION MODE
OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
Rotor Speed Low Speed High Speed
TUBE-1 3000SW2-7 3000SW2-8

ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME
AND FILAMENT SETTING TIME OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON) OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
_____ seconds
TUBE-2 3000SW2-5 3000SW2-6

_____ seconds
3000SW2-4
FLUORO ROTOR
HOLD-OVER TIME OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
Status: ______
Table 2-11
LV-DRAC Configuration
3243SW1 3243SW2 3243SW3 3243SW4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
DB-1004R4 9
Data Book
Table 2-12
mA Calibration Numbers
TUBE-1
FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kVp BREAK POINT

mA
A STATION
40 50 80 120
10
12.5
16
20
25
32
40
50
64 (or 63 or 65)
80
100
125
160
200
250
320
400
500
640 (or 630 or 650)
800
1000
Note.-- The mA station values depend on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.
10 DB-1004R4
Data Book
Table 2-12 (Cont.)

mA Calibration Numbers
TUBE-2
FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kVp BREAK POINT

mA
A STATION
40 50 80 120
10
12.5
16
20
25
32
40
50
64 (or 63 or 65)
80
100
125
160
200
250
320
400
500
640 (or 630 or 650)
800
1000
Note.-- The mA station values depend on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.
DB-1004R4 11
Data Book
12 DB-1004R4
CF-1018R3
Configuration
Configuration
REVISION HISTORY
0 OCT 30, 2003 First edition
1 APR 1, 2005 Documentation upgrade
2 AUG 1, 2005 Anode Stator Configuration
3 OCT 10, 2005 Documentation upgrade
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.

CF-1018R3
Configuration
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 INITIAL CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Configuration and Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.1.1 3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1.5 3000SW2 - HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Basic Configuration of Generator Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 AEC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.4 FLUORO Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5 Generator Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.6 Exposure Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.7 Workstations Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2 EXTENDED MEMORY SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1 Extended Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2 How to Enter and Store Data in the Extended Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.3 Limit of Maximum kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3 X-RAY TUBE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1 X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.2 Generators with LF-RAC (Low Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3.2.1 Stator Voltage and Capacitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.2.1.1 Configuration for One or Two Tubes with Standard Stator 24
3.2.1.2 Configuration for One or Two Tubes with the same
Starting Voltage at 110 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.2.1.3 Configuration for Two Tubes with Different
Starting Voltage and Capacitor or One Tube
with Starting Voltage at 330 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2.2 Programming of Rotor Acceleration Time, RAD Filament Setting Time,
FLUORO Rotor and Filament Hold-over Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
CF-1018R3 i
Configuration
Section Page
3.3 Generators with LV-DRAC (High Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.1 Anode Stator Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.2 Programming of RAD Filament Setting Time and
FLUORO Filament Hold-over Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.4 Anode Rotation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.5 Focal Spots Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4 X-RAY TUBE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
ii CF-1018R3
Configuration
SECTION 1 INITIAL CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
Configuration provides the initial settings for extended memory and checkout
procedures that must be carried out before making X-ray exposures.
Functional characteristics of this Generator are defined at the time of
installation.
Calibration and some configuration data are stored in a non-volatile memory

chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board in the Power Cabinet.
When the initial setup and checkout has been completed the Generator will be
ready for Calibration.
Note . Record all the configuration settings in the Data Book.
DO NOT SUPPLY THE MAIN POWER UNTIL SPECIFICALLY

INSTRUCTED TO DO SO IN THIS DOCUMENT.
THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER

RETAIN A LARGE PORTION OF THEIR CHARGE FOR
APPROX. 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.
The Generator configuration is determined by:
• X-ray tube(s) number, model and use.
• System requirements (Bucky, Tomo, AEC, ...)
• Maximum kV, kW.
Specific versions of U24-EPROM on the ATP Console CPU Board and U5 on

the HT Controller Board are based on the Generator configuration. (Refer to
Illustration 1-1).
The system configuration and test switches are:
DIP SWITCH LOCATION FUNCTION
3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board System Configuration
3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board Test
3024SW3 - ATP Console CPU Board No used for Configuration
3000SW2 - HT Controller Board System Configuration and Test
CF-1018R3 1
Configuration
Illustration 1-1
EPROM and Switch locations
J7 J8
3024SW2
3024SW3
U24 3024SW4
3024SW1
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD -- A3024
3000SW2
U5
HT CONTROLLER -- A3000 INTERFACE CONTROL -- A3009
POWER SUPPLY
FILAMENT DRIVER
A3004
POWER CABINET -- FRONT PANEL
2 CF-1018R3
Configuration
1.1 CONFIGURATION AND TEST SWITCHES
ATP Console Dip Switches must be configured with the Generator turned OFF,
and they are read when the Generator is turned ON again.
1.1.1 3024SW1 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD
Set dip switch 3024SW1 in accordance with the Table 1-1.
Table 1-1
System Configuration Dip Switch 3024SW1 on the ATP Console CPU Board
1 60 Hz *1) 50 Hz *1)
Normal -- Application mode.

2 -- Exposures are inhibited when
Door Interlock Switch is opened.
3 Not used. Set in “OFF” position. Not used.
4 Not used. Set in “OFF” position. Not used.
Note.-- *1) This switch is related with the frequency of the Rotor Controller. For Generators with High Speed Starter
(LV-DRAC) or Generators Powered through Batteries with Stand-Alone set always SW1-1 to 60 Hz, in the rest of
Generators set SW1-1 in accordance with the Power Line Frequency.
Set dip switch 3024SW2 verifying that each position is set as Table 1-2.
Table 1-2
Test Dip Switch 3024SW2 on the ATP Console CPU Board
Skips reception with the HT Controller. Use only

for display purposes, troubleshooting or Demo
1 Consoles when there is no Power Module. Be Normal -- Application mode.
sure that J3 connector is not plugged to the ATP
Console CPU Board.
Tick Sound (button / command acknowledge) is Tick Sound (button / command acknowledge) is
2
not emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board. emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board.
3 Normal -- Application mode. Service Mode .
kV Log (Renard) Scale Mode for kV variation kV Lineal Scale Mode for kV variation (Normal
4
(kV changes in logarithmic steps) (if available). mode) (kV changes one by one).
CF-1018R3 3
Configuration
Dip switch 3024SW3 is not used for configuration but all their switches must be
set in “Off” position.
Dip Switch 3024SW4 is not used for configuration but all their switches must be
set in “Off” position.
1.1.5 3000SW2 - HT CONTROLLER BOARD
HT Controller Dip Switches can be configured while the Generator is ON except

Dip Switch 3000SW2-1.
Set dip switch 3000SW2 as indicated in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3
Test Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board in the Power Module
3000SW2
POSITION
Programming of Rotor Acceleration Time,

1 Normal. RAD Filament Setting Time, Fluoro Rotor and Filament
Hold-over Time *1) *2)
2 Normal. Bypasses: Filament, Rotor Ready, Error E11. *1) *3)
3 Normal -- Not used. Not used.
4 Normal -- Digital mA Loop Closed Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant *1)
5 125 kV *4) 150 kV *4)
6 All Generators except Tube-2 for RAD Generators with Tube-2 for RAD only.
7 Filament Boosting for Tube--1 No Filament Boosting for Tube--1 *5)
8 Filament Boosting for Tube--2 No Filament Boosting for Tube--2 *5)
Notes.-- *1) Set in Closed (On) position only for Calibration and Testing procedures when indicated in the Service Manual.
*2) Note that SW2-1 in Closed (On) position is only set to program the Rotor Acceleration Time, Rad Filament Setting
Time, Fluoro Rotor and Filament Hold-over Time, therefore it changes the functions of Switches SW2-2 and SW2-4 to
SW2-8. Refer to Section 3.
*3) This turns off the filaments so no radiation will be produced during the exposure.
WARNING: THE kV OUTPUT OF THE HV TRANSFORMER WILL BE WHATEVER IS SET BY THE CONSOLE. IF
THE X-RAY TUBE HV CABLES ARE NOT CONNECTED INTO THE HV TRANSFORMER, FILL COMPLETELY BOTH
HV RECEPTACLES WITH HV OIL.
*4) Set SW2-5 according to the Generator kV rating (refer to the Generator model and/or specifications).
*5) Set to “No Filament Boosting” when using X-ray Tubes with Small Focal Spot smaller than 0.6 .
4 CF-1018R3
Configuration
1.2 BASIC CONFIGURATION OF GENERATOR BOARDS
The following Jumpers are factory set or removed to configure the Generator
Boards according to the customer order. Check the jumper positions in the
Generator Boards.
GENERATOR BOARDS JUMPERS POSITION
JP1 and JP2 in “2”

HT CONTROLLER
JP3, JP5 and JP6 in “2” and JP4 in “1” : for Compact Generators.
JP3, JP5 and JP6 in “1” and JP4 in “2” : for Vertical Generators.
FILAMENT CONTROL JP1 in “A”
W1 in “2--3”
W2 in “1--2”
INTERFACE CONTROL
W3 to W10 in “A” : for positive High Voltage supply for Ion Chamber
W3 to W10 in “B” : for negative High Voltage supply for Photomultiplier Tube
JP1, JP2 and JP3 in “B” (soldered)
JP4 in “B” (Cam-Sync)
JP5 in “B” : Standard

JP5 in “C” : for R&F / DSI Generators with AEC Control Board A3012--02/05
JP6 in “A” (soldered)
Connector J8 configured for RS232 so: JP9, JP10 and JP11 in “A”.
JP7, JP8, JP21 and JP22 do not matter jumpers position
ATP CONSOLE CPU
JP12 removed
JP13 installed (set) : if AEC Control Board A3012--xx is installed

JP13 removed : if AEC Control Board A3012--xx is not installed
JP14 installed (soldered)
JP15, JP16, JP17 and JP18 removed
JP19 in “A” (soldered)
CF-1018R3 5
Configuration
1.3 AEC CONFIGURATION
Configure the following Jumpers on the “AEC Control Board” (located over the
“ATP Console CPU Board”) and on the “AEC Adaptation Board” when this
option is installed in the Generator Cabinet.
AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--01/02/05)
JUMPER DESCRIPTION
JP1 A FOR TV CAMERA

B FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER
C FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG
A3012-05:
A3012 05: JP1
JP1-C,
C JP2-A
JP2 A AND JP4
JP4-B
B FOR FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG
ATS DIG
JP2 A FOR TV CAMERA A3012-02: JP1-A, JP2-A AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA
B FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER A3012-01: JP1-B,, JP2-B AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP4 A FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER -- AEC

B FOR ION CHAMBER -- AEC & ATS--DIG
JP3 A FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY JP3-A FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH HIGH SENSITIVITY
B FOR LOW SENSITIVITY JP3-B FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH LOW SENSITIVITY
NOTE: HIGH SENSITIVITY IS > 2 V / mR (> 0.223 V / μGy) (a.e. Vacutec Ion Chamber)
LOW SENSITIVITY IS < 2 V / mR (< 0.223 V / μGy) (refer to Ion Chamber documentation)
AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--06/07/09)
JUMPER DESCRIPTION
JP1 A FOR TV CAMERA JP1-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA

B FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER JP1-B FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER
C EXTERNAL kV CONTROL JP1-C FOR ABC WITH EXTERNAL kV UP & DOWN CONTROL
JP3 B FOR NORMAL OPERATION JP3-B FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP4 A FOR NORMAL OPERATION JP4-A FOR NORMAL OPERATION (Only in A3012-06)
6 CF-1018R3
Configuration
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03)
JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER TYPE
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4 (Default) B B B
IC1 = IC2 B A A
JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER OUTPUT
NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT (Default) A A A A

TP1 -- R11 TP2 -- R8 TP4 -- R2 TP12 -- R5
1.4 FLUORO CONFIGURATION
Fluoro configuration depends on position of jumpers W1 and W2 in the “Fluoro

CPU Board” and jumper JP4 in the “Console CPU Board”, as indicated below:
JUMPERS IN FLUORO CPU BOARD

INSERTED REMOVED
(A3213-XX)
W1 ABC not enable ABC enable
W2 Always inserted (installed)
JUMPERS IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD (A3024-XX)
JP4 Always in “B” position -- Camera
CF-1018R3 7
Configuration
Also, configure the following Jumpers on the optional “RF Adaptation Board”.
RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--04)
JUMPER POSITION FUNCTION
Set all jumpers +24 VDC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
JP1, JP3, JP4, Remove all jumpers
JP8, JP9, 230 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
JP10, JP12,
JP13, JP14 Set only JP1,
115 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
JP8 and JP12
Set Generator +24 VDC for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER

JP2
Removed External supply for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER
A ZOOM 1 output selected from Generator (--9 IN SEL)

JP5
B ZOOM 1 output selected from Table or external control

JP6

JP7
A LIH output through a N.O. contact

JP11
B LIH output through a N.C. contact
A LIH output selected from an external enable signal

JP15
B LIH output selected for Last Image Hold function
A EXP ON/END output active for only RAD exposure

JP16
B EXP ON/END output active for Fluoro and RAD exposure
A For EXP ON output active along the RAD exposure

JP17
B For EXP END output active about 50 ms pulse at the end of the RAD exposure
A For ABC Window adjustment

JP18
B For normal operation
A Pulsed Fluoro sync. activated with the negative edge of Exp. Sync+
JP19 B Pulsed Fluoro sync. from composite video signal (video in)
C Pulsed Fluoro sync. activated with the positive edge of Exp. Sync+
A For ABC OUT signal from composite video signal (video in)
JP20 B For ABC OUT signal from a negative external ABC signal
C For ABC OUT signal from a positive external ABC signal
A ABC OUT signal generated from composite video signal or external ABC signal
JP21
B ABC OUT signal coming directly from the Image System
Set ABC OUT signal generated from composite video signal or external ABC signal
JP22
Removed ABC OUT signal coming directly from the Image System
Set Normal position (composite video signal referenced to the Generator ground)
JP23
Removed To reduce noise (composite video signal isolate from Generator ground)
A Normal position (Fluoro order from the Table sent directly to the Generator)
JP24
B For Fluoro order enable (Fluoro order from the Table sent to the Image System)
8 CF-1018R3
Configuration
1.5 GENERATOR SERVICE MODE
The Generator Service Mode (GSM) program allows the access to the service
screens for Reading the Exposure Counters, Configuration and Calibration
procedures.
Start the GSM program by clicking on the “TechService” icon in the path:
“StartMenu / Programs / Tech Service / TechService”. (This is the path by default
after installing the program from the CD-Rom).
After accessing to the GSM program, a black Information Area appears at the
lower right corner of the screen to show some messages related with the
process (a.e. “Power Up the Generator”).
If after pressing the “Configuration”, “Calibration” or Auto Calibration” buttons,

the GSM program prompts an error message: “Please check calibration dip
switch and toggle with power off”; it means that these functions are disabled
because position of dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the “ATP Console CPU Board”
is not in “Service Mode Allowed”. Turn OFF the generator, change the dip
switch 3024SW2-3 to Closed (ON) position, turn ON the generator and start the
GSM program again.
Illustration 1-2
GSM Menu
CF-1018R3 9
Configuration
The screens to “Read Exposure Counters”, to enter in “Configuration”, “Manual

Calibration” or “Auto Calibration” are displayed after selecting the respective
button on the right side. Press again the selected button (in yellow on the right
side) to return to the GSM menu.
The “Cancel” button can also be used to return to the GSM menu, specially if
the others buttons are disable.
Note . Whenever the “Configuration” menu is closed (by pressing any of

“Configuration” or “Cancel” buttons) a double-beep will sound
confirming the storage of the values set for each workstation.
During operation of the GSM program the color of the selected buttons changes
to yellow when they are selected.
Press the “Close” button to exit from the GSM program.
Exposure status indicators for “Ready” and “X-ray On” are located on the upper
right area of the GSM screens. The “Information Area” displays data related to
the service mode, remaining heat units, working mode, errors indicators, etc.
When an error code or message is displayed on the GSM program press the
“Reset Error” button to reset the error indication.
Illustration 1-3
Status and Error Indicators
Workstation Selected Exposure Indicators
Cancel Button
Button of Menu Selected
Reset Error Button
Error Indicator
Information Areas
10 CF-1018R3
Configuration
1.6 EXPOSURE COUNTERS
The Exposure Counters display the number of Rad exposures made with any
of the X-ray Tubes and the accumulated Fluoro exposure time (in hours and
minutes) made with the Tube-2.
1. Enter in the GSM program and select the “Read Exposure Counters”
button.
2. This screen shows the Exposure Counters.
3. Exit from this screen by pressing the “Read Exposure Counters” button
or the “Cancel” button again.
Illustration 1-4
Exposure Counters
CF-1018R3 11
Configuration
1.7 WORKSTATIONS CONFIGURATION
This screen is used to view the configuration of the Workstations (Tube, WM,
Ion Chamber, etc.) and the AEC Areas selected by default for each Workstation
in the system (optional).
The workstations can be configured according to the customer preferences or

default. If a workstation is configured with the value “Tube -- 0”, its button can
not be selected during operation.
CUSTOMIZED CONFIGURATION
Note . This procedure has to be performed always that “ATP Console

CPU Board” is replaced by a new one.
1. Enter in the GSM program and select the “Configuration” button.
2. Once in Configuration mode, if the Generator has installed the “Fluoro

CPU Board” the program has to indicate “RF” on the RAD/RF window.
This means that Fluoro functions are enabled.
Note . If the Fluoro functions are not enabled (“RF” does not appear) the
Fluoro Display and functions will be deactivated after selecting a
workstation for Tube-2. In this case, exit, check connection
between the Fluoro CPU and ATP Console CPU Board and enter
in Configuration again until the “RF” indication appears.
Illustration 1-5
Configuration
12 CF-1018R3
Configuration
3. Select the first workstation to be configured, by pressing the respective

button (only the icon of the selected workstation has different color). The
console shows one of the following values:
DISPLAY FUNCTION VALUE DESCRIPTION
0 No-configured workstation
1st Value TUBES 1 Tube-1
2 Tube-2
0 -- Direct Direct (No Bucky)
1 -- Bucky 1 Bucky-1
2 -- Bucky 2 Bucky-2
3 -- STD Tomo Standard Tomo *1)

DEVICES --
2nd Value
WORKING MODE 4 -- STD RF Standard RF (Spot Film Device)
5 -- DSI Digital RAD and Fluoro *2)
6 -- Cine Cine *2)
7 -- DSA DSA *2)
0 No AEC
1 Ion Chamber-1 (IC-1)

ION
3rd Value
CHAMBERS 3 Ion Chamber-3 (IC-3)
5 Photomultiplier (PT-INPUT)
1 Formula-1
2 Formula-2
3 Formula-3
4 Formula-4
kV TRACKING
4th Value
(OPTIONAL) 5 Formula-5
6 Formula-6
7 Formula-7
8 Formula-8
Notes:
-- Some of listed values are not configurable depending on the Generator model .
*1) Only when the Tomo is controlled from the Generator. In this case, the workstation has to be configured as Tube “1” or “2”,
Device “STD Tomo” and Ion Chamber “0”.
If the Tomo is controlled from the Table, the workstation has to be configured as Tube “2”, Device “STD RF” and Ion Chamber “0”.
*2) These Devices are only available for Generators provide with interface option for Digital Systems. These workstations has to
be configured as Tube “2”.
CF-1018R3 13
Configuration
4. Set the new value by pressing the corresponding “Increase” or

“Decrease” buttons. Value on “KV Tracking” (optional) assigns by default
one Formula for “Zero Point” operation mode to the selected RF
workstation. Set also the selected AEC Areas by default for each
Workstation in the system (optional).
5. Select the next workstations to be configured and set the respective

values of each one.
6. Exit from configuration mode by pressing the “Configuration” button, then

a double-bip will sound confirming the process.
7. Exposures made from workstations configured with:
G Device “Direct (No Bucky), Bucky-1, Bucky-2 and Standard Tomo”

are only enabled with the internal “Preparation” and “Exposure”
signals controlled by the Handswitch or Rad Footswitch.
G Device “Standard RF” and “DSI” are only enabled with the
external signals for “Preparation”, “RAD Exposure” and “Fluoro
Exposure”. Fluoro can only be made from this Device
selection.
G Device “Infimed: DSI, Cine, DSA” are only enabled with the
external “Digital Preparation” and “Exposure” signals connected
to Terminal Block 4TS3 of the Generator Cabinet.
Note . 1) Optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” (in the Power

Cabinet) is required to configure more than two Buckys or one
Tomo Device in the system.
For system without the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”,

it can only work directly with two Buckys, and the value assigned
to them must be “1” and “2” in the second value.
2) TOMO must be always related to Bucky-1. Only one TOMO can

be used in the system, so only one of the workstations should be
configured with the value “3” in the second value.
3) Optional “AEC Control Board” (connected to the Console CPU

Board) is required to work with AEC.
Optional “AEC Adaptation Board” is required to configure any

no-standard or more than one Ion Chambers in the system.
14 CF-1018R3
Configuration
DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
Default configuration sets some default values to each workstation. It only

should be used to re-initialize the workstation configuration when the complete
configuration has been lost or it is not possible to select any workstation.
1. Enter in the GSM program and select the “Configuration” button.
2. Press the “Default Configuration” button.
3. Exit from configuration mode by pressing the “Configuration” button, then

a double-bip will sound confirming the process.
4. It is recommended to perform a proper configuration of each workstation

in the system after a default configuration.
CF-1018R3 15
Configuration
16 CF-1018R3
Configuration
SECTION 2 EXTENDED MEMORY SETTING
2.1 EXTENDED MEMORY LOCATIONS
Miscellaneous configuration and calibration data are stored in the Extended

Memory Locations. It is recommended to note the values factory stored in each
Memory Location. (Refer to Table 2-1)
Note . For generators with only one Radiographic X-ray Tube, this tube
have to be configured, calibrated and used as Tube-1.
Note . For generators with a Fluoroscopic X-ray Tube or DSI (Digital

RAD), this tube have to be configured, calibrated and used as
Tube-2.
For these generators, the value of the E17 Memory Location is not
readable as “Tube-2 -- Filament stand-by (Autocalibrated)”.
Note . Generators with a single X-ray Tube for Fluoroscopy / Spot Film
/ DSI (Digital RAD) require to store the respective values of the
Memory Locations:
-- E17: Tube-2 -- Fluoro filament setting.
-- E18: Tube-2 -- Fluoro tube type.
-- E29 and E31: Tube-2 -- Exposure Time adjustments.
-- Other required Memory Locations.
CF-1018R3 17
Configuration
Table 2-1
Extended Memory Locations
MEMORY LOCATION FUNCTION VALUE
E01 TUBE-1 -- RAD filament stand-by (Autocalibrated. Not field changeable)
E02 TUBE-1 -- RAD tube type
E03 Low Digital mA Loop Closed (from 10 mA to 80 mA)
E04 AEC-1 calibration
E05 High Digital mA Loop Closed (from 100 mA)
E06 kV Loop
E07 Maximum kW (Factory set. Only field changeable to lower value)
E08 AEC-1 tracking
E10 AEC-2 tracking
E11 Not used.
E12 AEC Density Scale
E13 TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay
E14 Not used.
E15 TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kV
E16 Not used.
TUBE-2 -- RAD filament stand-by (Autocalibrated. Not field changeable)

E17*
TUBE-2 -- FLUORO filament setting
E18 TUBE-2 -- RAD or FLUORO tube type
E19 Maximum FLUORO kV
E21 Not used.
E22 Not used.
E23 AEC-4 calibration / Photomultiplier AEC calibration (SF camera)
E24 AEC-3 tracking / AEC-4 tracking (equal value for both)
E25 FLUORO mA display calibration at 50 kV
E28 Not used.
E29 TUBE-2 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay
E30 Not used.
E31 TUBE-2 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kV
E32 Not used.
* Note.-- For Fluoroscopic use, value in E17 means “Fluoro filament setting” and must be manually set
18 CF-1018R3
Configuration
2.2 HOW TO ENTER AND STORE DATA IN THE EXTENDED MEMORY
The Extended Memory data are entered from the Console when the unit is in
service mode. Access to memory locations as indicated below:
1. Turn the Generator OFF and set the Test dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the
ATP Console CPU Board in “On” position to permit the service mode.
2. Power ON the System and select the “Manual Calibration” button on the
GSM program.
3. Select the needed Workstation (WS) using the “Up” and “Down” buttons,
then press the “OK” button to enter in calibration mode.
Note . In calibration mode, only the kV and mA parameters can be

modified, values for Time and mAs are factory programmed.
4. Increase the mA value beyond the maximum mA position. The mA

Display will show the first Extended Memory location (E01), they will
continue sequentially as the “Increase mA” button is pressed.
The values stored in each location are shown on the “Calibration Value”
Display after pressing the “Read” button or after pressing the “Increase”
or “Decrease” buttons of this panel. Since these buttons are also used
to increase or decrease the stored values, one number should be added
or subtracted from the reading, to obtain the current stored value.
5. Select the new value by pressing the “Increase” and “Decrease” buttons.
Each time these buttons are pressed the value displayed on the
calibration panel is increased or decreased one step.
6. Store the new value by pressing the “Store” button (Check-summ

function).
Note . If the “Store” button is not pressed after a new value is selected,
no modified data will be retained.
7. Exit from calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button

again.
8. Turn the Generator OFF and set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP
Console CPU Board in “Off” position to place the Generator in normal
mode.
CF-1018R3 19
Configuration
Illustration 2-1
Calibration
Calibration Value Panel
20 CF-1018R3
Configuration
2.3 LIMIT OF MAXIMUM kW
The Maximum kW of the Generator is factory set according to the Generator

performance. Generator kW can be limited to a lower value.
Note . This limit can be set to a lower value to match the maximum
Generator power to the Line power, due to a high line impedance
(refer to Pre-installation document).
1. Enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button on

the GSM program. Select any workstation (WS) and press the “OK”
button.
2. Select the E07 Memory Location (memory location is shown on the mA
Display).
3. Set the new limit of Maximum kW by pressing the “Increase” or
“Decrease” calibration buttons and store the value by pressing the
“Store” button.
4. Exit from calibration mode.
Note . Record configuration data for E07 in the Data Book.
CF-1018R3 21
Configuration
22 CF-1018R3
Configuration
SECTION 3 X-RAY TUBE SELECTION
3.1 X-RAY TUBE INSERT PROTECTION CURVES
In order to properly select the X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves for the Tubes
connected to the Generator, perform the following procedure:

the GSM program. Select one of the workstation (WS) related to the
X-ray Tube to be configured. Then press the “OK” button.
2. Select the respective memory location, E02 for Tube-1 or E18 for Tube-2
(memory location is shown on the mA Display).
3. Identify in Section 4 “X-ray Tube Data”, the X-ray tube that is being
installed and note its tube type number.
4. Set the tube number by pressing the “Increase” or “Decrease” calibration

buttons until the correct number is showed on the “Calibration Value”
panel.
5. Store the value by pressing the “Store” button.
6. Verify that the tube code (ID) shown in the mAs Display is the same of
the tube code listed in Section 4 “X-ray Tube Data”. The tube code (ID)
can be only read for the selected X-ray Tube after pressing the “Store”
button.
7. If required, repeat this procedure for the other X-ray Tube.
Note . Record configuration data for E02 and E18 in the Data Book.
CF-1018R3 23
Configuration
3.2 GENERATORS WITH LF-RAC (LOW SPEED STARTER)
3.2.1 STATOR VOLTAGE AND CAPACITOR SELECTION
Check that the capacitor value of the Low Speed Starter

corresponds to the value recommended by the X-ray Tube
manufacturer. If needed replace the capacitor. Also, the Rotor
speed must be indicated by the manufacturer.
The DC Brake of the Low Speed Starter (LF-RAC) can be removed by

desoldering CR6 on the LF-RAC Board (refer to schematic 543020xx). In this
case, the Tube will remain coasting after releasing the “Prep” or the “Fluoro”
order.
3.2.1.1 CONFIGURATION FOR ONE OR TWO TUBES WITH STANDARD STATOR
Voltage and capacitor is factory set to 220 VAC, 30 μF. In all cases, refer to
X-ray Tube Product Data.
3.2.1.2 CONFIGURATION FOR ONE OR TWO TUBES WITH THE SAME STARTING VOLTAGE AT
110 VAC
When the stator requires a starting voltage of 110 VAC (a.e. X-ray Tube Toshiba
E7239 / E7240 / E7242 / E7252 / E7299 / E7813 / E7865) perform the following
modifications:
• If the Power Input Transformer 6T2 is for using with power lines up to
240 VAC (part number 50509030), remove the wire labelled as “4” that
is connected to Terminal 4 (230 VAC RTR) and connect it to Terminal 3
or 8 (110 VAC).
• If the Power Input Transformer 6T2 is for using with power lines up to 530
VAC (part number 50509029), remove the wire labelled as “4” that is
connected to Terminal 4 (230 VAC RTR) and connect it to Terminal 40
(110 VAC).
• For X-ray Tube Toshiba E7252 or E7813 (or when it is required) replace
also the Fuse F1 (6A) on the LF-RAC Board by another fuse of 10 A.
These changes affect to all the Tubes connected to

Generator.
24 CF-1018R3
Configuration
3.2.1.3 CONFIGURATION FOR TWO TUBES WITH DIFFERENT STARTING VOLTAGE AND
CAPACITOR OR ONE TUBE WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 330 VAC
For Generators equipped with a LF-RAC module for two X-ray Tubes, with
possible selection of voltage and capacitor jumpers on the LF-RAC Board, set
jumpers according to the respective X-ray Tube(s) as indicated below.
TWO TUBES WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 220 VAC AND 330 VAC
OR ONE TUBE WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 330 VAC
(A “Kit of 330 VAC” is required with this configuration).
TUBE-1 TUBE-2
220 VAC TB2-T1 with TB1-5 or TB1-6 TB2-T2 with TB1-5 or TB1-6
VOLTAGE
330 VAC TB2-T1 with TB1-8 or TB1-9 TB2-T2 with TB1-8 or TB1--9
30 μF TB3-T1 with TB1-12 or TB1-13 TB3-T2 with TB1-12 or TB1-13

CAPACITOR
10C5--1
15uF
NOTE.-- 10T3, 10C5--1 and
10R4--1 for 330 VAC Stator
10C5--2
30uF
10R4--1
1 Mohm, 2w
10R4--2
1 Mohm, 2w
30uF
10J8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TB1 TB1
1 1
230 VAC RTR KACC
( S1, 2--D2 ) 2 K1--1 TB3 TB3
60 VAC RTR KCT
3 2 T2 K2--3 T1
0 VAC RTR F1
T 6A
3 Tube 2 Tube 1
47 7
10RC1 2w 10T3 330V TB2
8 T1
100 nF
1 KV 9
Tube 1 KCT
10LF2 10K1 220V K2--1 LF--RAC BOARD
2 4
2 1 10A1
1 3
6
TB2
0V 5 T2
4
Tube 2
T1/T2 COMM
(to 10TS2)
CF-1018R3 25
Configuration
TWO TUBES WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 220 VAC AND 110 VAC
(A “Kit of 110 VAC” is required with this configuration).
TUBE-1 TUBE-2
220 VAC TB2-T1 with TB1-5 or TB1-6 TB2-T2 with TB1-5 or TB1-6
VOLTAGE
150 VAC TB2-T1 with TB1-8 or TB1-9 TB2-T2 with TB1-8 or TB1--9

CAPACITOR
10C5--1
15uF
10C5--2
30uF
10R4--1
1 Mohm, 2w
10R4--2
1 Mohm, 2w
30uF
10J8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TB1 TB1
1 1
230 VAC RTR KACC
( S1, 2--D2 ) 2 K1--1 TB3 TB3
60 VAC RTR KCT
3 2 T2 K2--3 T1
0 VAC RTR F1
T 6A
3 Tube 2 Tube 1
47 7
10RC1 2w 10T3 220V TB2
8 T1
100 nF
1 KV 9
Tube 1 KCT
10LF2 10K1 150 V K2--1 LF--RAC BOARD
2 4
2 1 10A1
1 3
6
TB2
0V 5 T2
4
Tube 2
T1/T2 COMM
(to 10TS2)
26 CF-1018R3
Configuration
3.2.2 PROGRAMMING OF ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME, RAD FILAMENT SETTING TIME,

FLUORO ROTOR AND FILAMENT HOLD-OVER TIME
Rotor Acceleration Time is determined by the X-ray Tube and

Rotor characteristics and it must be considered when the
Generator is about to be configured. X-ray Tube could be
permanently damaged unless the required RPM are reached
before an exposure. (Refer to technical information of the
X-ray Tube).
Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board is used to program:
• Rotor Acceleration Time. That depends on stator voltage, stator

frequency, stator type, quality of X-ray tube bearings, and X-ray tube
anode size. A reed tachometer or a stroboscope can be used to
determine the anode RPM. Be sure that the Rotor Acceleration Times
meet all requirements for anticipated customer applications.
This value is programmable from 0.8 to 2.7 seconds. After this time the
Rotor is hold running in maintaining mode as long as “Prep” is active.
• Rad Filament Setting Time. This parameter has the same configuration
value than the Rotor Acceleration Time. Sometimes, if it is required to
increase the Rad Filament Setting Time to the next value, configure the
respective switches again. This adjustment avoids Error-12.
• Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time. This
value can be programmed to run for 1 minute or not at all, after releasing
the Fluoro Pedal.
Note . The Rotor Acceleration Time and Rad Filament Setting Time is
factory set to 1.8 seconds. The Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and
Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time is factory set to 1 minute. Maintain
this value when it is unknown or not provided with the X-ray Tube
documentation.
1. Turn the Generator OFF and note current settings of the dip switch
3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board.
Note . Configuration of these times are only allowed when dip switch
3000SW2-1 is in “Closed” (On) position after power the Generator
OFF and back ON again.
CF-1018R3 27
Configuration
2. Set dip switches 3000SW2-1 and 3000SW2-2 as indicated below, in

order to enable the selection of times with the Low Speed Starter. Dip
switch3000SW2-1 has to be switched ONLY with the Generator
powered OFF.
3000SW2-1 (selection enable) 3000SW2-2 (Low Speed Starter)
ON OFF
3. Configure the Rotor and Filament Times by setting the dip switches
3000SW2-4 through 3000SW2-8 per Table 3-1.
Table 3-1
Low Speed: Configuration of Rotor and Filament Times
TUBE-1 3000SW2-7 3000SW2-8

0.8 seconds - -
1.2 seconds - -
1.8 seconds - -
2.7 seconds - -
TUBE-2 3000SW2-5 3000SW2-6

0.8 seconds - -
1.2 seconds - -
1.8 seconds - -
2.7 seconds - -
3000SW2-4
FLUORO ROTOR AND FILAMENT HOLD-OVER
HOLD OVER TIME
After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, the Rotor stops and the Filament Current goes
-
back to stand-by.
After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, 1 minutes passes before the Rotor stops
-
and the Filament Current goes back to stand-by.
Note . Record the switch configuration in the Data Book.
4. To validate previous configuration, turn the Generator ON, wait until

Error--01 (E01) appears on the Console and turn the Generator OFF.
5. Set dip switch 3000SW2 to the original settings as noted in step-1. (Refer
to Section 1.1.5 for the normal settings of Dip Switch 3000SW2).
28 CF-1018R3
Configuration
3.3 GENERATORS WITH LV-DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
3.3.1 ANODE STATOR SELECTION
For Generators with High Speed Starter, configure NOW the X-ray Tube
Family (anode stator + insert) by setting the respective dip switches 3243SW1
(pos. 4 to 8) and / or 3243SW2 (pos. 4 to 8) on the Control DRAC Board. (Refer
to “LV-DRAC - Digital Rotating Anode Controller” document).
Configuration of these dip switches automatically determines the appropriate

Starting and Running Stator Voltage and Rotor Acceleration Time of the
selected Tube Family.
3.3.2 PROGRAMMING OF RAD FILAMENT SETTING TIME AND FLUORO FILAMENT

HOLD-OVER TIME
Note . With High Speed operation:
-- Rotor Acceleration Time is related to the X-ray Tube Family

configured on the Control DRAC Board (LV-DRAC).
-- Fluoro and Spot Film Rotor Hold-over Times are configured on

the Control DRAC Board (LV-DRAC).
-- Rad Filament Setting Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time

are configured with dip switch 3000SW2 per this instruction.
CF-1018R3 29
Configuration
Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board is used to program:
• Rad Filament Setting Time. This value is programmable from 0.8 to 2.7
seconds. It can be initially set as the same value assigned for the Rotor
Acceleration Time (refer to technical information of the X-ray Tube)
Sometimes, if it is required to increase the Rad Filament Setting Time to

the next value, configure the respective switches again. This adjustment
avoids Error-12.
• Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time. This
value can be programmed to run for 1 minute or not at all, after releasing
the Fluoro Pedal.
Note . The Rad Filament Setting Time is factory set to 1.8 seconds. The
Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time is factory set to 1 minute. Maintain
this value when it is unknown or not provided with the X-ray Tube
documentation.
1. Turn the Generator OFF and note current settings of the dip switch
3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board.
Note . Configuration of these times are only allowed when dip switch
3000SW2-1 is in “Closed” (On) position after power the Generator
OFF and back ON again.
2. Set dip switches 3000SW2-1 and 3000SW2-2 as indicated below, in

order to enable the selection of times with the High Speed Starter. Dip
switch3000SW2-1 has to be switched ONLY with the Generator
powered OFF.
3000SW2-1 (selection enable) 3000SW2-2 (High Speed Starter)
ON ON
30 CF-1018R3
Configuration
3. Configure the Filament Setting Times by setting the dip switches

3000SW2-4 through 3000SW2-8 per Table 3-2. The Filament Setting
Time should be configured in accordance to Rotor Acceleration Time of
the X-ray Tube.
Table 3-2
High Speed: Configuration of Filament Setting Time
3000SW2-7 3000SW2-8
TUBE-1
FILAMENT SETTING TIME OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON) OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds - -
1.2 seconds - -
1.8 seconds - -
2.7 seconds - -
3000SW2-5 3000SW2-6
TUBE-2
FILAMENT SETTING TIME OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON) OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds - -
1.2 seconds - -
1.8 seconds - -
2.7 seconds - -
3000SW2-4
FLUORO FILAMENT HOLD-OVER
HOLD OVER TIME
After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, the Filament Current goes back to stand-by. -
After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, 1 minutes passes

-
before the Filament Current goes back to stand-by.
Note . Record the switch configuration in the Data Book.
4. To validate previous configuration, turn the Generator ON, wait until

Error--01 (E01) appears on the Console and turn the Generator OFF.
5. Set dip switch 3000SW2 to the original settings as noted in step-1. (Refer
to Section 1.1.5 for the normal settings of Dip Switch 3000SW2).
CF-1018R3 31
Configuration
3.4 ANODE ROTATION TEST
Perform the following tests for each X-ray Tube in the installation, checking the
low and high speed when it is required.
Note . Two people are needed for these tests, one at the Console and the
service engineer looking at the anode of the X-ray Tube. These
tests also can be done by hearing the sound of the anode rotating.
NEVER MAKE EXPOSURES DURING THE TESTS, THE

PERSON CLOSE TO THE X-RAY TUBE WILL BE EXPOSED.
1. With the switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “On”
position (service mode), turn the Console ON and select the
corresponding X-ray Tube.
2. Select a low value for kVp and mAs for checking the Anode Rotation at
Low Speed.
3. Press the “Prep” push-button and visually check that the Tube anode
rotates in the proper way. (Refer to the X-ray Tube documentation).
4. Hold pressed the “Prep” push-button and check that the rotation speed
of the Tube anode is in compliance with the X-ray Tube specifications.
For this test is recommended to turn off the Tube filaments (switch
3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller in “On” position) and use a stroboscope
to measure the anode speed.
5. Release the “Prep” push-button.
6. For Generators with LV-DRAC, select a high value for kVp and mAs for
checking the Anode Rotation at High Speed. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5.
7. If required for the second Tube, repeat this procedure.
32 CF-1018R3
Configuration
3.5 FOCAL SPOTS CONFIGURATION
This configuration determines which mA station will be the smallest mA station

for the Large Focal Spot. It is possible to configure all the mA stations for the
Small Focal Spot or for the Large Focal Spot.
The smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot must be selected according
to the Tube ratings for the Small Filament and the customer preference.
IF THE mA STATION FOR FOCAL SPOT CHANGE IS NOT

CONFIGURED ACCORDING TO THE X-RAY TUBE RATINGS,
THE TUBE FILAMENTS MAY BE PERMANENTLY DAMAGED.
1. With the generator OFF, set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console
CPU Board in “On” position to permit the service mode.
2. Power ON the System. Enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual

Calibration” button on the GSM program. Select any workstation (WS)
of the corresponding X-ray Tube and press the “OK” button.
3. Select the smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot using the
“Increase” or “Decrease” mA buttons. When is required to configure all
mA stations for the Small Focal Spot, select “E01” Memory Location.
Note . Default value is factory set at 200 mA except when using X-ray
Tubes with Small Focal Spot smaller than 0.6 .
4. Press the “Toggle” button to store the select mA station and then press
the “Confirm” or “Dismiss” buttons to confirm or cancel the process.
When it is confirmed, the ATP Console CPU Board emits a
“double-beep”.
IF THE FOCAL SPOT SWITCH-OVER POINT IS CHANGED

AFTER mA CALIBRATION, THE mA STATIONS AFFECTED
MUST BE RE-CALIBRATED.
CF-1018R3 33
Configuration
Perform the following test (it is not mandatory).
Note . The test described only applies to RAD Tubes.
In case of a R&F Tube (Tube-2) both filament are always ON (lit).

Select a “Direct” workstation and a mA station for the Small
Filament. Press “Prep” for RAD and observe through the X-ray
Tube window that the Small Filament lights more than the Large
Filament.
1. Select the highest mA station for the Small Focal Spot. Verify that
effectively the Small Filament is ON (lighted) and the Large Filament is
OFF. Observe filaments through the X-ray tube window.
2. Select the lowest mA station for the Large Focal Spot. Verify that
effectively the Large Filament is ON (lighted) and the Small Filament is
OFF. Observe filaments through the X-ray tube window.
3. If required for the second tube, repeat this procedure.
Illustration 3-1
Focal Spots Configuration
34 CF-1018R3
Configuration
SECTION 4 X-RAY TUBE DATA
The following table lists several common X-ray tubes and their corresponding
number. If a specific tube is not listed, tube specifications are given to enable
you chose a similar tube type. If none of the listed tubes are satisfactory, contact
your generator supplier to obtain special software.
Table 4-1
X-ray Tube Numbers
POWER RATINGS
TUBE TUBE CODE FOCAL
MODEL KHU
NUMBER (ID) SPOT LS (kW) HS (kW)
001 139 TOSHIBA E7239X 1.0 / 2.0 22 / 45 -- 133
002 201 TOSHIBA E7240X 0.6 / 1.2 15 / 30 -- 140
003 140 TOSHIBA E7242X 0.6 / 1.5 18 / 49 -- 187
004 090 TOSHIBA E7252X 0.6 / 1.2 15 / 42 26 / 73 300
005 377 TOSHIBA E7254FX 0.6 / 1.2 25 / 66 39 / 100 400
006 274 TOSHIBA E7255FX 0.6 / 1.2 23 / 60 39 / 101 300
007 310 TOSHIBA E7843X 0.6 / 1.2 22 / 49 -- 150
008 344 TOSHIBA E7865X 0.3 / 1.0 3 / 40 -- 140
009 351 TOSHIBA E7100X 0.6 / 1.2 24 / 59 40 / 100 300
010 260 IAE RTM 101 HS 0.6 / 1.2 22 / 55 37 / 99 400
011 273 IAE RTM 101 HS 0.6 / 1.5 24 / 76 40 / 136 400
012 233 VARIAN RAD 8 1.0 / 2.0 25 / 47 -- 150
013 244 VARIAN RAD 14 0.6 / 1.2 16 / 44 27 / 72 300
014 161 VARIAN RAD 21 0.6 / 1.2 21 / 64 36 / 100 300
015 265 VARIAN RAD 60 0.6 / 1.2 26 / 67 39 / 100 400
016 238 VARIAN RAD 74 0.6 / 1.5 20 / 52 -- 200
017 252 VARIAN RAD 92 0.6 / 1.2 26 / 62 40 / 99 600
018 092 VARIAN A-192 0.6 / 1.2 25 / 63 40 / 96 300
019 309 VARIAN A196 0.6 / 1.0 20 / 47 32 / 72 350
020 094 VARIAN A-292 0.6 / 1.2 25 / 62 39 / 96 400
021 208 VARIAN G 292 0.6 / 1.2 25 / 63 39 / 95 600
022 051 GE-CGR MN 640 1.0 / 1.8 23 / 46 -- 150
023 064 GE MAXIRAY-75 0.6 / 1.5 12 / 37 21 / 62 300
024 062 GE MAXIRAY-100 0.6 / 1.25 18 / 55 31 / 100 350
025 261 SIEMENS DR 154/30/50 1.2 / 1.8 31 / 53 -- 200
026
027
Note .-- Power Ratings are for 60 Hz. To calculate Power Ratings for 50 Hz multiply the values by 0.91 TB47
Configuration
36 CF-1018R3
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
Low Voltage - Digital Rotating Anode Controller
LV-DRAC
REVISION HISTORY
4 SEP 15, 2005 Tube selection (V10Rx)
5 JUL 26, 2006 New Tubes in Table-2
6 MAR 1, 2007 New Tubes in Table-2 (soft V10R2.04)
7 MAY 16, 2007 New Tubes in Table-2 (soft V10R3.1)
8 OCT 16, 2007 New Tubes in Table-2 (soft V10R3.3)
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.

DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 LV-DRAC Status Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2 Self-running Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
DR-1004R8 i
LV-DRAC
ii DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
SECTION 1 CONFIGURATION
Note . This document ONLY applies to High Speed Generators supplied

with the LV-DRAC (Low Voltage - Digital Rotating Anode
Controller).
The LV-DRAC is a High Speed Rotor Controller located on the Generator

Cabinet. Its configuration is made through dip switches 3243SW1 to 3243SW4
on the Control DRAC Board.
BEFORE MANIPULATING THE LV-DRAC, MAKE SURE THAT

THE INPUT LINE IS DISCONNECTED AND THE CAPACITOR
BANK IS PROPERLY DISCHARGED. WAIT UNTIL LEDS DL7
AND DL8 ON THE CONTROL DRAC BOARD ARE OFF.
The Function of these switches is the following:
3243SW1-x FUNCTION
2 MINIMUM TIME FOR READY ((DELAY))
5
TUBE TYPE SELECTION FOR TUBE-1
6
(Also refer to switch position 3243SW3-5)
7
3243SW2-x FUNCTION
2 FLUORO HOLD-OVER TIME
5
TUBE TYPE SELECTION FOR TUBE-2
6
(Also refer to switch position 3243SW4-5)
7
DR-1004R8 1
LV-DRAC
3243SW3-x FUNCTION
1 LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE
2 NOT USED*
3 SPOT FILM HIGH SPEED START
4 NOT USED*
ON = WHEN THE TUBE CONFIGURED AS TUBE-1

IS LISTED ON TUBE TABLE-1
5
OFF = WHEN THE TUBE CONFIGURED AS TUBE-1
7 NOT USED*
* Note: Set switches not used in “ON” position.
3243SW4-x FUNCTION
2
SPOT FILM HOLD TIME
3
ON = WHEN THE TUBE CONFIGURED AS TUBE-2

5
OFF = WHEN THE TUBE CONFIGURED AS TUBE-2
ON = SELF RUNNING ENABLED (Refer to section 1.2)

6
OFF = SELF RUNNING DISABLED (Refer to section 1.2)
7 PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS
8 DC BRAKE
* Note: Set switches not used in “ON” position.
Note . Set dip switches in accordance with the following tables.
2 DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
TUBE SELECTION -- TUBE TABLE-1
(Switch 3243SW3-5 = ON for Tube-1 ) (Switch 3243SW4-5 = ON for Tube-2)
3243SW1-x (TUBE-1) 3243SW2-x (TUBE-2)

P
Pos TUBE FAMILY
(Stator - ∅ Anode) 4 5 6 7 8 4 5 6 7 8
0 GE MAXIRAY 75 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
1 GE MAXIRAY 100 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON
2 VARIAN G-1582 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON
EUREKA RAD-XX (with Insert 3”)

3 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
VARIAN RAD-XX (with Insert 3”) / A132
EUREKA RAD-XX (with Insert 4”)

4 VARIAN RAD-XX (with Insert 4”) / A256 / A282 / A292 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON
TOSHIBA 7254X / 7255X
5 CGR STATORIX M50 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
SIEMENS 100 L BIANGULIX

6 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
SIEMENS 100 L OPTILIX
7 PHILIPS SUPEROTALIX OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
8 DUNLEE PX-1302 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
9 CGR STATORIX 260 / RSN 742 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
CGR STATORIX 550 / RSN 722 / MSN 722

10 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
IAE RTC 600
11 SIEMENS 100 G OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
12 SIEMENS RH 150/100 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
13 COMET DO-10 (with Insert 4”) OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
14 COMET DO-9 (with Insert 4”) ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
15 CGR STATORIX 240 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
16 PICKER PX-307 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
17 HANGZHOU XD-52-30, 50/150 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
18 DUNLEE PX-1312 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
19 DUNLEE PX-1456 / PX-1436 / PX-1400 (Stator Q) OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF
20 COMET DX-1000 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
21 COMET DX-81 / COMET XSTAR-14 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
22 PHILIPS ROTALIX 350/351 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
23 COMET MOS-50 (MAMMO) OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
24 VARIAN B110 / B112 / B115 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
25 VARIAN B160 / B165 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
26 TOSHIBA E7252 (stator XS-AL) ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
27 COMET DX 700 HS OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
28 VARIAN B130 + A192 / A196 / A197 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
29 VARIAN G 1592 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
30 PICKER PX400P + PX457P ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
31 JUGORENDGEN RX 150/30--50 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
DR-1004R8 3
LV-DRAC
TUBE SELECTION -- TUBE TABLE-2
(Switch 3243SW3-5 = OFF for Tube-1 ) (Switch 3243SW4-5 = OFF for Tube-2)
3243SW1-x (TUBE-1) 3243SW2-x (TUBE-2)

Pos TUBE FAMILY
(Stator - ∅ Anode) 4 5 6 7 8 4 5 6 7 8
0 VARIAN GS-20711 + Housing B220H (Stator R) ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
1 SIEMENS 100 L--W OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON
2 SIEMENS SV 125/15/82 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON
3 IAE RTM90+ Housing C55 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
IAE RTM101HS + Housing C100

4 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON
5 DUNLEE DA 1036 -- DU 404 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
6 DUNLEE DA 1094 -- DU 694 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
DUNLEE DR 1825 (High Impedance Stator)

7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
DUNLEE DR 1817 (High Impedance Stator)
8 CGR STATORIX 240, MSN 740, MSN 742 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
9 IAE RTC 700 HS + Housing C52 SUPER OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
10 VARIAN GS 30711 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
11 VARIAN BI 130+G292 / G294 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
12 IAE RTM102HS + Housing C52S ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
13 IAE RTC1000HS + Housing C52S OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
14 TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7100X ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
15 DUNLEE DA 1083 / PX 1483 -- DU 404 / DA 10 (Stator C) OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
16 VARIAN A277 / A278 + Housing B150H (Stator R) ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
17 VARIAN G1092 + Housing B160 / B165 (Stator R) OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
18 DUNLEE PX1473Q -- DU 604 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
19 TOSHIBA E7260DX OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF
20 VARIAN HE100 + Housing B180 / B185 (Stator R) ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
21 IAE RTC 137 + Housing CT 180 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
22 VARIAN A102 + Housing B100 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
IAE X40 + Housing C352 (only Low Speed)

23 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
24 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
25 TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7867X / E7869X OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
26 TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7240X ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
27 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
29 TOSHIBA E7252X (Stator XS--R) OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
30 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
31 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
MINIMUM TIME FOR READY (DELAY)
3243SW1-x
MINIMUM TIME
(SECONDS) 1 2 3
0* ON ON ON
0.6 OFF ON ON
0.8 ON OFF ON
1.0 OFF OFF ON
1.2 ON ON OFF
1.5 OFF ON OFF
2.0 ON OFF OFF
3.0 OFF OFF OFF
* Note: It is recommended to set these switches at “0 seconds”.
FLUORO HOLD TIME
3243SW2-x
FLUORO HOLD TIME
(SECONDS) 1 2 3
0 ON ON ON
10 OFF ON ON
20 ON OFF ON
30 OFF OFF ON
40 ON ON OFF
60 OFF ON OFF
90 ON OFF OFF
120 OFF OFF OFF
DR-1004R8 5
LV-DRAC
SPOT FILM HOLD TIME
3243SW4-x
SPOT FILM
HOLD TIME 1 2 3 4
0 ON ON ON ON
5 OFF ON ON ON
10 ON OFF ON ON
15 OFF OFF ON ON
SECONDS
20 ON ON OFF ON
30 OFF ON OFF ON
45 ON OFF OFF ON
60 OFF OFF OFF ON
2 ON ON ON OFF
5 OFF ON ON OFF
10 ON OFF ON OFF
15 OFF OFF ON OFF

MINUTES
20 ON ON OFF OFF
25 OFF ON OFF OFF
30 ON OFF OFF OFF
40 OFF OFF OFF OFF
SPOT FILM HIGH SPEED START
SPOT FILM START MODE 3243SW3-3
SPOT FILM ALWAYS STARTS IN HIGH SPEED (10000 RPM) ON
SPOT FILM STARTS AT REQUIRED SPEED OFF
6 DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE
LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE MODE (3300 RPM TO 0 RPM) 3243SW3-1
INHIBITED ON
ACTIVATED OFF
DC BRAKE (FOR LOW AND HIGH SPEED)
DC BRAKE 3243SW4-8
ACTIVATED ON
INHIBITED OFF
PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS
PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS 3243SW4-7
INHIBITED
ON
(LED DL1 on the Control DRAC Board is always illuminated)
ACTIVATED (Normal Operation mode)

(LED DL1 on the Control DRAC Board is non-illuminated OFF
indicating that the DRAC is working properly).
Note: The Error Codes are shown on the Console Display preceded by the letter “E”
(a.e. E51) (For Error Codes refer to the Troubleshooting document).
WHEN SWITCH 3243SW4-7 IS IN THE “ON” POSITION, THE

ERROR PROTECTIONS OF THE LV-DRAC ARE INHIBITED.
DR-1004R8 7
LV-DRAC
1.1 LV-DRAC STATUS DIAGRAM
CHANGE
OF TUBE
ACCELERATION STAND-BY ACCELERATION

UP TO 3300 RPM UP TO 10000 RPM
RUNNING RUNNING
AT 3300 RPM AT 10000 RPM
BRAKING SELF-RUNNING MODE BRAKING

FROM 3300 RPM FROM 10000 RPM
1.2 SELF-RUNNING MODE
The continuous starting and braking of the anode produces an overheating in

the X-ray Tube Stator (a.e. during calibration procedure). The “Self-running
mode” avoids this overheating.
In the “Self-running mode” (switch 3243SW4-6 in the “ON” position), the anode
remains running for approximately 1 minute when rotates at 3300 rpm or
10000 rpm.
The LV-DRAC enters in the “Self-running mode” when “Preparation” is selected

three consecutive times only from the Console buttons or Handswitch, and
the time between two of the consecutive accelerations is shorter than
30 seconds (refer to illustration below).
PREPARATION SIGNALS
t < 30 s t < 30 s t < 30 s t > 30 s t < 30 s t < 30 s t < tsr
ANODE ROTATION
tsr tsr
Self-running mode Self-running mode
tsr (time for self-running mode) = approx. 1 minute at 3300 rpm or 10000 rpm.
8 DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC
SECTION 2 SCHEMATICS
Sch. No. Scheme
LV-DRAC MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
A3243--04 CONTROL DRAC PCB
A3240--05 INTERFACE DRAC PCB
A3109--01 CLAMPING PCB
DR-1004R8 9
LV-DRAC
10 DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC MODULE
INTERFACE
CONTROL PTR1
HV INVERTER MAIN / AUX
MODULE DRAC PCB 3PH - IGBT INVERTERS
U2 TRANSFORMERS
(A) AUX
F3
U3
INPUT
RECTIFIER Filter Ferrites M C A (C) COMM
MAINS DC BUS
PCB
(M) MAIN
F4
LV DC
240 VAC SW Power Acc Run Com
Supply
J1
U16 U11 A -- D Contactors

Ribbon Cable
OUTPUT CONTROL LOGIC CURRENT

LIMIT
CONTROL Acceleration /
Running Voltage
Control
Drac
Power U15 (ADC)
Supply
AC / DC CONVERTERS
J3 I AUX U4B, C & D
DC Brake
D
I MAIN
U1C, D & A
OC A
DRIVER I COMMON U12A, B & U1B Tube Selection
OP1-- OP2
OUTPUT OPTO
COMMANDS COUPLERS U17
Common
μC Stator
Main / Aux Tube 1
RL2
READY
SW1 to SW4 CONTROL DRAC PCB Common
Stator
SYSTEM Main / Aux Tube 2
CONFIGURATION
ERROR SWITCHES
DRAC DL2
Open
Collector
Serial Link Driver
LV-DRAC Module Block Diagram

F E D C B A
+5 VDC PTR1
AR1 8 X 10K PD ( 0......7 ) C15 Q12 D19 D20
C29 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49 3
+5 VDC VS1
U13 D40 D45
100nF 6 R117 Q5
20 HCT244 2 7 1 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148
SW1 C11 BC640 R29
8 9 2 VCC 18 PD7 U9A D42 33.2
1A1 1Y1 5 BAT49 D44
7 10 4 16 PD6 +5 VDC TC4426
1A2 1Y2 TP9 1N4148 R116 R30 D21
6 11 6 14 PD5 D41 1K 2K21
1A3 1Y3 BAT49 4
4 5 12 8 12 PD4 4 5 3 4 BAT49 4
1A4 1Y4 C12
4 13 11 9 PD3 PD0 D43 C59
3 2A1 2Y1 3 U9B C65 TF5
14 13 7 PD2 PD1 TC4426 BAT49 10uF
2A2 2Y2 220nF
2 15 15 5 PD1 PD2
2A3 2Y3 C12 Q15 D10 D11
1 16 17 3 PD0 PD3 9
2A4 2Y4 PD4 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49
1 PD5 VS2
1G D58 R123 D63
19 PD6 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148 Q2
CS3 2G 2 7 1 6
GND PD7 C21 BC640 R23
U6A D60 33.2
10 TC4426 5 BAT49 D62
AR6 TP6 R122 R24
8 X 4K7 1N4148 D12
D59 1K 2K21 10
+5 VDC BAT49 BAT49
+5 VDC 4 5 3 4
AR2 8 X 10K C22
C30 3 U6B TF2 D61 C62
+5 VDC C47 C68 BAT49 10uF
TC4426
U14 220nF
100nF HCT244 C16 Q11 D22 D23
SW2 20 U17 10 uF 1
87C54 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49
8 9 2 VCC 18 PD7 40 VS1
1A1 1Y1 D34
7 10 4 16 PD6 +5 VDC R115 D39
1A2 1Y2 VCC 39 PD0 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148 Q6
6 11 6 14 PD5 P0.0 2 7 1 6
1A3 1Y3 38 PD1 P11 BC640 R31
5 12 8 12 PD4 31 P0.1 U10A D36 33.2
3 1A4 1Y4 EA/VP 37 PD2 3
4 13 11 9 PD3 C43 P0.2 TC4426 5 BAT49 D38
2A1 2Y1 36 PD3 TP10 1N4148 R114 R32 D24
3 14 13 7 PD2 33 pF P0.3 D35
2A2 2Y2 19 35 PD4 1K 2K21 BAT49 2
2 15 15 5 PD1 X1 P0.4 4 5 3 4 BAT49
2A3 2Y3 34 PD5 P12
1 16 17 3 PD0 P0.5
2A4 2Y4 X1 33 PD6 3 U10B TF6 D37 C58
12MHz P0.6 C64 10uF
1 18 32 PD7 TC4426 BAT49
1G X2 P0.7 220nF
19
CS2 2G C44 C13 Q14 D13 D14
GND 33 pF P2.0 21 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49 7
PWM
10 P2.1 22 VS2
9 RESET PWMC D52 D57
RSTuP P2.2 23 6 R121 Q3
29 PSEN C1 2 7 1 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148
24 P21 BC640 R25
+5 VDC P2.3 C2
ALE 30 ALE/P 25 U7A D54 33.2
AR3 8 X 10K P2.4 MODP1 D56
C39 26 TC4426 5 BAT49
+5 VDC P2.5 MODP2 TP7 1N4148 R120 R26
27 D53 D15
U18 P2.6 MODA1 1K 2K21 BAT49 8
28 4 5 3 4 BAT49
100nF HCT244 A0 1 P1.0 P2.7 MODA2 P22
SW3 20 C61
A1 2 P1.1 3 U7B TF3 D55
8 9 2 VCC 18 PD7 10 C67 BAT49 10uF
1A1 1Y1 A2 3 P1.2 P3.0 T2 TC4426
7 10 4 16 PD6 11 220nF
1A2 1Y2 RAW 4 P3.1 T3
6 P1.3 C14 Q13 D16 D17
11 6 1Y3 14 PD5 5 12 5
1A3 ENuP P1.4 P3.2 ST 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49
5 12 8 12 PD4 6 13 VS1
1A4 1Y4 AUTO P1.5 P3.3 HS
2 4 13 11 9 PD3 7 14 D46 R119 D51 2
2A1 2Y1 RD P1.6 P3.4 FL 6 Q4
3 14 13 7 PD2 8 15 2 7 1 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148
2A2 2Y2 WR P1.7 P3.5 SF A11 BC640 R27
2 15 15 5 PD1 16 D48
2A3 2Y3 P3.6 SPARE 1 U8A 33.2
1 16 17 3 PD0 R86 17 TC4426 5 BAT49 D50
2A4 2Y4 P3.7 SPARE 2 TP8 R118 R28
+5 VDC VSS 1N4148 D18
1 10K2 D47 1K 2K21 6
1G 20 BAT49 BAT49
19 4 5 3 4
CS1 2G A12
GND 3 U8B TF4 D49 C60
C66 BAT49 10uF
10 +15 VDC +15 VDC TC4426
Q10 Q9 220nF
2N4403 2N4403 C11 Q16 D7 D8
VS1 VS2 11
+5 VDC 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49
VS2
AR4 8 X 10K
D64 D69
C40 R113 R2 6 R125
+5 VDC 1 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148 Q1
A21 2 7
U19 2K21 2K21 BC640 R21
100nF R111 R112 R68 R17 U5A D66 33.2
20 HCT244 475 1K5 BAT49 D68
SW4 475 1K5 TC4426 5
TP5 1N4148 R124 R22 D9
8 9 2 VCC 18 PD7 D65 1K 2K21 1
1A1 1Y1 DZ3 DZ2 BAT49 12
7 10 4 16 PD6 4 5 3 4 BAT49
1A2 1Y2 12V 12V A22
6 11 6 14 PD5 D67 C63
1A3 1Y3 3 U5B C69 TF1
5 12 8 12 PD4 TC4426 BAT49 10uF
1A4 1Y4 220nF
4 13 11 9 PD3
1 3 2A1 2Y1
14 13 7 PD2
2Y2 NAME DATE SHEET / OF
2
1
15
16
15
17
2A2
2A3 2Y3
5
3
PD1
PD0 DRAWING F. GARCIA 10/10/97
DWG:
A3243--04
2A4 2Y4 1/3
1 1G
19 C CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 07/04/05
CS0 2G
GND B CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 16/07/04
10 A CN 02/174 F. GARCIA 07/11/02 SEDECAL CONTROL DRAC
F E D C B A
VBUS (4V<>724VDC)
V P+ N -- TP18
PTR1 +15 VDC
R63
604K +5 VDC
J1 +5 VDC
C18 R66 C37
3 4 X 1N4148
4 COM 22K1 U12D D29 4
D28 D27 U15
470 nF--1000V LF347 1N4148 PD ( 0......7 )
2 R34 R35 R36 R75 R65 U12C 13 ADC0844 20 10 uF
SHL LF347 --
9 14 R74 3 VCC 17 PD0
R37 R33 1M 1M 1M 1M 604K -- CH1 DB0
8 R67 12 + 1K5 4 16 PD1
D31 DB1
J2 150K--2w CH2 15 PD2
150K--2w 10 + 604K C36 5 DB2
1N4148 R73 14 PD3
2 R40 R39 R38 R76 R64 100nF CH3 DB3
V+ DL7 DL8 C31 10K2 6 13 PD4
HLMP1700 HLMP1700 CH4 DB4
1M 1M 1M 1M 604K 100nF 12 PD5
D26 D25 DB5
C19 C17 11 PD6
1 R72 DB6
8 9 PD7
V-- 100nF 22K1 VREF DB7
2
100 uF 100 uF CS CS4
450V 450V 1
RD RD
--15 VDC WR 19
WR
I. PRINC 18
+15 VDC GND INT
PTR1 TP17
C5 10 7
U R88 R60
1V<>8.26A 221K
U2 221K
TP1 +5 VDC +5 VDC
CSNH151 100nF
3 1--7 V+ C27 +5 VDC 3
R8 R7 R10 R4 U1A D1
J1 OP 100nF
LF347 1N4148 TP36 D73
8--14 V-- 12K1 12K1 12K1 12K1 2
1 -- R61 1N4148 6
PRIN R9 9 13 -- 1 R1 --
C4 100 -- D3 1K5
R3 7
8 1N4148 14 3 + 1K5
D32 5
100nF 10 + 12 + 221K 1N4148 R5 C35 D72 +
100nF C25 R62 1N4148
U1C D2 U1D 10K2 U1B
--15 VDC C1 100nF 10K2
LF347 1N4148 LF347 1uF
R6
R55 R57 R58
12K1 12K1 12K1 12K1
I. AUX
PTR1 +15 VDC TP16
W C6 R89 2 D70 6 R59
-- 1N4148 -- 221K
U3 1 7
TP3 221K +5 VDC
CSNH151 100nF 3 5
+ + C24
8--14 V+ U12A D71 U12B
R12 R14 R15 R19 U4B D6 R53 1uF
J1 OP LF347 1N4148 LF347
LF347 1N4148 12K1
4 1--7 V-- 12K1 12K1 12K1 12K1 6
2 -- 2
AUX R11 13 D5 9 7 R18 R54 R56
C7 100 -- -- 12K1
14 1N4148 8 R16 12K1
5 + 1K5
D33
100nF 12 + 10 + 221K 1N4148 R20 C34
D4 U4C 10K2 100nF
--15 VDC U4D C10
LF347 1N4148 LF347 C8
1uF
R13 C28 C3 +15 VDC
+15 VDC +15 VDC 100nF
12K1
100nF 100nF
4 4 2 4
--
U12 U1 U4 1
LF347 LF347 3 + LF347
I. PRINC LIMIT 11 11 11
PTR1 I. AUX LIMIT C26 C2 C9 1
P+ SKM 40GD 123D --15 VDC --15 VCD --15 VDC
100nF 100nF 100nF
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
U V W
DWG:
A3243--04
2/3
7 8 9 10 11 12
C CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 07/04/05
B CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 16/07/04
N -- A CN 02/174 F. GARCIA 07/11/02 SEDECAL CONTROL DRAC
F E D C B A
V UNR
+5 VDC
U11A PD ( 0......7 )
+5 VDC C38 C45
LM339
R50 4
I. PRINC -- DZ1
2 15V C57 100nF 100nF U16
Limit 1K5 C22 R71
100nF 18 52 EP1810 AR5 8 X 4K7
1 nF 5 1K5 RSTuP
+ R69 20 +5 VDC
12 PD0
R90 1K5 J4
+15 VDC 21 PD1
4 U11D Q8 OP1A 4
23K7 C32 22 PD2 R94 9
R126 LM339 2N4401 +5 VDC TLP621--4 SPARE2
100nF R70 48 PD3 16 1
10K2 10 2K2
-- 1K 49 PD4 R93
13 50 PD5 15 2 2K2 10
R127 R83 SPARE2 RTN
--15 VDC 11 D30 51 PD6
23K7 + +5 VDC 1N4148 221K OP1B
R45 C33 54 PD7
56 TLP621--4 R92 11
10K2 100nF 5 14 3 SPARE1
U11B R82 C11 2K2
C46 10K2 32 R91
LM339 R49 I. LIM C12 13 4
R47 6 1 uF 2K2 12
I. AUX -- 1K TP11 44 SPARE1 RTN
1 R52 C21
Limit 1K5 C21 45 OP1C
R51 33 R98 13
1 nF 7 2K21 Q7 C22 TLP621--4 SF
+ 6 12 5
2N4403 221 C52 P11 R97 2K2
R48 10 nF 7 11 6
U11C 221 P12 2K2 14
8 SF RTN
LM339 24 P21
8 ENuP OP1D
-- 23 9 TLP621--4 R96 15
NOTE : 14 AUTO P22 FL
TP29 TP25 TP21 TP20 10 10 7
68 A11 R95 2K2
4.5 V < > 37 Amp. pick for I.PRINC or I.AUX 9 N.U.
+ TP24 TP26 TP22 TP23 11 9 8 2K2 16
53 A12
ALE FL RTN
3 34 2 3
PWM A21 OP2A
3 TLP621--4 R102 17
26 A22 16 1 HS
PWMC 30
J3 TP14 17 CS4 R101 2K2
C1 29 15 2 2K2
19 CS3 18
1 +5 VDC C2 HS RTN
+5 VDC 28
2 47 CS2 OP2B
+5 VDC MODP1 R100 19
3 TP2 27 TLP621--4
+5 VDC 59 CS1 14 3 ST
TP4 MODP2 4
4 C51 25 CS0 R99 2K2
+5 VDC TP12 MODA1 13 4
5 470 uF 2K2 20
GND TP13 46 SPARE2 ST RTN
MODA2
6 +5 VDC R110
GND TP19 SPARE1 OP2C
7 TLP621--4 R106 21
GND 2K21 55 SF 12 5 T3
8 RAW 2K2
GND R107 C56 FL R105
9 C50 1nF 11 6 2K2
+15 VDC HS 22
470 uF 2K21 14 T3 RTN
10
+15 VDC TP15 A0 ST OP2D
11 C49 R108 C53
+15 VDC 1nF T3 TLP621--4 R104 23
12 470 uF 10 7 T2
+15 VDC +15 VDC 2K21 15 T2
A1 R103 2K2
13 +15 VDC R109 C54 9 8
--15 VDC --15 VDC 2K2 24
14 4 X HLMP1700 1nF TP27 TP28 TP33 TP35 T2 RTN
2 --15 VDC 2K21 16 2
V UNR 15 TP37 A2
C55 TP30 TP31 TP32 TP34
16 DL6 DL5 DL4 C48 +15 VDC 6
V UNR V UNR 1nF +15 VDC
22 uF U20
17 +15 VDC RL2
PRECH IF DL3
18 R87 10 ULN2803 PRME15002 4
PRECH IF R85 R81 R79 +5 VDC R43 RDY1
19 22 3K3 3K3 3K3 11 COM 8 ERROR CODE 40
+5 VDC OUT8 IN8
20 12 7 RDY1 39 HLMP1700 3K3 R44 7
+5 VDC +5 VDC OUT7 IN7 ERROR RDY1 RTN
21 13 6 DISCH 57 DL1
T3 IF OUT6 IN6 82 R46 5
22 R84 14 5 PRECH 38 HLMP1700 RDY1 OUT
T3 IF OUT5 IN5
23 15 4 BRAKE 36 10 8
T2 IF 22 OUT4 IN4 DL2
24 R80 16 3 T3 43 R41
T2 IF OUT3 IN3 R77 3
25 22 17 2 T2 42 750 +5 VDC
T1 IF OUT2 IN2 37 HLMP1700 750
26 R78 18 1 T1 41 R42
T1 IF OUT1 IN1 2
GND ERROR DRAC
22
9 10 1
1 35 1
T1 IF: T1 to T2 Commutation GND
T2 IF: Not Used C23
T3 IF: Break Control +15 VDC
100nF
1
U11
3
DWG:
A3243--04
LM339 3/3
12
C20 C CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 07/04/05
B CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 16/07/04
--15 VDC
100nF A CN 02/174 F. GARCIA 07/11/02 SEDECAL CONTROL DRAC
F E D C B A
J1
VUNR +15 VDC
1
+5 VDC
CR5 CR6 2
1N4007 1N4007 +5 VDC
3
+5 VDC
REG1 REG2 4
7815 7805 +5 VDC +5 VDC
4 4
5
IN OUT IN OUT +5 VDC GND
TR1 COM COM
J3 CR1 CR2 6
F1 GND
T 0.5 A 1N4007 1N4007
1 7
220 VAC SW GND
+ + 8
C1 C3 C4 GND
2200 uF 10 uF 10 uF 9
15 VAC 35 V 35 V 35 V +15 VDC
10
220 VAC +15 VDC
11
+15 VDC
15 VAC C2
2200 uF 12
+ +15 VDC +15 VDC
F2 35 V C5
T 0.5 A 13
2 10 uF --15 VDC
0 VAC 35 V 14
--15 VDC --15 VDC
CR3 CR4 15
1N4007 1N4007 VUNR VUNR
COM
IN OUT --15 VDC 16
3 VUNR 3
R2 REG3 17
150K, 2w 7915
18
R1
150K, 2w 19
CR7 +5 VDC +5 VDC
DS1 1N4007 20
HLMP1700 +5 VDC
J2
F3 FILT1 21
T 15 A T3 IF
1
--DC IN 5 9 22
T3 IF
6 CAR--DRAC 10
F4 23
T 15 A 2 BUS 12 T2 IF T1 IF: T1 to T2 Commutation
2
+DC IN 3 T2 IF: Not Used
1 7 8 14 13 24
T2 IF T3 IF: Break Control
3
GND 25
T1 IF
4 26
+DC OUT CR12 T1 IF
1N4007
2 5 CR13 2
--DC OUT 1N4007
CR14
1N4007
J4
J5 1
K1
1
2
CR8 KT2
STTA1212DI
2 3
K3
C6 CR10
220 nF STTA1212DI
1000V
1
3
CR9
VR1 STTA1212DI
1 V480LA20A
CR11 DRAWING F. GARCIA 27/09/97
DWG:
A3240--05
1/1
4 STTA1212DI E CN 01/075 F. GARCIA 03/05/01 REVISED A. DIAZ 27/09/97 E D C B A REV
C, D CN 98/090, 99/94 F. GARCIA 15/02/00
B CN 98/025 F. GARCIA 09/02/98
A CN 98/018 F. GARCIA 05/02/98 SEDECAL INTERFASE DRAC--HF
F E D C B A
4 4
R1
680 ALL DIODES CL03--15
15w
IN--1
CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5 CR6
3 3
C1 C2
R2 R3
10 nF 10 nF
150K 150K
12.5KV 12.5KV
15w 15w
IN--2
2 2
1
DWG:
A3109--01
1/1
SEDECAL
CLAMPING
INNERSCAN
CA-1036R2
Calibration
Calibration
REVISION HISTORY
0 JAN 23, 2004 First edition
1 APR 1, 2005 Documentation upgrade
2 FEB 29, 2007 Calibration of optional 1000 mA station
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.

CA-1036R2
Calibration
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Generator Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1.1.1 Minimum Current Time Product (mAs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.2 Accuracy of Radiographic and Fluoroscopic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.3 Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 Filament Stand-by Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 Exposure Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 kV Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4 Digital mA Loop Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.5 Digital mA Loop Open (X-Ray Tube Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.5.1 Autocalibration of Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.5.2 Manual Calibration of Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.6 AEC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.6.1 Previous Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.6.2 Balance Adjustment for Three Field Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.6.3 Optical Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.6.4 kV Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.6.5 Photomultiplier RAD-AEC (Digital RAD) Adjustment (Optional) . . . . . 42
2.6.6 AEC Optical Density Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.7 Fluoro Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.8 ABC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

2.8.1 ABC System with PhotoMultiplier Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.8.2 ABC System with TV Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.8.2.1 ABC System Adjustment with ABC Signal from TV Camera
Compatible with the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.8.2.2 ABC System Adjustment with ABC Signal from TV Camera
not Compatible with the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.8.2.3 ABC System Adjustment with no ABC Signal from TV Camera 60
2.9 Final Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CA-1036R2 i
Calibration
ii CA-1036R2
Calibration
This Calibration document provides information and procedures to perform all

the adjustments required to establish an optimal performance of this Generator.
Calibrate the Generator immediately after Configuration is

completed.
DO NOT SUPPLY THE MAIN POWER UNTIL SPECIFICALLY

INSTRUCTED TO DO SO IN THIS DOCUMENT.
THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER

RETAIN A LARGE PORTION OF THEIR CHARGE FOR
Calibration data is entered in digital form and stored in a non-volatile memory

chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board, thus no battery
back-up is required.
Note . Calibration procedures must be performed in the order listed in this

document. Perform only the sections required to calibrate this
unit.
CA-1036R2 1
Calibration
1.1 GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 MINIMUM CURRENT TIME PRODUCT (mAs)
• Minimum Current Time Product obtained at 0.1 s is 1 mAs.
• Minimum Current Time Product within the specified ranges of

compliance for linearity and constancy is 0.1 mAs.
1.1.2 ACCURACY OF RADIOGRAPHIC AND FLUOROSCOPIC PARAMETERS
Note . Specified accuracy does not include test equipment accuracy.
ACCURACY
PARAMETERS
(with 12 BITS HT Controller)
kV ± (3% + 1 kV)
RAD mA ± (4% + 1 mA)
Exposure Time ± (2% + 0.1 ms)
kV ± (3% + 1 kV)
FLUORO mA ± 10%
Exposure Time ± (1% + 20 ms)
1.1.3 HV FREQUENCY
The operating HV Frequency of this Generator is 25 kHz / 30 kHz.
1.1.4 DUTY CYCLE
The Generator duty cycle is continuous, but limits should be set during
installation depending on the capacity of the X-ray tube.
2 CA-1036R2
Calibration
SECTION 2 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
Note . Enter in GSM Program for Calibration procedures as described in

the “Configuration” document.
Enter and store calibration data in the Extended Memory

Locations as described in Section 2.2 of the “Configuration”
document.
Record all the calibration data in the Data Book.
Before calibration, bear in mind that:
• For calibration and measure the kVp it is needed a Non-Invasive kVp

Meter.
• For calibration and measure mA or mAs it is needed a mAs Meter

plugged to the banana connections on the HV Transformer (connect the
mAs Meter for Digital mA Loops calibration).
Note . Test points on the HT Controller Board can also be used to monitor
the kV and mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the
unit. These test points must be checked with scope:
- mA test point is TP-5 and the scale factor is:
with HT Controller Board A3000- xx (except - 44)

(<1000 mA Generator)
- from 10 to 80 mA, 1 volt = 10 mA
- from 100 mA, 1 volt = 100 mA
with HT Controller Board A3000- 44 (1000 mA Generator)

- from 10 to 80 mA, 1 volt = 20 mA
- from 100 mA, 1 volt = 200 mA
- kV test point is TP-7 and the scale factor is 1 volt = 33.3 kV

(0.3 volt = 10 kV)
• Verify that dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board is in
“On” position to permit the service mode.
CA-1036R2 3
Calibration
• Verify position of dip switches on the HT Controller Board during every

calibration procedure:
DIP SWITCH OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
Disables Filament and Rotor Interlocks

Position during operation -- Enables Filament and
3000SW2-2 (this turns off the filament so no radiation will
Rotor Interlocks
be produced during the exposure).
3000SW2-4 Position during operation -- Digital mA Loop Closed Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant
Note . Only for Generators with Low Speed Starter (LF-RAC) (it does not
apply to Generators with High Speed Starter - LV-DRAC):
-- When the Digital mA Loop is open (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in

“On”), the rotor runs for two minutes after releasing the handswitch
button from “Preparation” position. After this time the rotor will
brake (unless DC Brake is removed).
-- When the Digital mA Loop is closed (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in

“Off”), the rotor will brake after releasing the handswitch button
from “Preparation” position (unless DC Brake is removed).
• Be sure that X-ray Tubes configured in E02 and E18 Memory Locations
correspond to X-ray Tubes installed (refer to Configuration document).
2.1 FILAMENT STAND-BY CURRENT
Note . For RAD Only Generators, the Filament Stand-by value is

auto-calibrated by the Generator and automatically stored into the
respective Memory Locations (E01 and E17). Filament Stand-by
values are not field changeable.
Note . For RAD and Fluoro Generators, E17 Memory Location (”Fluoro
Filament Setting”) sets maximum patient Entrance Skin Exposure
Dose Rate. (Refer to Section 2.7 “Fluoro Calibration”).
4 CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.2 EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT
The values stored in these Extended Memory Locations only affect to Exposure
Times for techniques below 20 ms. The Memory Locations which affect short
exposure times are:
MEMORY LOCATION
FUNCTION
TUBE-1 TUBE-2
EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT - DELAY E13 E29
EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT - Ceq kV E15 E31
The generator has been optimized at the factory to produce correct exposures
at the lower times (<20 ms.) Therefore do not change the value factory set for
E13 and E29 Memory Locations and only adjust the value for E15 and E31
Memory Location according to the HV Cables length.
The Exposure Time adjustment is calibrated by performing the following steps:

the GSM Program. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the
“OK” button.
2. Select the E13 (or E29) Memory Location. Value in this Memory Location
adjusts the time delay of the exposure. It is factory set for a value of 17,
18 or 19 (default value is “18”). Only read this value, do not change it.
3. Select the E15 (or 31) Memory Location. Value in this Memory Location
is set in relation to the length in meters of one of the HV Cables
(1 ft = 0.3048 m). Verify the HV Cable length in meters and set the
following value:
HV CABLE LENGTH VALUE TO SET IN MEMORY
4m 27
6m 31
9m 38
12 m 45
14 m 49
16 m 54
For another HV Cable length value = (2.2711 x cables length) + 17.744
4. Store the value of each Memory Location by pressing the “Store” button
of the calibration panel.
5. Exit from calibration mode and record the new values in the Data Book.
6. Repeat the above calibration process for the second tube (memory
locations E29 and E31).
CA-1036R2 5
Calibration
2.3 KV LOOP
Extended Memory Location E06 contains the calibration factor for kV Loop.
Each number above or below of the indicated in the E06 memory location
increases or decreases respectively the kV gain value.
Note . Value in E06 Memory Location is only related to the Generator

performance (it is not related to the X-ray Tube(s) or another
components installed), so value in this Memory Location is
factory adjusted. Only perform this procedure if the HT Controller
Board and/or HV Transformer have been replaced in the unit.
The kV Gain for kV Loop can be manually calibrated with a Non-Invasive kV

Meter (recommended procedure) or Auto-calibrated with HV Bleeder.
Manual Calibration of E06 Memory Location
1. With the Generator power OFF:
G Set Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in “Off”

position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
G Set Dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “On”

position (Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).
G Remove the link between the banana plug connections on the HV

Transformer. Connect the mAs Meter to the banana plug
connections to measure mA or mAs.
G Place and center a Non-Invasive kVp Meter on the X-ray Tube

output at the required SID (refer to the Non-Invasive kVp Meter
documentation).

the GSM Program. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the
“OK” button.
3. Select the E06 Memory Location and read the calibration value by
pressing the “Read” button. Enter the value “200” and store it by pressing
the “Store” button.
6 CA-1036R2
Calibration
4. Calibrate manually the Filament Current Number for 80 kV / 200 mA

combination, as indicated in the following steps (if it has not been
previously calibrated).
In calibration mode, Filament Current Numbers are shown on the

calibration panel by pressing the “Read” button after selecting the
respective kV / mA combination. They can be changed by pressing the
“Increase” and “Decrease” buttons and stored by pressing the “Store”
button of the calibration panel.
Select 80 kV, 200 mA, Large Focus. Enter the value “344” as Filament
Current Number (calibration value) and press the “Store” button. Make
an exposure with these parameters. The mAs read on the mAs Meter
must be the same mAs displayed on the calibration screen with a
tolerance of ±0.1 mAs (tolerance of the parameter and mAs Meter).
If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high (or
“Generator Overload” Error is shown), decrease the filament number.
Press the “Store” button before making a new exposure. Repeat until the
mAs read is correct and the mA station is calibrated.
CA-1036R2 7
Calibration
5. Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the “Go to User
Mode” button.
6. Select: RAD Menu, 80 kV, 200 mA, 100 ms and Large Focus. Make an
exposure and note the kV value at the end of the exposure.
7. If calibration of the kV Loop is correct (80 ±1 kV), record value “200” in

the Data Book.
8. If calibration of the kV Loop is not correct:
a. Exit from the “User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual

Calibration” button. Select the E06 Memory Location. Press the
“Read” button to read the value stored.
b. Increase or decrease the value to increase or decrease the kV

respectively. Enter the new value and store it by pressing the
“Store” button.
c. Exit calibration mode and repeat the exposure (steps 5 and 6) to

determine if the new value has had the proper effect, if not repeat
step-8.
d. When it is correct, record the new value for E06 Memory Location
in the Data Book.
9. After calibration of E06 Memory Location, remove the Non-Invasive kVp

Meter.
8 CA-1036R2
Calibration
Auto-Calibration of E06 Memory Location
1. With the Generator power OFF:
G Set Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in “On”

position (disables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
G Remove the HV Cables from the X-ray Tube and connect them to
the HV Bleeder, then connect a short couple of HV Cables from the
HV Bleeder to the X-ray Tube.
2. Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the “Auto Calibration” button

on the GSM menu. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the
“OK” button. Then, select the E06 Memory Location and press the “OK”
button.
Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration by pressing the respective button

(“Yes” or “No”) on the new screen.
CA-1036R2 9
Calibration
Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration (second confirmation) by pressing

the respective button (“Confirm” or “Dismiss”) on the calibration screen.
Auto-calibration is activated when the “Auto Calibration” button is lighted

and the “Press Prep and Expose” message appears on the screen.
3. Make an exposure (technique parameters are pre-programmed at

100 kV, 200 mA and 32 ms and they can be shown when pressing the
“Prep” button).
4. Read the kVp measured with the HV Bleeder and enter this value on the
kV Display by pressing the “kV Increase” or “kV Decrease” buttons.
5. Exit from Auto-calibration mode pressing the “Auto Calibration” button.

At this moment, the Generator will calculate and store the new value in
E06 Memory Location. Auto-calibration is deactivated and the process
is finished when the screen shows the GSM menu.
6. Press the “Manual Calibration” button. Select an available workstation

(WS) and press the “OK” button. Then, select the E06 Memory Location
and read its new value on the Calibration Display. Record this value in
the Data Book.
7. Exit calibration mode.
8. After calibration of E06 Memory Location:
G Switch the Generator power OFF.
G Remove the HV Bleeder and connect the HV Cables from the

Generator directly to the X-ray Tube.
10 CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.4 DIGITAL mA LOOP CLOSED
Extended Memory Locations E03 and E05 contain the calibration factor for
Digital mA Loop Closed. Each number above or below the indicated in the
Memory Locations increases or decreases respectively the mA gain value.
Note . Values in E03 and E05 Memory Locations are only related to the
Generator performance (they are not related to the X-ray Tube
installed), so values in these Memory Locations are factory
adjusted. Only perform this procedure if the HT Controller Board
and/or HV Transformer have been replaced in the unit.
The mA Gain for Digital mA Loop Closed is calibrated by performing the

following steps:
1. With the Generator power OFF, set:
G Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in “Off” position

(enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
G Dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “On” position

(Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).

2. Calibration of E03 and E05 Memory Locations is performed by means of

the “Auto Calibration” menu.
EACH TIME THAT AUTO-CALIBRATION IS ACTIVATED IN

ONE OF THESE MEMORY LOCATIONS, CALIBRATION DATA
STORED FOR THIS MEMORY LOCATION IS DELETED AND A
NEW CALIBRATION FOR IT WILL BE REQUIRED.
CA-1036R2 11
Calibration

on the GSM menu. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the
“OK” button. Then, select the respective Memory Location (E03 or E05)
and press the “OK” button.

Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration (second confirmation) by pressing

12 CA-1036R2
Calibration
Auto-calibration is activated when the “Auto Calibration” button is lighted

and the “Press Prep and Expose” message appears on the screen.
4. Calibrate E03 and E05 Memory Locations as described in the following

pages.
CA-1036R2 13
Calibration
For Low mA stations (from 10 mA to 80 mA) (E03 Memory Location):

on the GSM menu and select the E03 Memory Location. Confirm all the
following screens.
2. When Auto-calibration is activated, “Auto Calibration” button is lighted

and the “3.5 mAs” value is shown on the screen.
3. Perform the following steps:
a. Make an exposure (technique parameters are pre-programmed at

80 kV, 32 mA and 100 ms and they can be shown when pressing
the “Prep” button).
b. Read the mAs measured on the mAs Meter.
c. Read the Filament Current Number shown on the calibration

panel.
d. Increase or decrease the Filament Current Number (by pressing
the “Increase” or “Decrease” buttons) to determine the correction
needed to obtain a value between 3.00 and 4.00 mAs in the mAs
Meter after making a new exposure.
e. Repeat the above steps until a proper mAs value is obtained in the
mAs Meter.
4. Enter the mAs value read in the mAs Meter (it must be a value between
3.00 and 4.00 mAs) in the mAs Display pressing the “mAs Increase” or
“mAs Decrease” buttons.


the Data Book.
14 CA-1036R2
Calibration
For High mA stations (from 100 mA) (E05 Memory Location):

on the GSM menu and select the E05 Memory Location. Confirm all the
following screens.
2. When Auto-calibration is activated, “Auto Calibration” button is lighted

and the “7.75 mAs” value is shown on the screen.
3. Perform the following steps:
a. Make an exposure (technique parameters are pre-programmed at

80 kV, 125 mA and 64 ms (or 63 ms or 65 ms depending on Generator)
and they can be shown when pressing the “Prep” button).
b. Read the mAs measured on the mAs Meter.
c. Read the Filament Current Number shown on the calibration

panel.
d. Increase or decrease the Filament Current Number (by pressing
the “Increase” or “Decrease” buttons) to determine the correction
needed to obtain a value between 7.00 and 8.50 mAs in the mAs
Meter after making a new exposure.
e. Repeat the above steps until a proper mAs value is obtained in the
mAs Meter.
4. Enter the mAs value read in the mAs Meter (it must be a value between
7.00 and 8.50 mAs) in the mAs Display pressing the “mAs Increase” or
“mAs Decrease” buttons.


the Data Book.
8. After calibration of E03 and E05 Memory Locations:
G Disconnect the mAs Meter to the banana plug connections.
G Re-install the link between the banana plug connections on the HV

Transformer.
CA-1036R2 15
Calibration
2.5 DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN (X-RAY TUBE CALIBRATION)
To achieve the most accurate calibration, this procedure has to be

automatically performed by the Generator (Auto-calibration). Calibration
procedure will be manually performed by the field engineer only if
Auto-calibration is not possible.
Two different methods are described in this section: Auto-calibration and

Manual Calibration.
Digital mA Loop Open is calibrated by performing the following steps:


2. Turn the Generator ON.
3. Perform the Auto-calibration procedure as described in Section 2.5.1 for

each X-ray Tube in the system.
2.5.1 AUTO-CALIBRATION OF DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN
Auto-calibration of the Filament Current Numbers is divided in two separated

procedures related to the mA stations configured for the Small or Large Focal
Spots.
It is recommended to start with the Small Focal Spot (first group) and continue
with the Large Focal Spot (second group).
EACH TIME THAT AUTO-CALIBRATION IS ACTIVATED IN A

mA STATION (OR IN “E01” MEMORY LOCATION), ALL THE
FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS OF THE SELECTED FOCAL
SPOT ARE AUTOMATICALLY SET TO “344”. SO A NEW
COMPLETE CALIBRATION OF THE FILAMENT CURRENT
NUMBERS FOR THIS FOCAL SPOT WILL BE REQUIRED.
16 CA-1036R2
Calibration
Auto-calibration starts with the minimum available mA station for the selected
Focal Spot at 50 kV and follows with the other combinations of mA stations for
the selected Focal Spot at 80 kV, 120 kV and 40 kV.

on the GSM menu.
2. Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated

and press the “OK” button. This workstation has to be one of the
previously configured as “Direct”.
3. Select the Small Focal Spot by pressing the “Small” button and then
press the “OK” button.

CA-1036R2 17
Calibration
4. Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration (second confirmation) by pressing

5. Auto-calibration is activated when the “Auto Calibration” button is lighted

and the “Press Prep and Expose” message appears on the screen. At
this moment, the Generator has checked the mA stations available for
the Small Focal Spot.
18 CA-1036R2
Calibration
6. Check that the Heat Units capacity available for the X-ray Tube is 100%
or nearly (HU 0% displayed on the screen).
BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURE IN AUTO-CALIBRATION,

VERIFY THAT THE LINK BETWEEN THE BANANA PLUG
CONNECTIONS ON THE HV TRANSFORMER IS INSTALLED.
7. Keep fully pressed the Handswitch button to perform continuous

exposures.
Note . In Auto-calibration mode, all technique parameters are factory

pre-programmed and they can not be changed.
Auto-calibration can be paused momentarily releasing the

Handswitch button, whenever there is not an exposure in
process. Do not exit from Auto-calibration before the
procedure has been completed.
Note . Auto-calibration can be cancelled by pressing the “Auto

Calibration” button. A message on the screen informs that
Auto-calibration has been cancelled and after a while the screen
shows the GSM menu.
If during Auto-calibration process, any error indication is shown

momentarily (such as “Tube Overload”, etc.), it means that Generator
can not calibrate in this moment the selected kV / mA combination
(because anode overheated, space charge, Generator power limit, etc.).
In this case, the Generator will continue with Auto-calibration of the
following available kV / mA combinations for the selected Focal Spot. At
the end of the process it will try to calibrate or calculate the combinations
previously uncalibrated.
If the Heat Units value displayed is more than 60%, exposures are
inhibited momentarily and message “Tube too hot” is shown on the
screen. This message will disappear and exposures can be made again
when the X-ray Tube begins to cool and recovers the Heat Units capacity.
At this point, it is recommended to wait until the Heat Units value

displayed are close to the 20% before making any exposure.
CA-1036R2 19
Calibration
Generator tries to calibrate each kV / mA combination for ten (10)

attempts (maximum). If calibration is cancelled (after ten attempts),
message “Auto calibration failure” is shown on the screen until press the
“Auto Calibration” button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and go back
to the GSM menu. Calibration can be also cancelled due to space charge
during calibration of the lowest kV at the highest mA stations for the Focal
Spot selected, so message “Auto calibration failure” is also shown on the
screen until press the “Auto Calibration” button to exit from
Auto-calibration mode and go back to the GSM menu.
ONLY IF AUTO-CALIBRATION IS CANCELLED DUE TO

“AUTO CALIBRATION FAILURE”, CONTINUE THE
AUTO-CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR THE OTHER FOCAL
SPOT. CHECK AT THE END OF THE AUTO-CALIBRATION
PROCEDURE WHICH kV / mA COMBINATIONS HAVE NOT
BEEN AUTO-CALIBRATED FOR EACH FOCAL SPOT (THESE
COMBINATIONS HAVE THE FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBER
SET TO “344”). MANUALLY CALIBRATE THESE kV / mA
COMBINATIONS AS EXPLAIN IN SECTION 2.5.2.
When Auto-calibration is successfully performed, message “Auto

Calibration OK” is shown on the screen until press the “Auto Calibration”
button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and go back to the GSM menu.
8. Repeat the same procedure for the Large Focal Spot.
Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the “Auto Calibration” button

on the GSM menu.
Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated

Select the Large Focal Spot by pressing the “Large” button and then
press the “OK” button.

on each screen.
Auto-calibration is activated when the “Auto Calibration” button is lighted.

At this moment, the Generator has checked the mA stations available for
the Large Focal Spot.
Before starting the exposures, it is recommended to wait until the Heat

Units value displayed are close to the 20%.
20 CA-1036R2
Calibration
9. After performing both procedures (for Small and Large Focal Spots),
enter in “Manual Calibration” mode and select each combination of the
available mA stations for each Focal Spot at the kV break points (40, 50,
80 and 120 kV). Press the “Read” button to read on the calibration panel
the new value of the Filament Current Number stored for each
combination and record the new values in the Data Book.
Note that the highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have numbers
larger than the lowest mA station for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.
11. Perform the Auto-calibration procedure for the second X-ray Tube.
12. Turn the Generator power OFF and set Dip Switch 3000SW2-4 on the
HT Controller Board in “Off” position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
2.5.2 MANUAL CALIBRATION OF DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN
This procedure describes the Manual calibration of all the Filament Current
Numbers. It has to be also used to calibrate the kV / mA combinations not
performed during Auto-calibration procedure because it has not been
completed. These combinations have the Filament Current Number set to
“344”, so only these combinations have to be manually calibrated as described
in this procedure. If Auto-calibration for one of the Focal Spots has been
successful, it is only required to perform the manual calibration of the mA station
do not calibrate for the other Focal Spot.
Manual Calibration is initiated at the 80 kV break point by entering the

appropriate Filament Current Number for the proper tube current at each
selectable mA. Calibration at the other kV break points (40, 50, 80 and 120 kV)
are obtained by adding or subtracting values as indicated in Table 2-1.
Although the suggested values (Table 2-1) could change depending on the
X-ray tube used, entering those values will approximate accurate calibration
without making excessive exposures.
In “Manual Calibration” mode, the Filament Current Numbers are shown on the
calibration panel by pressing the “Read” button after selecting the respective
kV / mA combination. The value can be changed by pressing the “Increase” or
“Decrease” buttons of the calibration panel and stored by pressing the “Store”
button.
Note that in calibration mode, only the mA stations and kV (at the break points)
can be selected.
CA-1036R2 21
Calibration
Table 2-1
mA Calibration Numbers Change
FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kV BREAK POINT

mA
A STATION
40 50 80 120
10 A1+7 A1+6 A1 A1 --5
12.5 A2+7 A2+6 A2 A2 --5
16 A3+7 A3+6 A3 A3 --5
20 A4+7 A4+6 A4 A4 --5
25 A5+7 A5+6 A5 A5 --5
32 A6+7 A6+6 A6 A6 --5
40 A7+7 A7+6 A7 A7 --5
50 A8+7 A8+6 A8 A8 --5
64 (or 63 or 65) A9+7 A9+6 A9 A9 --5
80 A10+7 A10+6 A10 A10 --5
100 A11+10 A11+8 A11 A11 --7
125 A12+10 A12+8 A12 A12 --7
160 A13+10 A13+8 A13 A13 --7
200 A14+10 A14+8 A14 A14 --7
250 A15+10 A15+8 A15 A15 --7
320 A16+14 A16+11 A16 A16 --9
400 A17+14 A17+11 A17 A17 --9
500 A18+14 A18+11 A18 A18 --9
640 (or 630 or 650) A19+14 A19+11 A19 A19 --9
800 A20+14 A20+11 A20 A20 --9
1000 A21+14 A21+11 A21 A21 --9
Note.-- The mA station values depends on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.
22 CA-1036R2
Calibration



2. Turn the Generator ON and enter in calibration mode by pressing the

“Manual Calibration” button on the GSM menu.
3. Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated

4. Check that the Heat Units available for the X-ray Tube is 100% or nearly
(HU 0% displayed on the screen).
5. Accordingly to X-ray tube ratings or maximum Generator power, check

which kV / mA combinations in Table 2-1 are allowed.
If error “Tube Overload” is shown after selection of a kV / mA combination,

it means this combination is not allowed for the selected X-ray Tube.
In calibration mode, if Generator power is exceeded by a kV / mA

combination selection, error “E-16” is shown after “Preparation”. Reset
this error by pressing the “Reset Error” button.
Note which combinations in Table 2-1 can not be calibrated by making

exposures (combinations not allowed due to Tube rating, maximum
Generator power, space charge, etc.) and the Exposure Time assigned
to these combinations in calibration mode.
Mode” button. Select the mA station and Exposure Time of each kV / mA
combination not allowed. Increase or decrease the kV value as required
to determine the kV value allowed nearest to the kV value of the
combination. Note the kV value allowed in the respective cell of
Table 2-1.
CA-1036R2 23
Calibration
7. Exit from the “User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration”
button. Select 80 kV and lowest mA station available (first combination
available). Enter a Filament Number of “344” for this combination.
8. Make an exposure. The mAs read on the mAs Meter must be the same
mAs displayed on the calibration screen with a tolerance of ± 0.1 mAs
(tolerance of the parameter and mAs Meter). If the mAs read is close to
zero, increase the filament number in big steps (a.e. increase values in
40). As the mAs read is close to the mAs displayed on the Console,
increase (or reduce) the filament number in smaller steps (a.e. increase
value in 30, 20, 10, ...).
If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high,

decrease the filament number. Press the “Store” button before making
a new exposure. Repeat until the mA station is calibrated.
Note . Press the “Store” button to store the new data (filament number)
before selecting the next kV or mA stations.
Calibration data (presently in memory) may or may not be

close to your requirements. If it is not close, the potential
exists to damage the X-ray tube (i.e. too much mA). Thus, as
you start the mA calibration procedure note how close or how
far off the mA break points are. If a large adjustment (more
than 40 points) is required at the low mA stations, make
estimated adjustments to the high mA stations before those
exposures are made.
9. Select the next mA station at 80 kV. Before making any exposure, enter
as filament number the value calibrated for the previous mA station
increased in 10.
If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high,

decrease the filament number. Press the “Store” button before making
a new exposure. Repeat until the mA station is calibrated.
24 CA-1036R2
Calibration
10. Complete the calibration process for all mA stations at 80 kV as

described before. When select the first mA station for the Large Focal
Spot, enter as a filament number the value calibrated for the first mA
station for the Small Focal Spot. Note that the highest mA station for
Small Focal Spot may have numbers larger than the lowest mA station
for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.
Press the “Read” button to read on the calibration panel the new value
of the Filament Current Number stored for each mA station at 80 kV.
Record the new values in the Data Book.
Note . When highest mA stations of the Generator can not be calibrated

at 80 kV due to insufficient filament current (the filament current
number has reached the maximum number (999)), replace on the
Filament Board (A3004--09/10) the Resistor R11 for another
resistor with 1.4 Ω / 5 W, and place Jumper JP1 in position “A”.
Then rename the Filament Board as A3004--11.
ATTENTION: After doing this modification reduce the value

of all the filament current numbers (column for 80 kV) at the
25% and perform the calibration procedure again (from
step-5).
11. Complete the calibration process for the remaining kV / mA combinations

using Table 2-1 as a guide. It is not necessary to make exposures to do
this. Compute the value for all the kV break points of each available mA
station although the Generator power can not reach all the kV / mA
combinations. Select the corresponding kV / mA combination and enter
the computed value.
12. Check calibration at all break points (making exposures) and correct any
calibration points as needed.
Note . If “Tube Overload” error is shown directly after selection of an

allowed combination (refer to step-5.), wait until the X-ray tube
anode cools down to permit the calibration of the mA station.
13. Recalculate the values of the non-allowed combinations in accordance

to the new values obtained by exposures. (Refer to Table 2-1).
CA-1036R2 25
Calibration
Mode” button. Select the mA station, Exposure Time and kV value noted
for each kV / mA combination not allowed (refer to step-6.). Check
calibration at these kV / mA combinations by making exposures. If
needed, enter in calibration mode and correct the Filament Current
Number of the respective kV / mA combination not allowed.
15. Exit from the “User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration”
button. In calibration mode, select each combination of the available mA
stations at the kV break points (40, 50, 80 and 120 kV). Press the “Read”
button to read on the kV Display the new value of the Filament Current
Number stored for each combination. Record the new values in the Data
Book.
Note that the highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have numbers
larger than the lowest mA station for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.
17. If required, perform the calibration procedure for the second X-ray Tube.
18. After calibration of Filament Current Numbers:
G Disconnect the mAs Meter to the banana plug connections.
G Re-install the link between the banana plug connections on the HV

Transformer.
G Set Dip Switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in

“Off” position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
26 CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.6 AEC CALIBRATION
This section describes the adjustments needed to calibrate the AEC according
to the customer input. Therefore, AEC exposures will be made during the
calibration process in order to insure AEC functionality.
The Optical Density is controlled by the values stored in the respective memory
locations. These values are influenced by film speed, screen speed, dark room
procedures and customer requirements.
Use a homogeneous Phantom with enough density to produce an exposure of

100 ms, the AEC will be calibrated to produce a density of 1.0 (or the customer
preference Optical Density) at 70 kV, and then AEC tracking will be adjusted to
produce the same density at 55 kV, 90 kV and 110 kV.
Note . For AEC calibration, use the same Film and Cassettes used by the
customer. AEC calibration must be performed using the Medium
Film/Screen speed combination. The Medium Film/Screen speed
has to be double of the Slow and half of the Fast (e.g. 200--Slow,
400--Medium, 800--Fast).
Note . When using CR (Computer Radiography) or DR (Digital

Radiography) instead of measuring Optical Density:
-- measure the Image Gray level by using the needed software

tools inside each application (refer CR or DR documentation).
-- or measure the Dose level:

-- For CR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the
Cassette and centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber.
-- For DR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the
Panel, centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber and with
the Grid removed.
The following table indicates the Memory Locations related to AEC Calibration.
FUNCTION MEMORY LOCATION
AEC-1 CALIBRATION E04
AEC-1 TRACKING E08
AEC-2 TRACKING E10
AEC-4 CALIBRATION / PHOTOMULTIPLIER AEC CALIBRATION E23
AEC-3 and AEC-4 TRACKING (equal value for both) E24
AEC DENSITY SCALE E12
CA-1036R2 27
Calibration
Illustration 2-1
Automatic Exposure Control
DAC
Jumper
COMPARATOR
Adjustment V ref
(Potentiomer) Reference
V out
AEC STOP
to cut the exposure
Ramp
ATP Console CPU (from Ion Chamber)
Data Bus
Microprocessor
EXP ORDER
STRT DR
DAC Vout (Reference)

(calibration data setting)
Ion Chamber Output

EXP Start
AEC STOP
(AEC CONTROL PCB)
EXP Stop
AEC Function Waveform
2.6.1 PREVIOUS CHECKS
Make sure the automatic processor works correctly, and the concentration and
temperature of the solutions comply with manufacturer specifications.
Obtain a sensitometric curve to determine gamma (γ) of the film and the solution
quality. The procedure normally requires a sensitometer, but if it is not available
proceed as follows:
1. Make two exposures using the same kV and Film/Screen combination

(medium is recommended) but with different mAs settings, mAs(f1) and
mAs(f2).
2. Develop and measure the Density (d) of each, d(f1) and d(f2).
3. Determine gamma (γ) by the formula:

d(f2) − d(f1)
γ= mAs(f2)
log 10 mAs(f1)
Gamma (γ) must be between 2 and 3, if not change or renew solutions.
28 CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.6.2 BALANCE ADJUSTMENT FOR THREE FIELD DETECTORS
Note . Some Ion Chambers does not provide balance potentiometers for
Three Field Detectors. Continue calibration process in Section
2.6.3 “Optical Density Adjustment”.
1. Set the Master Gain potentiometer of the Ion Chambers to mid range
(refer to Ion Chamber documentation).
2. Set the following jumper on the AEC Control Board to position A: JP3 for
Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or JP2 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9.
3. Set SID at the Focal Distance of the Grid installed in the Table Bucky
(usually 100 cm) or in the Vertical Bucky Stand (usually 150 cm).
4. Collimate the X-ray beam so that it completely covers all three fields but
does not extend beyond limits of the phantom.
5. Place Copper plates (or equivalent homogeneous phantom) in the

Collimator Filter Holder: 1.5 mm for SID of 100 cm, 1 mm for SID 150 cm.
(1 mm Copper ≃ 10 cm Plexiglass or Water).
6. Enter in calibration mode and verify that AEC Calibration number in E04,
E09, E20 and E23 Memory Locations is 70. The range for AEC
calibration numbers are from 20 to 120. Exit from calibration mode.
7. Enter in calibration mode selecting a Workstation configured for the Ion

Chamber to be calibrated. Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by
pressing the “Go to User Mode” button.
CA-1036R2 29
Calibration
8. Select on the Console:
G RAD Menu: 70 kV, 200 mA Large Focus (or the first mA station for
Large Focus if 200 mA station is set for Small Focus) and 1 second
back-up time.
G AEC Menu: “Central Area” , “Density 0” and “Medium

Film/Screen”.
30 CA-1036R2
Calibration
9. Make an exposure without film in the cassette and note the Exposure
Time displayed on the Console, it should be approximately 100 ms. If
necessary, change the Copper thickness or mA station and make the
exposure again.
Note . The “Actual Exposure Parameters” area shows the last exposure
parameters when: exposure is finished by the AEC, exposure is
aborted by releasing the exposure control, or after pressing the
“Reset Error” button.
10. Deselect “Center Area” and select “Left Area”. Make an exposure
without film in the cassette and record the Exposure Time. If this time is
not equal to the “Center Area” time (± 7%), check that the Ion Chamber
is parallel to the X-ray Tube and make an exposure again. If it is parallel,
adjust “Left Area” balance potentiometer to increase or decrease
Exposure Time. Repeat this process until both Exposure Times for
“Center Area” and “Left Area” are equal.
11. Deselect “Left Area” and select “Right Area”. Make an exposure without
film in the cassette and record the Exposure Time. If this time is not equal
to the “Center Area” time (± 7%), adjust “Right Area” balance
potentiometer to increase or decrease Exposure Time. Repeat process
until both Exposure Times for “Center Area” and “Right Area” are equal.
12. Check that the three scan Areas have equal Exposure Time (± 7%):
G “Center Area” with “Left Area”, “Center Area” with “Right Area”,
and “Left Area” with “Right Area”.
G All three Areas.
13. Exit from the “Go to User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual
Calibration” button and exit from calibration mode.
14. Repeat the above steps for all the Ion Chambers installed with the
Generator.
CA-1036R2 31
Calibration
2.6.3 OPTICAL DENSITY ADJUSTMENT
Note . The Film Optical Density must be measured always on the same
point for all the X-ray Films developed during this procedure.
The recommended point is on the central axis of the Film with

relation of the Anode and Cathode and as close as possible to
center of the Film.
Illustration 2-2
How to measure the Film Optical Density
A K
USEFUL BEAM
DENSITOMETER FILM
32 CA-1036R2
Calibration
ION CHAMBERS WITH DETECTOR GAIN SWITCHES

OR WITH POTENTIOMETER
1. Set the Detector Gain switches (or gain potentiometer) of the Ion
Chamber to mid range (refer to Ion Chamber documentation). (If the Ion
Chamber is provided with the Generator, this adjustment is Factory set.)
The following tables indicate the switch position for the “Vacutec” Ion
Chamber (Factory set).
VACUTEC ION CHAMBER -- BAK 70 151 with Amplifier 70 901
SWITCH POSITION SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
0.1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 100 μGy) OFF OFF OFF
0.5 V / μGy (10 V≃ 20 μGy) ON OFF OFF

GAIN
1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 10 μGy) OFF ON OFF
2 V / μGy (10 V≃ 5 μGy) OFF OFF ON
Positive ON
OUTPUT SIGNAL
Negative OFF
NORMAL FACTORY SELECTION: 1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 10 μGy) - Positive OFF ON OFF ON
VACUTEC DIGITAL ION CHAMBER -- BAK 70 151 with Amplifier 70 902
SWITCH POSITION SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
0.1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 100 μGy) OFF OFF OFF OFF
0.5 V / μGy (10 V≃ 20 μGy) OFF OFF OFF ON
GAIN 1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 10 μGy) OFF OFF ON OFF
2 V / μGy (10 V≃ 5 μGy) OFF ON OFF OFF
4 V / μGy (10 V≃ 2.5 μGy) ON OFF OFF OFF
Positive or Negative polarity of the ramp signal is selected with a switch at the Ramp Module.
OUTPUT SIGNAL The Ramp Module is a 9-pin Sub-D connector plugged to the Ion Chamber cable.
Positive polarity of the ramp signal is factory set.
NORMAL FACTORY SELECTION: 1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 10 μGy) - Positive OFF OFF ON OFF
CA-1036R2 33
Calibration
2. Set the following jumper on the AEC Control Board to position A: JP3 for

E09, E20 and E23 Memory Locations is 70. The useful range for AEC
calibration numbers is from 20 to 120. Exit from calibration mode.

back-up time.

Film/Screen”.
necessary, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA
station) and make the exposure again.
34 CA-1036R2
Calibration
10. Insert a cassette with the Medium Film/Screen combination used by the
customer. Make an exposure, develop the film and check the Optical
Density, it should be 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density).
11. To change the density:
G For Ion Chamber with Gain switches:
-- If the Optical Density obtained is 33% above of the desired

density, increase the gain with the switches. Repeat step-10.
-- If the Optical Density obtained is 33% below of the desired

density, decrease the gain with the switches. Repeat step-10.
-- If the Optical Density obtained is in between 33% of the desired

density, change the AEC calibration number. Exit from the “Go to
User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button
and in calibration mode set the new AEC calibration number for the
respecetive Memory Location (E04, E09, E20 or E23). The Optical
Density increases / decreases when the calibration number is
increased / decreased. Then enter in “User Mode” screen and
repeat step-10.
G For Ion Chamber with Master Gain potentiometer, adjust this

potentiometer until the desired density is obtained by repeating
step-10. If the adjustment is not achieved with the Master Gain
potentiometer, change the AEC calibration number. Exit from the
“Go to User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration”
button and in calibration mode set the new AEC calibration
number for the respecetive Memory Location (E04, E09, E20 or
E23). The Optical Density increases / decreases when the
calibration number is increased / decreased. Then enter in “Go to
User Mode” screen and repeat step-10.
Note . The AEC accuracy is better in all the useful range as the AEC
calibration number is closer to 70.
Generator.
14. Record all the values for the Memory Locations in the Data Book.
CA-1036R2 35
Calibration
ION CHAMBERS WITHOUT DETECTOR GAIN SWITCHES

OR WITHOUT POTENTIOMETER
1. Set the following jumper on the AEC Control Board to position B: JP3 for
2. Set to mid range, the following potentiometer on the AEC Control Board:
R10 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R22 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9.
Note . The density adjustment of ALL the Ion Chambers in the system are
affected by this potentiometer.

E09, E20 and E23 Memory Locations is 70. The useful range for AEC
calibration numbers is from 20 to 120. Exit from calibration mode.

back-up time.

Film/Screen”.
36 CA-1036R2
Calibration
necessary for that, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change
the mA station) and make the exposure again. Take note of the final
Copper thickness and mA station selected.
11. Repeat the above steps for each Ion Chamber.
customer. Make an exposure (use the final Copper thickness and the
selected mA station noted before), develop the film and take note of the
Optical Density measured for each Ion Chamber.
15. Repeat steps 12. and 13. for each Ion Chamber.
CA-1036R2 37
Calibration
16. Take the maximum and minimum value of the O. Densities measured
before, sum them and divide the result by two. Subtract this value from
density 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density) to obtain the O.
Density difference.
O.D. max + O.D. min
O.D. difference = O.D. customer preference --
2
Calculate the new O. Density by adding the O. D. difference (with its sign
+ or --) to the value of the O. Density measured for the Ion Chamber closer
to 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density).
new O.D. = O.D. mesured + (O.D. difference)
For this Ion Chamber, adjust the potentiometer (turning it clockwise will
decrease the O. Density) R10 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R22 for
Board A3012--x6/x7/x9 (at least one turn).
Enter in calibration mode selecting a Workstation configured for the Ion

pressing the “Go to User Mode” button. Make another exposure, develop
the film and check the Optical Density. Repeat this action (adjusting the
potentiometer and making exposures) until the new Optical Density
(calculated before) for this Ion Chamber is obtained.
17. The Optical Density for each Ion Chamber has to be adjusted to 1.0 (or
the customer preference O. Density).
Exit from the “Go to User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual
Calibration” button and in calibration mode select the AEC calibration
number for the respective Memory Location (E04, E09, E20 or E23).
Change the AEC calibration number: The Optical Density increases /
decreases when the calibration number is increased / decreased. Then
enter in “Go to User Mode” screen.
Make another exposure, develop the film and check the Optical Density.
Repeat this action (changing the respective Memory Location and
making exposures) until the desired Optical Density is obtained.
Note . The AEC accuracy is better in all the useful range as the AEC
calibration number is closer to 70.
18. Repeat step-17. until the desired Optical Density for each Ion Chamber
is obtained.
38 CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.6.4 kV COMPENSATION
To maintain constant AEC Optical Density regardless of the kV at which a film

is exposed, the Generator provides kV compensation. (Refer to Illustration 2-3)
Perform the following steps to determine whether or not AEC Tracking of Optical
Density must be adjusted.
1. Enter in calibration mode and verify that AEC Tracking number in E08,
E10 and E24 Memory Locations is “0”. Exit from calibration mode.

back-up time.

Film/Screen”.
4. Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check that the
Exposure Time is lower than 1 second. If necessary for that, change the
Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the
exposure again. Take note of the final Copper thickness and mA station
selected for 55 kV.
5. Select 90 kV. Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check
that the Exposure Time is higher than 20 ms. If necessary for that, change
the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the
selected for 90 kV.
selected for 110 kV.

customer. Make an exposure at 55 kV and 90 kV (use the final Copper
thickness and the selected mA station noted before for each kV), develop
the film and measure the Optical Density obtained with those exposures.
Check that the film variation range is the same ±0.2 of the Optical
Density (±20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR)
obtained before at 70 kV (Optical Density Adjustment -- Section 2.6.3).
CA-1036R2 39
Calibration
8. If the variation value is not ±0.2 of the Optical Density (±20% of Image
Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR) calculate the new value for the
AEC Tracking number in each Memory Location in the following manner:
G If the Optical Density at 55 kV has to be decreased and the Optical

Density above 70 kV has to be increased then increase the
Tracking value in one.
G If the Optical Density at 55 kV has to be increased and the Optical

Density above 70 kV has to be decreased then decrease the
Tracking value in one.
Note . A tracking value of 10 will have no effect on AEC density (used in

solid state detectors).
a. Exit from the “Go to User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual
Calibration” button and in calibration mode select the respective
Memory Location (E08, E10 or E24).
b. Values for AEC Tracking range is from --10 to +10. Determine the
correct value for the needed AEC Tracking change.
AEC-kV
TRACKING +10 +9 +8 +7 +6 +5 +4 +3 +2 +1 0 --1 --2 --3 --4 --5 --6 --7 --8 --9 --10
CURVE
VALUE TO ENTER
IN THE MEMORY 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247 246
LOCATION
c. Enter the new value and store it. Enter in user mode inside
calibration mode by pressing the “Go to User Mode” button and
repeat this process from step-7. until the desired density
compensation is obtained.

customer. Make an exposure at 110 kV (use the final Copper thickness
and the selected mA station noted before for 110 kV), develop the film
and measure the Optical Density obtained with those exposures. Check
that the film variation range is the same ±0.2 of the Optical Density
(±20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR) obtained before
at 70 kV (Optical Density Adjustment -- Section 2.6.3). If the variation
value is not ±0.2 repeat step-8.
Note . Calibration of AEC Tracking at 110 kV modifies the adjustment

done at 55 kV and 90 kV. Repeat exposures of step-7. and check
that they are correct.
In case that the AEC Tracking at 110 kV places the adjustment at

55 kV and 90 kV out of range, choose the AEC Tracking value
more convenient for the application.
40 CA-1036R2
Calibration
Generator.
Illustration 2-3
AEC kV Tracking Curve
250
200
DAC OUTPUT in byte (8 Bit) (U3-2 of AEC Control Board)
150
100
70 10
8
50 6
4
2
0
--2
--4
0
--6
--8
--10
--50
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
kV
CA-1036R2 41
Calibration
2.6.5 PHOTOMULTIPLIER RAD--AEC (DIGITAL RAD) ADJUSTMENT (OPTIONAL)
The Photomultiplier RAD--AEC adjustment can be performed in two ways: one

is the value stored in E23 Memory Location and the other is the high voltage
applied to the Photomultiplier Tube.
The recommended procedure for this adjustment is to store a constant value

in E23 Memory Location and adjust the high voltage applied to the
Photomultiplier Tube.
Note . Value in E23 Memory Location is a common data used for

Photomultiplier AEC Calibration or used for the Fourth Ion
Chamber Calibration (AEC-4).
Perform the following procedure:
1. Enter in “Manual Calibration” mode selecting a Workstation configured

for DSI. Select E23 Memory Location and set a value of “127”. Then enter
in user mode by pressing the “Go to User Mode” button.
2. Set up a Dosimeter as close as possible to the Image Intensifier

Radiation Input to measure the Entrance Image Intensifier Exposure
Dose Rate. Position the Probe at the center of the primary beam with the
entire active volume within the primary beam. Select the Field of View
for the Image Intensifier to have 9” FOV.
Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly at the normal SID (1 meter).

Collimate the X-ray beam so it completely covers the Image Intensifier
field but does not extend beyond limits of the phantom.
3. Place 2 mm of Copper (or equivalent homogeneous phantom) in the

Collimator Filter Holder. (1 mm Copper ≃ 10 cm Plexiglass or Water).
back-up time.

Film/Screen”.
42 CA-1036R2
Calibration
5. Activate “Digital Prep” (--DIGITAL PREP signal = GND on TS3-7

Generator Cabinet). Hold “Digital Prep” and adjust the high voltage
applied to the Photomultiplier Tube with the potentiometer R12 for Board
A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R23 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9 on the AEC Control
Board until measure --400 VDC between TS1--39 and TS1--42 (GND) in
the Generator Cabinet.
6. The Dose is affected in the following manner:
G Increases when the high voltage applied to the Photomultiplier

Tube is decreased. (Example: if 100 μR Dose is obtained with
--400 VDC, 200 μR Dose may be obtained decreasing the high
voltage to --300 VDC).
G Decreases when the high voltage applied to the Photomultiplier

Tube is increased. (Example: if 100 μR Dose is obtained with --400
VDC, 50 μR Dose may be obtained increasing the high voltage to
--450 VDC).
7. Make an exposure and adjust the following potentiometer on the AEC

Control Board: R12 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R23 for Board
A3012--x6/x7/x9 on the AEC Control Board; until getting a Dose around
100 μR per frame (at 9” FOV) (for more information refer to the Image
System documentation).
Note . If the photo tube voltage required is too low, decrease the AEC
calibration number in the E23 Memory Location and repeat the
process.
8. Record the E23 Memory Location in the Data Book.
CA-1036R2 43
Calibration
2.6.6 AEC OPTICAL DENSITY SCALE
AEC is calibrated with “Density 0” selected (Normal Optical Density). The

Optical Density can be increased or decreased in several steps.
The variation percentage of the density scale is factory set at 25%. This
variation can be set according to the customer preferences by changing the
value stored in E12 Memory Location. This value applies to both tubes.
Depending on the Console model, the range of the scale is “from --2 to +2” or
“from --4 to +4” (optional ).
The following tables show some examples for the variation percentage of the
density scale with reference to the value stored in E12 Memory Location.
DENSITY SCALE FROM --2 TO +2 . VARIATION OVER NORMAL OPTICAL DENSITY (N)
E12 VALUE
--2 --1 0 +1 +2
5 N x 0.90 N x 0.95 N N x 1.05 N x 1.10
10 N x 0.80 N x 0.90 N N x 1.10 N x 1.20
25 N x 0.50 N x 0.75 N N x 1.25 N x 1.50
NOTE: If the value stored in E12 Memory Location is 0, 25 or 255, the variation percentage is 25%.
DENSITY SCALE FROM --4 TO +4 (OPTIONAL) . VARIATION OVER NORMAL OPTICAL DENSITY (N)
E12
VALUE --4 --3 --2 --1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
5 N x 0.82 N x 0.86 N x 0.91 N x 0.95 N N x 1.05 N x 1.10 N x 1.16 N x 1.22
NOTE: With scale from “--4 to +4” the useful range for the value stored in E12 Memory Location is from 1 to 25 .
Record the value for E12 Memory Location in the Data Book.
44 CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.7 FLUORO CALIBRATION
This generator uses Pulsed Fluoro at fixed or variable rate. This technique is
a series of short exposures at the TV frame rate (fixed rate) or at the selected
PPS (variable rate).
Fluoro exposures are controlled by kV with a constant filament current. The kV

values are manually (Manual mode) or automatically (ABC mode) adjusted to
obtain the desired brightness (entrance dose rate) on the Image Intensifier.
The Fluoro calibration consists of setting values in the corresponding Extended

Memory Locations for Fluoro use. The following table indicates the relationship
between Fluoro and Extended Memory Locations.
FUNCTION MEMORY LOCATIONS
Fluoro Filament Setting E17
Maximum Fluoro kV E19
Fluoro mA Display Calibration at 50 kV E25
The functions of these extended Memory Locations are:
• E17 is used to store data that controls the Maximum Skin Dose Radiation
at the following maximum levels (Regulation limits) (1 Rad = 8.7 mGy).
G 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) for systems working with Manual mode

(Non-ABC).
G 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) for systems working with Automatic mode

(ABC).
Note that in practice, the rejection limits for entrance exposure rate must
be somewhat less than the maximum specified due to Dosimeter
calibration accuracy. (Refer to Table 2-2.)
Table 2-2
Rejection Limits Based on Meter Calibration Accuracy
REJECTIONS LIMITS
METER CALIBRATION
ACCURACY FOR 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) MAXIMUM FOR 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) MAXIMUM
±5% 4.75 R/min (41.3 mGy/min) 9.5 R/min (82.7 mGy/min)
±15% 4.25 R/min (37 mGy/min) 8.5 R/min (74 mGy/min)
CA-1036R2 45
Calibration
• E19 is used to set maximum Fluoro kV. This value is determined by the
type of TV camera and type of images desired. For general fluoroscopic
use with a conventional TV system, 120 kV is recommended. A lower
maximum setting will produce more contrast on the TV system but less
penetration for large patients.
• E25, E26, E27 are used to calibrate the Fluoro mA Display. These values
will be shown on the Fluoro mA Display during Fluoro exposures
whenever maximum PPS are selected.
Note . The Fluoro mA Display values entered into the Extended Memory
Locations E25, E26 and E27 are also used to calculate Heat Units.
It is important to enter accurate values.
Fluoro functions are calibrated by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the generator ON.
Make sure that the Small Filament of the X-ray tube is properly
warmed-up (at less 15 minutes).
2. Set up a Dosimeter to measure the Maximum Entrance Skin Exposure

entire active volume within the primary beam.
Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly as close as possible to the

Table-Top, fully open the Collimator Blades and align the Image
Intensifier with the light beam. Block radiation input to Image Intensifier
with a Lead Apron. (Refer to Illustration 2-4).
3. Enter in “Manual Calibration” mode through a Fluoro workstation and

read the Filament Number at 120 kV / 10 mA. Divide this value by four
(4) and enter it as starting value for E17 Memory Location (Fluoro
Filament Setting).
4. Select E19 Memory Location and set the maximum Fluoro kV at 120 kV
or more if it is possible.
Mode” button and select the Fluoro Menu.
46 CA-1036R2
Calibration
Illustration 2-4
Fluoro Entrance Exposure Rate Test Set-up
DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE
ASSEMBLY
PROBE
SET AS CLOSE
AS POSSIBLE
USEFUL BEAM
30 cm
(12”)
LEAD APRON (BLOCKER)
IMAGE SYSTEM
OVERTABLE SOURCE
IMAGE SYSTEM
SPOT FILM DEVICE
USEFUL BEAM LEAD APRON (BLOCKER)
PROBE
TABLE TOP
DIAGNOSTIC
SOURCE
ASSEMBLY
UNDERTABLE SOURCE
CA-1036R2 47
Calibration
6. Select the maximum PPS and Non-ABC mode. Make a Fluoro exposure
at maximum kV that will be used in the system and measure the dose
applied, it should not be over the Rejection Limits for 10 R/min
(87 mGy/min) or 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) (refer to Table 2-2.).
In case that the value is not acquired, change the Fluoro Filament Setting
stored in E17 as required until it is correctly calibrated to that dose. Keep
in mind that radiation increases or decreases in accordance to value in
E17 is increased or decreased.
7. The mA values displayed during Fluoro exposures are stored in E25, E26
and E27 Memory Locations. The method used to obtain the Fluoro mA
values is to measure the average mA using a mA meter in Fluoro.
During Fluoro exposure, mA values are read directly with a mA Meter in

DC connected to the mA Test Points (banana plug connections) on the
HV Transformer. Only for this purpose, remove the link between the
banana plug connections on the HV Transformer.
Select the maximum PPS and Non-ABC mode. Make the following
Fluoro exposures:
G Make a Fluoro exposure at 50 kV and take note below the mA

reading, this value will be used as Fluoro mA at minimum kV (E25).

reading, this value will be used as Fluoro mA at medium kV (E26).

reading, this value will be used as Fluoro mA at maximum kV
(E27).
FL mA value at 50 kV FL mA value at 80 kV FL mA value at 120 kV

(E25) (E26) (E27)
8. Remove the Dosimeter and the Lead Apron (Blocker).
9. Exit from the “User Mode” screen by pressing “Manual Calibration”

button.
10. Select E19 Memory Location if it is required to reduce the value for the
maximum Fluoro kV in the installation.
11. Select the E25, E26 and E27 Memory Locations and store the respective
mA values noted before multiplied by 10 (a.e. if the mA value noted is
“3.2”, store the value “32” in the respective Memory Location).
12. Record the new values in the Data Book.
48 CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.8 ABC CALIBRATION
The purpose of the ABC System is to maintain an optimum constant Image

Tube Output Brightness by controlling the X-ray kV during Fluoro exams,
regardless of changes in the patient opacity viewed on the TV monitor.
The closed-loop ABC System can monitor the Image Tube Output Brightness
through two ways: Photomultiplier Tube or TV Camera.
2.8.1 ABC SYSTEM WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE
Note . This operation requires the AEC Control Board A3012--x6/x7/x9

(Digital version).
On this system the Photomultiplier current signal, which is proportional to the

Image Tube Output Brightness, is used as brightness signal “PT Input” for the
ABC circuitry of the Generator. (Refer to Illustration 2-5).
This analogic signal is converted to a voltage signal in the Photomultiplier

Amplifier Board and sent to a peak-detector in the AEC Control Board. The peak
signal obtained is then held through a “Sample and Hold” circuitry after a
synchronism pulse. The peak signal held is adapted to obtain finally the “ABC
IN” signal which is so the Photomultiplier signal-peak held between
synchronism pulses. This signal is then compared to a window reference.
Brightness error at the comparator output is sent as “kV Up” and “kV Down” to
the Generator where is used to drive the Fluoro kV control. The closed-loop
operation requires more or less brightness thru “kV Up” and “kV Down” demand
signals respectively. Patient Entrance Dose is automatically varied so that
optimum constant Image Tube Output Brightness is maintained.
CA-1036R2 49
Calibration
The optimum brightness level in ABC mode is set by adjusting Brightness

Control Resistor R13 on the AEC Control Board, which controls the output of
the Photomultiplier Tube High Voltage power supply on the Interface Control
Board (“PT CRL” plus 5 volts programs the output to be 0 volts, and 0 volts
programs the output to approximately --1200 volts). The window comparator
requires an input range from 0 to +10 VDC for the “ABC IN” (the optimum
brightness level will be achieved with a value between 5 and 7 VDC).
Illustration 2-5
ABC System for Photomultiplier Tube
PT SPLY
(Photomultiplier Voltage supply)
MONITOR
VIDEO
AEC CONTROL PCB

FL BUFFER
BRIGHT. LEVEL ADJ. PT CRL

CAMERA
U12
R13 U2
TV
I/V
PHOTOMULTIPLIER
CONVERTER
LIGHT
PEAK SAMPLE
U10 DETECT. &
PHOTOMULTIPLIER
BOARD (A3168--xx)
PT INPUT HOLD U8
(Brightness signal)
AMPLIFIER
WINDOW ADJ. WINDOW

COMPARATOR
R11 -- R14
IMAGE CONTROL CONSOLE

TUBE
KV UP & KV DWN
PATIENT
X-RAY TABLE
HV HT CONTROL PCB INTERFACE
TRANSFORMER CONTROL PCB
X-RAY TUBE
POWER MODULE
50 CA-1036R2
Calibration
Window reference could be adjusted first to set mid-way the brightness level
(+5 VDC), and second to increase or decrease the range of response and
sensitivity of the kV control to input variations (brightness changes). If oscillation
occurs during ABC fluoro exposure, increase the dead zone by adjusting
Resistors R11 and R14 on the AEC Control Board. (Refer to Illustration 2-6 for
ABC waveforms).
Illustration 2-6
ABC Waveforms in AEC Control Board
DWN PT reference (R11)

window reference
Brightness level
(Gain adj.)
ABC IN
(U8--8)
UP PT reference (R14)
High Logic
--kV Down (J1--19) Low
Logic
Command to drive
the fluoro kVp DOWN
--kV UP (J1--6)
Command to drive
the fluoro kVp UP
Adjust the ABC system for Photomultiplier Tube as follow:
1. Be sure that the Video System and the Image Intensifier are powered and
operating correctly.

Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly at the normal SID (1 meter), fully

open the Collimator Blades and align the Image Intensifier with the light
beam.
CA-1036R2 51
Calibration
3. Adjust TV Camera gain for 1 volt peak-to-peak composite video output.
4. Select the maximum PPS and Non-ABC mode.

Collimator Filter Holder.
6. Calculate the value of the optimum radiation (that will give optimum
brightness) usually is 2μR/frame at 9” FOV (for more information refer to
Image System documentation).
Examples:
For 25 frame/second optimum radiation is 3 mR/min.
2 μR/frame x 25 frame/s = 50 μR/s.
50 μR/s x 60 s/min = 3000 μR/min = 3 mR/min.
For 30 frame/second optimum radiation is 3.6 mR/min.
60 μR/s x 60 s/min = 3600 μR/min = 3.6 mR/min.
The optimum radiation value should be measured at Image Intensifier

Radiation Input. Intensifier grid should be removed, if it can not be
removed, this value should be multiplied by two or by the value specified
as Grid Absorption Factor.
7. Make a Fluoro exposure at 70 kV and measure the radiation. Optimum

radiation is obtained by modifying the Fluoro kV or the Copper thickness
in the Collimator Filter Holder. First modify the Fluoro kV, if it is more than
80 kV or less than 60 kV modify the Copper thickness in 0.1 mm (or
0.2 mm). Note the value of Fluoro KV and Copper thickness used to
obtain the optimum radiation.
Note . Radiation increases when kV is increased or Copper thickness is

reduced.
52 CA-1036R2
Calibration
8. Perform the following adjustments in the AEC Control Board:
a. Adjust R13 in order to obtain 6 VDC on TP3 (ABC IN).
b. Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.) and increase 2 kV and

check the increased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN) (if this value
has not been increased, increase 1 kV more). Note this value
(consider it as KV-DOWN-SEL).
c. Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.) and decrease 2 kV and

check the decreased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN) (if this value
has not been decreased, decrease 1 kV more). Note this value
(consider it as KV-UP-SEL).
d. Obtain in TP1 the same voltage noted as kV-DOWN-SEL

(DOWN PT) by adjusting the Potentiometer R11.
e. Obtain in TP2 the same voltage noted as kV-UP-SEL (UP PT) by

adjusting the Potentiometer R14.
9. Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.) and ABC mode.
10. Make a Fluoro exposure and check that the kV does not change.
11. Stop the Fluoro exposure and select 40 kV. Make a Fluoro exposure and
check that the kV value goes to 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.)
±2 kV without System problems.
12. Stop the Fluoro exposure and select 100 kV. Make a Fluoro exposure
and check that the kV value goes to 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.)
CA-1036R2 53
Calibration
2.8.2 ABC SYSTEM WITH TV CAMERA
The ABC can be performed with an Analogic Signal Output (ABC OUT)
proportional to the brightness or with the Composite Video Signal Output from
the TV Camera.
The “ABC OUT” signal from the TV Camera is compatible with the Generator
when the range is from 0 VDC (dark image) to 10 VDC (bright image) and the
Optimum Brightness is achieved at around 6 VDC.
When a TV Camera without a direct “ABC OUT” signal is used, the Composite
Video signal (which amplitude is proportional to the image tube output
brightness) is sent to an RF Adaptation Board where it is transformed into an
“ABC OUT” analogic signal. In this case, the brightness level is taken from a
rectangular window from the center of the raster. (Refer to Illustration 2-7).
This analogic signal in the AEC Control Board (“PT Input” in Board
A3012--x1/x2/x5 and “ABC OUT” in Board A3012--x6/x7/x9) is filtered, and
compared to a window reference. Brightness error at the comparator output is
sent as “kV Up” and “kV Down” to the Generator where is used to drive the fluoro
kV control. The closed-loop operation requires more or less brightness thru “kV
Up” and “kV Down” demand signals respectively. Patient entrance dose is
automatically varied so that constant image tube output brightness is
maintained.
Illustration 2-7
ABC System for TV Camera
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT

RF ADAPTATION BOARD
MONITOR
CAMERA
TV
AEC CONTROL PCB

WINDOW
PT INPUT COMPARATOR
(Brightness signal) ABC OUT FILTER
LIGHT
R5 -- C11 U8
WINDOW ADJ.
R11 -- R14
IMAGE CONTROL CONSOLE

TUBE
KV UP & KV DWN
PATIENT
X-RAY TABLE
HV HT CONTROL PCB
TRANSFORMER
X-RAY TUBE
POWER MODULE
54 CA-1036R2
Calibration
The optimum brightness level in ABC mode is set by adjusting the gain at R27
on the RF Adaptation Board. The “ABC OUT” signal requires an input range
from 0 to +10 VDC (the stabilized value will be between 5 and 7 VDC).
Window reference could be adjusted first to set mid-way the brightness level (+6
VDC), and second to increase or decrease the range of response and sensitivity
of the kV control to input variations (brightness changes). If oscillation occurs
during ABC fluoro exposure, increase the dead zone by adjusting R11 and R14
on the AEC Control Board. (Refer to Illustration 2-8 for ABC waveforms)
For system interface, refer to RF Adaptation Board. Adjust ABC System

according to the following procedures.
Illustration 2-8
ABC Waveforms in AEC Control Board
DWN PT reference (R11)

window reference
Brightness level
(Gain adj.)
ABC IN
(U8--8)
UP PT reference (R14)
High Logic
--kV Down (J1--19) Low
Logic
Command to drive
the fluoro kVp DOWN
--kV UP (J1--6)
Command to drive
the fluoro kVp UP
CA-1036R2 55
Calibration
2.8.2.1 ABC SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT WITH ABC SIGNAL FROM TV CAMERA COMPATIBLE WITH
THE GENERATOR


beam.
4. Set Jumper JP21 to position B on the RF Adaptation Board.

Examples:



56 CA-1036R2
Calibration


reduced.
9. Perform the adjustment for the window test as specified on the TV

Camera manuals. This window defines the area of the image where the
brightness will be captured for the ABC and it should be the 25% of the
image area.
10. Adjust the TV Camera to obtain +6 VDC (or the voltage supplied by the
TV Camera as optimum brightness) on TP3 (ABC IN) on the AEC Control
Board (Refer the TV Camera manuals).
a. Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and increase 2 kV and

b. Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and decrease 2 kV and

c. Obtain in TP1 the same voltage noted as kV-DOWN-SEL (DOWN

PT) by adjusting the Potentiometer R11.
d. Obtain in TP2 the same voltage noted as kV-UP-SEL (UP PT) by

12. Select the 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and ABC mode.
CA-1036R2 57
Calibration
2.8.2.2 ABC SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT WITH AN ABC SIGNAL FROM TV CAMERA NOT
COMPATIBLE WITH THE GENERATOR


beam.
4. Set on the RF Adaptation Board, Jumpers JP21 to position “A” and JP20
to position “B” (for negative ABC signal) or to position “C” (for positive
ABC signal).

Examples:



58 CA-1036R2
Calibration


reduced.
9. Perform the adjustment for the window test as specified on the TV

Camera manuals. This window defines the area of the image where the
brightness will be captured for the ABC and it should be the 25% of the
image area.
10. Select the 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and Non-ABC mode.
11. Adjust R29 (OFFSET) on the RF Adaptation Board to have 0 VDC in TP7.
12. Adjust gain at R27 (Gain) on the RF Adaptation Board to make the “ABC
OUT” signal equal to +6 VDC. Measure “ABC OUT” in TP-7 of RF
Adaptation Board or in TP3 (”ABC IN”) of the AEC Control Board.

check the increased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN). Note this
value (consider it as KV-DOWN-SEL).

check the decreased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN). Note this
value (consider it as KV-UP-SEL).


CA-1036R2 59
Calibration
2.8.2.3 ABC SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT WITH NO ABC SIGNAL FROM TV CAMERA


beam.
4. Set on the RF Adaptation Board, Jumpers JP21 to position “A” and JP20
to position “A”.

Examples:



60 CA-1036R2
Calibration


reduced.
9. Perform the adjustment for the window test. This window defines the
area of the image where the brightness will be captured for the ABC.
a. Calculate the image area πr2 (clear circle on the monitor). (r=circle
radius).
b. Calculate the 25% of the image area ( πr2/4).
c. Calculate the sides of the window: l = πr2∕4 (I= side of square).
d. Mark the calculated area on the monitor (square).
e. Position jumper JP18 of RF Adaptation Board in “A”. A window will

be displayed on the monitor.
f. Adjust in the RF Adaptation Board the following potentiometers to

move the window under the frame marked on the monitor in
step--d:
-- R1 potentiometer (vertical position)

-- R2 potentiometer (vertical width)
-- R3 potentiometer (horizontal position)
-- R4 potentiometer (horizontal width)
g. Once the window is configured, place JP18 in “B” again at RF

Adaptation Board.
10. Select the 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and Non-ABC mode.
11. Adjust the gain at R27 on the RF Adaptation Board to make the “ABC
OUT” signal equal to +6 VDC. Measure “ABC OUT” in TP7 of RF
Adaptation Board or in TP3 (”ABC IN”) of the AEC Control Board.
CA-1036R2 61
Calibration




62 CA-1036R2
Calibration
2.9 FINAL CHECKS
Verify that all Configuration and Calibration data have been properly stored in
memory.
1. Enter in calibration mode and check that the values noted for the
“Filament Current Numbers” and “Extended Memory Locations” tables
of the Data Book are the same that the values displayed and stored in
memory. Press the “Read” button to read the stored values.
2. Exit from calibration mode and Service mode.
3. Turn the Generator OFF and verify position of dip switches on the HT
Controller Board are:
G Dip switch 3000SW2-2 in “Off” position (enables Filament and

Rotor Interlocks).
G Dip switch 3000SW2-4 in “Off” position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
4. Set the Test dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in
“Off” position to place the Generator in normal operating mode.
CA-1036R2 63
Calibration
64 CA-1036R2
TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
with Low or High Speed Starter
Troubleshooting
REVISION HISTORY
0 JAN 24, 2000 First edition
2 NOV 1, 2000 New edition
3 FEB 17, 2005 New error codes and procedures
4 APR 15, 2005 New Battery Charger
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.
Note . Alert readers on pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent

TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Tools and Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 GENERAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 Low DC Voltage Power Supplies Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Microprocessors and General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3 Replacement of Memory in ATP Console CPU Board

and/or HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.4 Procedures Related to the Push-button Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2.4.1 APR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.4.2 APR Re-initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.4.3 APR Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.4.4 APR Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.5 Procedures Related to the Touch Screen Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.5.1 Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.5.2 Touch Screen Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.5.3 External Backup of the APR Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.6 Procedures Related to the Battery Powered Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.6.1 Battery Charger Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.6.2 Identifying and Replacing Defective Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.7 Procedures Related To the Capacitor Assisted Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.7.1 Procedure for Storage Capacitors Discharging and Voltage Testing . 23
3 SELF-DIAGNOSIS INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5 CENTRAL LISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.1 HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.1.1 HT Controller Board (A3000--10/20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.1.2 HT Controller Board (A3000--30/33/34/35/36 & so) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
TR-1005R4 i
Troubleshooting
Section Page
5.2 Filament Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.3 Interface Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.4 LVDC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.5 Charge/Discharge Monitor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.6 Locks Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.7 ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.8 Fluoro CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.9 Fluoro -- RF Adaptation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

5.9.1 RF Adaptation Board (A3514--03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.9.2 RF Adaptation Board (A3514--04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.10 AEC Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.10.1 AEC Control Board (A3012--01/02/05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.10.2 AEC Control Board (A3012--06/07/09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.11 AEC Adaptation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.12 LF-RAC Board (Low Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.13 LV-DRAC (High Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

5.13.1 Delayed Switch-off Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.13.2 Control DRAC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.13.3 Interface DRAC--HF Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.13.4 DRAC Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.14 Cabinet Miscellaneous for Line Powered Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.15 Boards Related to Battery Powered Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

5.15.1 Battery Charger Board (A3285--02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.15.2 Isolated Stand-Alone Control Board (A3138--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.15.3 Energy Guard Board (A3264--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.15.4 Line Monitor Board (A3139--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.16 Boards Related to Capacitor Assisted Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.16.1 Capacitor Charger Board (A3517--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.16.2 Line Selector Board (A3525--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.16.3 Line Selector Board (A3525--02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.16.4 Brake Board (A3567--01/02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
ii TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
The Generator contains many self-diagnostic routines which greatly facilitate

troubleshooting. Self-diagnostic functions require that all microprocessors
function correctly. Each microprocessor contains LEDs that indicate its correct
operation.
As a general rule, the first step in any troubleshooting procedure is to verify

correct Power Supply Voltages and perform a visual inspection of all Boards
and Cable connections.
On arrival in the X-ray Room, the Service Engineer should carry out the
following operations:
• If the Generator cannot be Powered up, run the troubleshooting for Error
Code E01.
• If the Generator can be Powered up:
G Check which Error Code is displayed on the Console and run the
troubleshooting routines for the last Error Code displayed.
G If it is not, try to reproduce the failure in the conditions reported by

the Operator. It is possible that the Error Code displayed is
different from either that indicated by the Operator. In all cases,
run the troubleshooting routines for the last Error Code displayed.
When any major component, such as a X-ray Tube,

HV Transformer or Circuit Board, is replaced in the system,
perform the respective Configuration and Calibration
procedures.
If the HT Controller Board or the ATP Console CPU Board are

Extended Memory data displayed on the Console with the
values noted in the Data Book.
If the HT Controller Board is replaced in the Power Module,

transfer U3-EEPROM from the old Board to the new Board.
U3-EEPROM contains calibration data and if U3-EEPROM is
not transferred a complete Calibration must be performed.

Update and record in the Data Book any new data entered in
the Extended Memory Locations.
TR-1005R4 1
Troubleshooting
1.1 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
• Standard service engineers tool kit.
• Configuration and Calibration test equipment (refer to Installation

document).
• Antistatic Kit.
• Oscilloscope (Tektronics 486 or similar).
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH

VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL
CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON
THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF,

IGBTS.


OF THE EQUIPMENT.
2 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR:

POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG.
WHEN IT DOES NOT WORK WITH STAND-ALONE, IT IS

POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED
IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE
UNIT IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED
ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON.
WHEN IT WORKS WITH OPTIONAL STAND-ALONE IT IS

POWERED ON IN ALL SITUATIONS. WHEN THE UNIT IS
TURNED ON, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE
TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON.
KEEP THE PROTECTION COVERS IN PLACE ALL THE TIME,

ONLY REMOVE THE COVERS TO PERFORM SERVICE
OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CONTACTOR 6K5, LINE
FUSES, BATTERY CHARGER BOARD, LINE MONITOR
BOARD, BATTERY MONITOR BOARD, ENERGY GUARD
BOARD AND STAND-ALONE BOARD) ARE PERMANENTLY
POWERED ON AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL
OF THE BATTERIES (APPROX. 400 VDC) ALTHOUGH THE
UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE
CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. USE CAUTION WHEN
WORKING IN THIS AREA.
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR:

POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG. IT IS POWERED ON
UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM
ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT IS
POWERED, THE NEON (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE

OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CAPACITOR OF HV
INVERTER, STORAGE CAPACITORS MODULE, LINE FUSES,
DC BUS FUSES, ETC.) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON
AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE
CAPACITORS (APPROX. 800 VDC), ALTHOUGH THE UNIT IS
DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL
CONSOLE IS OFF. USE CAUTION WHEN WORKING IN THIS
AREA.
TR-1005R4 3
Troubleshooting
4 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
SECTION 2 GENERAL PROCEDURES
2.1 LOW DC VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY TEST
The Generator operates from a Low DC Voltage Power Supply located in the
Front Panel (MOD. 3) of the Generator Cabinet. (Refer to Illustration 2-1).
Turn the Generator ON and with a Digital Multimeter measure between:
• P2-3 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage
at this point is +5 ±0.2 VDC. If required, adjust voltage with the +5 VDC
Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.
• P2-2 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage
at this point is +12 ±0.1 VDC. If required, adjust voltage with the
+12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.
• P2-1 (--) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage
at this point is --12 ±0.1 VDC (this voltage must be --12.7 ±0.1 VDC if
the Console is provided with a Graphic Display). If required, adjust
voltage with the --12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power
Supply Board.
Illustration 2-1
Power Supply in the Front Panel
R26 R25
ADJ. +12 VDC ADJ. --12 VDC
R12
ADJ. +5 VDC
POWER SUPPLY BOARD
TR-1005R4 5
Troubleshooting
The ATP Console CPU Board operates from a 12 VDC Non-Regulated Supply
located in the Generator Cabinet that supplies to a 5 VDC Switching Regulator
located in the ATP Console CPU Board.
Turn the Generator ON and with a Digital Multimeter measure between:
• TS1-30 (GND) and TS1-29 (+12 V Unr.) on the Generator Cabinet.

Check that the voltage at this point is +12 ±1.5 VDC.
• TP GND and TP +5 on the ATP Console CPU Board. Check that the
voltage at this point is +5 ±0.2 VDC.
Note . No adjustments are required for both voltage measures. The ATP
Console CPU Board may be located inside the Console or inside
2.2 MICROPROCESSORS AND GENERAL OPERATION
The following LEDs indicate the proper operation of each Microprocessor in the
Generator:
• The LED DS1 located on the HT Controller Board blinks fast during
power up, then slows to a steady blink of about 2 per second, indicating
that the Microprocessor U5 is operating normally.
• The LED DS2 located on the ATP Console CPU Board normally blinks
at the same rate as LED DS1 on the HT Controller Board, indicating that
the Console Microprocessor U30 is operating correctly.
• The LED DS1 located on the Fluoro CPU Board only blinks in Fluoro
mode indicating that the Fluoro Microprocessor is operating correctly.
Also observe the following LEDs to facilitate general troubleshooting:
• When LED DS1 located on the Interface Control Board is ON (lighting),

it indicates that the Generator is ON.
• The LED DS1 located on the ATP Console CPU Board is normally ON
(lighting), indicating that the Watch-Dog Timer of the Console is
operating and insuring the correct timing of data communications with
the HT Controller Board.
6 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
2.3 REPLACEMENT OF MEMORY IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND/OR

HT CONTROLLER BOARD
Before starting up the system, you have to set ON the switch A3024SW2--3 at
the ATP Console CPU Board to enable Service Mode. A few seconds after
pressing the ON button on the Console, you will see E10 (this is shown because
the EPROM U24 has been replaced).
Reset the error indication by pressing the respective button on the Console and
keep it pressed until the Error 10 disappears.
After this, the normal start up will take place.
We recommend setting this switch back to OFF once the installation has been
completed. This will not enable the operator to enter in Configuration or in
Calibration Mode (Service Modes).
2.4 PROCEDURES RELATED TO THE PUSH-BUTTON CONSOLES
2.4.1 APR OPERATION
APR techniques are factory pre-programmed to standard techniques sets. All

parameters of APR techniques may be manually rewritten as required by the
operator and stored in the ”APR working file” for later use (refer to the respective
Operator Manual).
Note . This section only applies to Consoles equipped with Anatomical

Programmer (APR).
Illustration 2-2
APR Module version in Push-buttons Consoles
1 2 3 4
1 5
2 6
Display APR Display APR
3 7
4 8
5 6 7 8
TR-1005R4 7
Troubleshooting
2.4.2 APR RE-INITIALIZATION
The APR re-initialization makes a new copy of the factory pre-programmed

parameters of the APR techniques in the U23-NVRAM of the ATP Console CPU
Board.
APR re-initialization set the APR techniques only for the selected workstation.
To re-initialize the APR techniques, exit the APR mode and press
simultaneously the push-buttons 5-6-7-8 on the APR module. (Refer to
Illustration 2-2).
The APR re-initialization deletes all the APR parameters and

related selections previously modified and stored by the
operator for both X-ray Tubes.
2.4.3 APR BACKUP
The APR backup makes a copy of the parameters and selections of the APR
techniques stored in the U23-NVRAM to the U18-E2PROM of the ATP Console
CPU Board. This action make a copy of all the APR techniques stored in the
“APR working file” to the “APR backup file” .
The APR backup is automatically performed when the equipment is turned

OFF/ON, whenever any APR technique has been modified and stored in the
U23-NVRAM by the operator.
To backup the APR techniques, exit the APR mode and press simultaneously
push-buttons 1-5-6 of the APR module. (Refer to Illustration 2-2).
2.4.4 APR RESTORE
The APR Restore makes a copy of the parameters and selections of the APR
techniques stored in the U18-E2PROM to the U23-NVRAM of the ATP Console
CPU Board. This action replaces the data stored in the “APR working file” by
the data stored in the “APR backup file” for all the APR techniques.
The APR Restore is automatically performed when the Console is turned

OFF-ON, whenever any problem had been detected during the U23-NVRAM
checksum.
To restore the APR techniques, turn the Console ON and with the APR mode
OFF press simultaneously the push-buttons 4-7-8 of the APR module. (Refer
to Illustration 2-2).
8 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
2.5 PROCEDURES RELATED TO THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSES ACTIONS
Malfunction of the Power-ON button. Check if the button works properly.
Check that all the internal cable are

Cable connection or cable status.
connected. (A7031--xx Cable)
Generator / Console is not connected to

Power ON the Generator / Console.
mains.
The Console and the Generator
do not start up. Check all the power connectors from/to the
power supply (power values are +5V and
+12V).
Power Supply does not work properly.
Check the power input selector, change the
power supply (Kit Power Supply) if the
selector is wrong.
Connect again this cable.
The Console starts but the Check all the cables to the board. If the
Cable A7067--xx is not properly connected
Generator do not start. problem persist, change the A3515--02
board (you should also check the
connection to the Generator)
BIOS error. If there is a problem with the Disconnect the power connector. Wait ten
video chipset the beep code will consist of a seconds and connect it again. Push the
single long beep followed by three short power button and if the problem persists,
beeps replace the mainboard.
The Console beeps before start.
BIOS error. If there is a problem with the Check that the DRAM is connected right. If
DRAM, the beep code will consist of a single so, try to reboot the system, and if the
long beep repeatedly. problem persists, replace the mainboard.
First check that the fans are working. If so,

check that cable 55001042 is right
The TFT inverter is not working properly.
connected. Replace the inverter if the
problem persists.
There is no image on the screen. Try to move the cable. If the screen
Cable 55001042 is broken. suddenly bright, replace Kit TFT Screen
TPC 12”.
Replace the mainboard. If the problem

Mainboard is broken.
persists, replace the whole Console.
The operator application is not The operating system is not working

Replace the Compact Flash Card.
launched properly.
Check the power cable. If it is broken,

Power cable is broken
replace the power supply
Upper fans are stopped
Fan broken Change the kit fans Console
Calibration error of the touch panel controller Check the calibration process.
Check that there is a blinking led in the

Touch panel. If you push a button, controller. If not, check the power supply.
and nothing happens, or another If it is correct, replace the Controller.
button is selected Touch panel controller is broken. When the panel is pushed, the led is on
continuously. If not, replace the kit TFT
Screen TPC 12”. If the problem persists,
replace the Kit PC GESPAC.
TR-1005R4 9
Troubleshooting
2.5.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE
If the Touch Screen Application is provided with a “Software Upgrade” button

on the Service Mode Menu, it is used to close the Application Program without
turning OFF the System. After pressing this button, the Console shows the PC
Desktop to enable the Application Software Upgrade, Language Configuration
of the PC Operating System or Touch Screen Sensor Calibration.
Note . To perform any of these operations, it is necessary to connect a

Keyboard to the connector labelled “Kb” on the back side of the
Touch Screen Console.
Please, make sure that the Keyboard connector is suitable

(MiniDin type).
2.5.2 TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR CALIBRATION
If required to calibrate the Sensor of the Touch Screen because the buttons can
not be properly selected or because the Compact Flash has been changed,
perform the next procedure:
1. Enter in “Service Mode” and press the “Software Upgrade” button.
2. On the PC Desktop, press the“Start--Windows” button on the keyboard

connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select: “Programs / UPDD
/ Calibrate”.
3. Execute the “Calibrate” program and follow the process clicking on the
indicated places.
4. When finish this calibration, come back to the Application by entering

again in “Start” and select: “Programs / Start up (select the first one) /
Console”.
10 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
2.5.3 EXTERNAL BACKUP OF THE APR TECHNIQUES
1. Connect a Laptop (PC) to the Touch Screen Console with a serial cable
(DB9 with female pins on both ends; on one end Pin 2 connected with
Pin 3; on the other end Pin 2 connected with Pin3; Pin 5 connected with
Pin 5). Connect the serial cable to port “COM4” of the Touch Screen
Console and any free port on the Laptop (PC).
2. On the Laptop (PC):
a. Select: “StartMenu / Programs / Accessories / Communications

/ Hyperterminal / hypertrm.exe”.
b. Once the Hyperterminal is opened on the Laptop (PC), configure

the connection. For that select on the Menu bar:
File --> Properties --> Connect using: COM * (selected free port)
Configure --> Bits per second: 115200

Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
StopBits: 1
Flow Control: None
c. Then press “OK” and “OK”.
d. Select on the Menu bar: Transfer --> Receive File
on this window select:
Place received file in the following folder:

(choose a folder in the Laptop)
Use receiving protocol:

Xmodem
e. Let that window open without pressing “Receive”, by the moment.
3. On the Touch Screen Console:
a. Enter in “Service Mode” and press the “Software Upgrade” button.
b. Press the “Start--Windows” button on the keyboard connected to

the Touch Screen Console, then select: “Programs / accessories
/ hyperterminal / PORT4.ht”.
TR-1005R4 11
Troubleshooting
c. Once the Hyperterminal is opened on the Touch Screen Console,

configure the connection. For that select on the Menu bar:
File --> Properties --> Connect using: COM4
Configure --> Bits per second: 115200

Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
StopBits: 1
Flow Control: None
d. Then press “OK” and “OK”.
e. Select on the Menu bar: Transfer --> Send File
on this window select:
Filename:
C:\ program files\Rad_Console (this name can be different)
\APR_English.ini (or APR_French.ini, or APR_Spanish.ini,
or APR_German.ini, or APR_Italian.ini, or
APR_Portuguese.ini, according to the APR language
previously selected on the Settings / Settings Menu.)
Use sending protocol:

Xmodem
f. Let that window open without pressing “Send”, by the moment.
4. Press “Reveice” on the Laptop (PC) window. It will ask for the name to
save the file: Type “APR_English.ini” (or APR_French.ini, or
APR_Spanish.ini, or APR_German.ini, or APR_Italian.ini, or
APR_Portuguese.ini, according to the APR language previously
selected on the Settings / Settings Menu.)
5. Press “Send” on the Touch Screen window.
6. Wait until the transference is complete (this can take a few minutes)
7. When the transference is complete, close the Hyperterminal application

in the Laptop and Touch Screen Console. Disconnect the serial cable.
8. On the Touch Screen, press the“Start--Windows” button on the keyboard

and select: “Programs / Start up (select the first one) / Console”, to come
back to the Application.
12 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
SECTION 3 SELF-DIAGNOSIS INDICATORS
Some Console are provided with Self-Diagnosis indicators that identify a

malfunction in the system alerting operator about error existence that inhibits
exposure. During normal operation of the system, these indicators are directly
shown on the Console (depending on the Console model they can be shown
on the APR Display, Console Indicators, Warning Messages Area, etc).
DOOR OPEN: Indicates the X-ray room door is open when the X-ray equipment
is in use. (Also refer to Error Code “E35”).
DOOR
GENERATOR OVERLOAD: Indicates that the exposure has been interrupted

because during exposure has been produced arcing or bad function on the HV
G.OVL
circuitry (X-ray Tube, HV Transformer and/or HV Cables) or a failure of IGBT
module (overheated or defective IGBTs) has been detected. (Also refer to Error
Code “E09”).
It can be also shown making a high power and long exposure with the X-ray tube
cool (X-ray Tube has not been warmed-up).
TUBE OVERLOAD: Indicates that either the technique selected is beyond the
X-ray tube ratings or the present conditions of the X-ray tube inhibit the
T.OVL exposure (anode overheated). Parameters for next exposure may be
temporally limited by the Generator (change the exposure values or wait for the
X-ray tube to cool). (Also refer to Error Code “E37”).
Check that heat units available are lower than the calculated for the next
exposure. Reduce exposure factors or wait for the X-ray tube to cool.
ROTOR ERROR: Indicates that the X-ray tube anode is not rotating while
“Prep” is active, then exposures are inhibited. (Also refer to Error Code “E18”).
ROTOR
HEAT: Indicates that the X-ray Tube thermostat / pressurestat is open due to
overheating of the tube housing (housing is too hot, wait for the housing to cool)
HEAT or to a thermostat / pressurestat mal-function (housing is cool). Heat units may
raise to any value. (Also refer to Error Code “E36”).
TR-1005R4 25
Troubleshooting
TECHNIQUE ERROR: If it activates during exposure it means that:
TECH
The exposure has been interrupted by the “Security Timer”

because of a system failure. Call Field Service. (Also refer
to Error Code “E34”).
This error can also be shown:

• after an APR technique selection to advise that exposure parameters
displayed on the Console are not the values stored for this APR
technique. Exposure parameters are adapted by the Generator to
another enable values. (Also refer to Error Code “E34”).
• after the “ABC” selection, when ABC is not enable. (Also refer to Error
Code “E34”).
• if a failure on the Automatic Collimator has been detected (blades are full
open or in movement during exposure, etc.). In this case the indicator
light will blink. (Also refer to Error Code “E48”).
26 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
SECTION 4 ERROR CODES
ERROR CODE LIST

ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION
“ -- -- -- -- -- -- ” SYSTEM FAILURE. FATAL ERROR.
FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE.

E01
NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN HT CONTROLLER BOARD AND ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD.
FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. RAD GENERATOR CONFIGURED AS R&F GENERATOR.

E02
NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND FLUORO CPU BOARD.
E03 FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. ALL WORKSTATIONS ARE UNCONFIGURED.
E04 “PREP” SIGNAL RECEIVED WITHOUT CONSOLE ORDER.
E05 “FLUORO” SIGNAL ACTIVE WITHOUT REQUEST.
E06 “PREP” OR/AND “EXPOSURE” ORDERS ACTIVATED DURING POWER UP ROUTINE.
E07 WRONG DATA FOR X-RAY TUBE-2.
E08 WRONG DATA FOR X-RAY TUBE-1.
E09 GENERATOR OVERLOAD. ARCING OR IGBT FAULT.
EEPROM CORRUPTED OR NO INITIALIZED IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD OR IN HT CONTROLLER

E10
BOARD. WRONG DATA CALIBRATION.
E11 NO VOLTAGE IN CAPACITOR BANK.
E12 NO mA DURING EXPOSURE OR mA OUT OF TOLERANCE. WRONG FILAMENT CURRENT.
E13 NO kVp DURING EXPOSURE OR kVp OUT OF TOLERANCE.
E14 EXPOSURE SIGNAL WITHOUT X-RAY EXPOSURE CONSOLE COMMAND.
E15 NO CURRENT ON FILAMENT. WRONG SELECTION OF FOCAL SPOT DETECTED DURING “PREP”.
E16 INVALID VALUE OF: kVp, mA OR kW.
E17 COMMUNICATION ERROR BETWEEN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND HT CONTROLLER BOARD.
E18 ROTOR RUNNING WITHOUT ORDER OR ROTOR ERROR.
E19 mA DETECTED WITHOUT “EXPOSURE” ORDER.
E20 kVp DETECTED WITHOUT “EXPOSURE” ORDER.
E21 WRONG TUBE-1 SELECTION.
E22 WRONG TUBE-2 SELECTION.
E23 CALIBRATION DATA NOT STORED.
E24 THE BUCKY HAS NOT BEEN DETECTED TO BE MOVING.
E25 BATTERY FAILURE IN BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS.
E26 VOLTAGE FAILURE IN BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS WITH STAND-ALONE.
E27 FAILURE IN CONSOLE EPROM. BAD CHECKSUM.
TR-1005R4 27
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE LIST

E29 ALL CLEAR SIGNAL NOT ACTIVE -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E30 RELAY K1 NOT ACTIVE -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E31 LONG EXPOSITION IS NOT INITIATED -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E32 LONG EXPOSITION IS NOT CUT AFTER 3.2 SECONDS -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E33 NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN GENERATOR AND SERIAL CONSOLE OR PC UNIT.
E34 TECHNIQUE ERROR.
E35 DOOR OPEN.
E36 HEAT UNITS. OVERHEATING.
E37 TUBE OVERLOAD.
E41 DOSIMETER -- COMMUNICATION FAILURE BETWEEN TUBE-1 DOSIMETER AND GENERATOR.
E42 DOSIMETER -- AUTOTEST ERROR ON TUBE-1 DOSIMETER.
E43 DOSIMETER -- TUBE-1 ION CHAMBER STATUS CHECK ERROR.
E44 DOSIMETER -- COMMUNICATION FAILURE BETWEEN TUBE-2 DOSIMETER AND GENERATOR.
E45 DOSIMETER -- AUTOTEST ERROR ON TUBE-2 DOSIMETER.
E46 DOSIMETER -- TUBE-2 ION CHAMBER STATUS CHECK ERROR.
E47 CAPACITOR ASSITED GENERATOR -- CAPACITOR NOT CHARGED WHEN “PREP”.
E48 COLLIMATOR ERROR.
E49 EXPOSURE CYCLE ERROR.
E50 INTERRUPTED EXPOSURE.
E51 DRAC -- CHECKSUM FAILURE OR EPROM CORRUPTED.
E52 DRAC -- MICROCONTROLLER RAM FAILURE.
E53 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT DC BUS VOLTAGE AT LOW LEVEL VOLTAGE (220 VAC).
E54 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT DC BUS VOLTAGE AT HIGH LEVEL VOLTAGE (480 VAC).
E55 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE DC BUS VOLTAGE AT HIGH LEVEL VOLTAGE (480 VAC OR 380 VAC).
E56 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE REFERENCE VOLTAGE.
E58 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E59 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E60 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E61 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E62 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
E63 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
E64 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
E65 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
28 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE LIST

E66 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E67 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E68 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E69 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E70 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E71 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E72 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E73 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E74 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E75 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E76 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E77 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E78 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E79 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E80 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E81 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E82 DRAC -- WRONG X-RAY TUBE SELECTION.
E83 DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN DC BRAKE.
E84 DRAC -- INCORRECT TUBE SELECTION SIGNAL.
E87 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM
E88 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE RUNNING AT 3300 RPM
E89 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM
E90 DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE RUNNING AT 10000 RPM
E91 DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT IPRINC (CH2)
E92 DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT IAUX (CH3)
E93 DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT ICOM (CH4)
E95 RAPID TERMINATION
E96 CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR -- VOLTAGE MISSING
E97 CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR -- VOLTAGE IN CAPACITORS NOT BALANCED
DIP SWITCH 3024SW2-3 IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD SET FOR CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
E98
MODE ACTIVE (SERVICE MODE).
TR-1005R4 29
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : “-- - - - - - ”
DESCRIPTION : System failure.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal error. Generator must be switched off.
APPLICABLE TO : All Generators
APPEARS WHEN : This indication may appear at any time together with another Error Code on the Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed.
ACTIONS
1. Turn the Generator OFF, wait a few seconds and turn it ON.
ERROR CODE : E01
DESCRIPTION : Failure in power up routine.

No communication between HT Controller Board and ATP Console CPU Board.
ERROR TYPE : Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up.
APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase. If it appears during normal functioning of equipment, it means that
a problem has caused a power off in the Console.
It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT
Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures.
If Led 1 of the HT Controller remains lit, it means that HT Controller has not been started.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Console has been suddenly switched OFF by operator or by a shut-off on the line.
The Microprocessor U5 on the HT Controller Board has not started-up.
The communication between ATP Console Board and HT Controller Board is not reliable.
ACTIONS
1. Check DC supplies.
2. Check the software version in case of update or change the ATP Console or HT Controller
Boards. Check and replace if necessary U5 in HT Controller and U24 on ATP Console Board.
3. Check continuity between terminals 2, 3, 5 and 6 on J3 of ATP Console Board and P1-4, P1-11,
P1-15, P1-10 of HT Controller Board. Check with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator.
4. Switch OFF, wait a few seconds and switch ON again to reset the Error Code.
5. If not fixed after previous steps, check Led DS1 in HT Controller Board when powering the
equipment, if it has not turned off, replace HT Controller Board.
6. If Led DS1 is off, check with an oscilloscope the following signals: HT-C CLK, HT-C DAT,
C-HT CLK and C-HT DAT in order to find a possible defective component at any of both Boards
(HT Controller and ATP Console). Replace the Board where the defective component is found.
30 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E02
DESCRIPTION : Failure in power up routine. RAD Generator configured as R&F Generator.

No communication between ATP Console CPU Board and Fluoro CPU Board.
APPLICABLE TO : R&F Generators or Generators configured by mistake as R&F.
It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and Fluoro CPU
Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
A RAD Generator has been configured by mistake as a R&F Generator. See Configuration Section.
The communication between ATP Console Board and Fluoro CPU Board is not reliable.
The Fluoro CPU Board does not work properly.
ACTIONS
1. Check Communication Cable between J4 of ATP Console and J4 of Fluoro CPU Boards.
2. Check and replace if necessary U12 in Fluoro CPU Board.
3. If Fluoro values are not displayed on the Console, check DC supplies and Fluoro CPU Board.
Replace Fluoro CPU Board if necessary.
ERROR CODE : E03
DESCRIPTION : Failure in power up routine. All workstation are unconfigured.

APPLICABLE TO : All Generators.
Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
All workstations have been configured as tube=0.
The EEPROM (U18) in ATP Console Board is defective.
The ATP Console Board is not able to communicate with U18.
ACTIONS
1. Configure the workstations as referred in Service Manual.
2. Change U18 and configure the workstations as referred in Service Manual.
3. If not fixed after previous steps, replace ATP Console Board and configure the workstations.
TR-1005R4 31
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E04
DESCRIPTION : “Prep” signal received without Console order.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment once initialization phase is over.
Controller Boards.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Generator receives the “Prep” signal without a Console command.
ACTIONS
1. Check continuity between P1-3 in HT Controller Board and J3-4 in ATP Console Board. Check
with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator.
2. If all is correct, check signal from P1-3 to U5 in HT Controller Board.
3. If the signal is OK, replace HT Controller Board.
ERROR CODE : E05
DESCRIPTION : “Fluoro” signal active without request.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal error. Generator can not continue with Power up.
APPLICABLE TO : R&F Generators or Generators configured by mistake as R&F.
APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase.
It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and Fluoro CPU
Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Generator receives the “Fluoro” signal without Console command.
“Exp” has been pressed in a Workstation not configured for standard R&F.
ACTIONS
1. Check an unwilling press on the Fluoro pedal.
2. If not the case, check continuity between TS1-37 and J2-17 in ATP Console Board.
3. Then, check signal -FL EXP in ATP Console Board.
4. If the Signal is OK, replace the ATP Console Board.
32 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E06
DESCRIPTION : “Prep” or/and “Exposure” orders activated during power-up routine.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment once initialization phase is over.
Controller Boards.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Generator has been detected “Prep” or “Exposure” signals during initialization.
ACTIONS
1. In Generators equipped with “Prep” and “Exposure” keys on the Console, check that not object
is activating the function. Also check for possible damages on keys.
2. Check damages on flat cable with connector J9.
3. In Generators with external Handswitch, check contacts, cable and connectors.
4. If the error remains, check continuity between TS1-37 and J2-17 in ATP Console Board and
TS1-36 and J2-4 also in ATP Console Board.
5. If not solved yet, replace the ATP Console Board.
ERROR CODE : E07
DESCRIPTION : Wrong data for X-ray Tube-2.

Controller Boards during power ON.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong configuration of X-ray Tube-2.
Corrupted calibration data.
Data on Extended Memory Location E18 are larger than the maximum allowed.
ACTIONS
1. Check data in Extended Memory Location E18.
2. If it is OK, replace U3 in HT Controller Board.
TR-1005R4 33
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E08
DESCRIPTION : Wrong data for X-ray Tube-1.

Controller Boards during power ON.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong configuration of X-ray Tube-1.
Corrupted calibration data.
Data on Extended Memory Location E02 are larger than the maximum allowed.
ACTIONS
1. Check data in Extended Memory Location E02.
2. If it is OK, replace U3 in HT Controller Board.
ERROR CODE : E09 - GENERATOR OVERLOAD
DESCRIPTION : Generator overload. Arcing or IGBT fault.

ERROR TYPE : Informative.
APPEARS WHEN : During the exposure and In Stand-by,
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This error may appear at the Console as “E09” Error Code or as a “Generator Overload”
indication.
During exposure an over current on the IGBT‘s of the HV Inverter Module has been detected. This
may be produced by and arc or mal-function on the HV Circuitry.
In stand-by, the Console is continuously displaying “E09” or “Generator Overload” due to a defective
or overheated IGBTs Module.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Symptom-1:
G Defective X-ray Tube.
G Defective HV Transformer or HV Cable.
G Defective IGBT module.
G Defective HT Controller.
Symptom-2:
G Extremely high Duty Cycle on Rad and Fluoro operation.
34 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ACTIONS
A. PRELIMINARY
1. Select minimum kVp , minimum mA, and 80 ms (for example 40 kVp, 10mA, and 80 ms). Make
preparation and check that anode rotates in the X-ray Tube. If the anode is not rotating correctly,
check the starter and the Stator connections.
2. In case the anode is rotating correctly, make an exposure:

G If “09” or “Generator Overload” appears follow procedure in paragraph B (Inverter Module
Test).
G If not, follow step-3.
3. Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select the same mA and time. Make an exposure:
G If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears, or the exposure is cut before 80 ms, then follow
procedure in paragraph C (HV Transformer Test).
G If not, keep on increasing the kVp in 10 kVp steps (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and 125
kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp for 150 kVp HV Transformers)
making Exposures at each kVp selected.
-- If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears or the exposure is cut before 80 ms at any
kVp selected, follow procedure in paragraph C (HV Transformer Test).
-- If “E09” or “Generator Overload” has not appeared at the maximum kVp or the
exposure was not cut before 80 ms , it means that HV Transformer and HV Cables are
OK. Then follow the procedure in paragraph E. In this case high mA causes E09 or
“Generator Overload”.
B. INVERTER MODULE TEST
1. Power off Generator and mains.
2. Remove the cover from the Generator Cabinet.
3. Wait for the DC Bus of the Inverter to be fully discharged. When it is fully discharged the Leds
on the Charge-Discharge Monitor Board will be completely turned off.
4. When Leds are off make a jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC--BUS--. Make sure that there is
less than 10 VDC across the BUS. (Refer to Illustration 4-1 to see where to make the jumper).
5. Measure with a Multimeter in Diode (or ohms) between C2E1 (positive polarity) and E2 or C1
(negative polarity) in both IGBTs (refer to Illustration 4-1 for more details). Repeat the measure
with different polarity between C2E1 (negative polarity) and E2 or C1 (positive polarity).
Voltage should be around 0.3 V (or the resistance must be a high impedance) for the IGBT to
be OK. Normally when an IGBT is broken the voltage is = 0 volts (or the resistance is zero Ohms)
or very close.
TR-1005R4 35
Troubleshooting
Illustration 4-1
Jumper and Measurement Points
Jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC-BUS-- E2 C2E1
3-- PHASE LINE POWERED GENERATOR
Jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC-BUS-- E2 C2E1
1-- PHASE LINE POWERED GENERATOR, BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR OR CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR
36 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
6. Repeat the measurements done in point 5 for the other IGBT.
Note . Don’t forget to remove the jumper across the DC Bus after all measurements are
made, otherwise the Inverter will suffer serious damage.
7. If any of the IGBTs are short-circuited, replace the IGBT.
8. If both IGBTs are OK, remove both shielded cable that connect the Inverter to the HV
Transformer: P1, P3 and SHLD (P2) . Isolate the three wires completely from each other and
from the metal sheet or ground. Make sure that wires are perfectly isolated and that no
short-circuit is made otherwise serious damages could be produced.
9. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2--2 in ON position at the HT Controller Board.
10. Turn ON mains and Generator.
11. Make an exposure:

G If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appear or the exposure has not been cut before 80ms,
change (if possible) the whole Inverter. If it is not possible check capacitor C9 and choke
L1 of the inverter (normally placed at the backside of the inverter). If both seem OK, change
both IGBTS and IPM Drivers (Do not forget to re--connect both shielded cables to the HV
Transformer (P1, P2 and P3).
G If “E09” or “Generator Overload“ does not appear and the exposure has not been cut before
80 ms, re--connect both shielded cables to the H. Voltage Transformer (P1, P2 and P3).
Follow the procedure in paragraph C (High Voltage Transformer Test).
Note . At the end of an Exposure and right after releasing the Handswitch, error “E13” is
shown on the Console (this is normal, reset and continue).
12. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2-2 in OFF position at the HT Controller Board. Re-connect both
shielded cables that connect the Inverter to the HV Transformer P1, P3 and SHLD (P2).
TR-1005R4 37
Troubleshooting
Illustration 4-2
Flowchart for B: Inverter Module Test
TURN OFF GENERATOR

WAIT TILL INVERTER IS DISCHARGED
MAKE A JUMPER DC--BUS+ AND DC--BUS--
MEASURE AND CHECK
NO
V¶ 0,3V REPLACE IGBT
YES
REMOVE JUMPER DC--BUS

REMOVE SHIELDED CABLES THAT CONNECT
INVERTER TO THE HV TRANSFORMER
SET 3000SW2-2=ON
TURN ON GENERATOR & MAKE EXPOSURE
E09 OR NO
RE--CONNECT H V TRANSFORMER AND IN-
EXPOSITION CUT ?
VERTER PERFORM C:HV TRANSFORMER TEST
YES
REPLACE INVERTER
38 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
C. HV TRANSFORMER TEST
1. Connect the scope as follows:

G CH.1 on + mA (TP14) on HT Controller Board.
G CH.2 on - mA (TP13) on HT Controller Board.
G Base Time in 10 ms per division and 1 V per division
2. Turn ON mains and Generator. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2-4 in ON position at the HV Controller
Board. Select 50 kVp, 25 mA and 50 ms.
3. Make an exposure and check that both waveforms are almost symmetric (a difference of ±10%
is normal).
G If it is OK, follow procedure in step-4.
G If it is not OK, check:
-- that in the mA test point of the HV Transformer the jumper is securely placed and
tighten.
-- that connector J1 is well placed and tighten in the HV Transformer.
-- continuity between J1-D and P4-7, J1-E and P4-6, J1-B and P4-2, and J1-C and P4-1.
Check that they are well connected and tighten.
-- if after these actions the waveform is not OK, replace HV Transformer.
4. Turn OFF Generator and mains.
5. Remove HV Cables from the HV Transformer (anode and cathode) and fill the HV Receptacles
with oil.
6. On the HT Controller Board, make a jumper FIL (TP8) and + 5 V (TP2).
7. Turn ON mains and Generator. Select 50 kVp, 50 mA and 50 ms.
8. Connect the scope as following:

G CH.1 on + kV (TP11) on HT Controller Board.
G CH.2 on --kV (TP12) on HT Controller Board.
G Base time in 10 msec. per division and 2 V per division.
9. Make an Exposure and check that both waveforms are symmetric.
10. Make exposures from 50 kVp to 110 kVp with the same Exposure Time and check that all kVp
waveform are symmetric and the values are similar according the table below.
TP11 & TP12

Select on the HT Controller
(Compact Generators)
50 kVp 2.1 V
70 kVp 2.9 V
90 kVp 3.7 V
110 kVp 4.5 V
130 kVp (only for 150 kVp HV Transf.) 5.3 V
TR-1005R4 39
Troubleshooting
11. Select the maximum kVp allowed (depending of the tube type) and maximum Exposure Time
allowed but NEVER go over than 110--130 kVp. Make several Exposures and check that
waveforms are correct. If the waveforms are not symmetric within ± 10% at any point, replace
the HV Transformer.
12. Repeat the above procedure for the X-ray Tube-2 if the installation has two tubes.
13. If everything is OK, it means that HV Transformer is OK and the problem could be in X-ray Tube
or in the HV Cables. To know when the Tube begins to arc follow procedure in parragraph D.
In any case, X-ray Tube must be replaced.
14. Set in the HT Controller Dip-switch SW2 position 4 in OFF and remove jumper between FIL (TP8)
and + 5 V (TP2).
D. X-RAY TUBE TEST
Although after the performance of the above referred test everything is found OK, the Service
Engineer may want to know the actual status of the tube. Perform the following procedure in order to
determine the point in which the X-ray Tube begins to arc, it is strongly recommended to replace the
tube as soon as possible to prevent potential damage to the Generator.
1. Select minimum kVp and minimum mA and 100 ms.
2. Make an exposure.
3. Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select same mA and time. Make an exposure.
G If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears follow procedure in step C.1 (HV Transformer
Test).
G If not, keep on incrementing the kVp in steps of 10 kVp (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and
125 kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp HV Transformers) making
exposures at each kVp selected.
-- If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears at any kVp selected it means that the tube
has dielectric problems above the selected kVp.
• If “E09” or “Generator Overload” does not appear up to maximum kVp, it means that arcing may
be due to mA or kW, follow procedure in step-4.
4. Select minimum kVp and minimum mA. Increment the mA one station and make an Exposure.
Keep on incrementing the mA station (making exposures) until “E09” or “Generator Overload”
appears. This will give an idea of the maximum mA allowed by the tube without arcing. If “E09”
or “Generator Overload” does not appear follow step-5.
5. If still the tube does not arc, the problem is related to kW=KV*mA. Make selections on the
Console at 100 ms incrementing kV and mA. A point will be reached in which “E09” or “Generator
Overload” will appear. This will give an idea on the approximate value of kVp and mA that can
be handled by the X-ray Tube. Anyway, this value may change when the tube heats up.
E. RANDOM “E09” OR “GENERATOR OVERLOAD”
If everything is OK and random “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears, check:

1. That the signal IGBT FAULT on pin 3 of P5 on the HT Controller Board is not low (logic 0) in
stand-by and during the exposure. If there is noise, check loose connection between pin 3 of
P5 on HT Controller Board, and pin 4 of J2 in both IPM Driver Boards
2. If IGBT FAULT is active during an exposure, try to isolate when it occurs. It may be due to noise
coming from any device outside the Generator (Bucky, Fluoro devices, etc.). Or it may occur
when selecting a high power Exposure and the voltage of the main line goes down more than
10% (in this case check the part number of the IPM Driver Board, it must be A3063-03 or greater).
40 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E10
DESCRIPTION : EEPROM corrupted or not initialized in ATP Console CPU Board or in HT Controller Board.
Wrong data calibration.
ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error during power up (when EEPROM U3 in HT Controller Board is corrupted or not
initialized).
Informative error during power up (when EEPROM U18 in ATP Console Board is corrupted or not
initialized or when EPROM U24 in ATP Console Board has been changed). In both cases, “E10”
appears together with “E34” Error Code or “Technique Error” indication.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Generator does not continue with start up.
POSIBLE CAUSES
EEPROM U3 in HT Controller Board corrupted or no initialized.
EEPROM U18 in ATP Console Board corrupted or no initialized.
EPROM U24 in ATP Console Board has been changed.
ACTIONS
1. If EPROM U24 in the ATP Console Board has been replaced, reset the Error Code to
acknowledge that the NVRAM has been initialized.
2. If the error does not reset, turn the Generator OFF and set Dip-switch A3024SW2-3 in ON
position to allow Service Mode. Turn the Generator ON and enter in workstations configuration
and check as referred in Service Manual (do not forget to exit from Configuration mode to store
the workstation configuration).
3. If the problem is still present, and “E10” error appears together with “E34” Error Code or
“Technique Error” indication, replace ATP Console Board.
4. If the problem is still present and only “E10” error appears on the Console, replace HT Controller
Board.
TR-1005R4 41
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E11
DESCRIPTION : No voltage in the Capacitor Bank.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. “Prep” is not allowed.
APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase or when pressing “PREP”.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : It was not possible to perform “Prep” or “Exp”.
POSIBLE CAUSES
No voltage in the Capacitor Bank (5C1, 5C2, 5C3, 5C4) of the Generator Cabinet.
Defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board.
Precharge K6 contactor located inside the Generator Cabinet is not energized.
Main line fuses F3 and/or F4 are blown off.
“--CHRG” signal of pin 7 on connector P1 on HT Controller Board is not present.
Exposition parameters selected above IGBT maximum current (only software versions before
V2.R06)
Cables disconnected accidentally or damaged connectors.
Test Switch SW1 of the Generator Cabinet is in “Test” position (only for Factory use). This is only
applicable to old Generators.
ACTIONS
A. IF LED DS1 IN CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR LIGHTS
Check Capacitors Voltage,
• If it is OK, check that P1-7 in HT Controller is at logic level “0”. (0.75 V for Generators with 1
Charge/ Discharge Monitor Board and 1.5 V for Generators with 2 Charge/Discharge Monitor
Boards).
G If it is OK (logic level 0), replace HT Controller Board.
G If it is not OK, check links between P1-7 in HT Controller Board and P1-2 in
Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and P1-1 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and
P1-2 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #2,
-- If it is OK, replace defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board.
-- If it is not OK, repair connection.
• If voltage in capacitors is not OK, check VAC in AC1, AC2 and AC3 at Input Rectifier Board (for
Battery Powered Generators check battery voltage).
G If VAC is not OK, verify input connections and input fuses.
G If VAC is OK, disconnect BUS+ and BUS-- at Input Rectifier Board and check VDC.
-- If VDC is not OK, replace defective component (CR1, CR2, CR3) at Input Rectifier
Board.
-- If VDC is OK, check and replace defective component at Generator Cabinet.
42 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
B. IF LED DS1 DOES NOT LIGHT AND IT IS NOT A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR.
• Check input VAC in 6LF1,
G If VAC is OK, replace a defective component at Input Rectifier Board (CR2, CR3 or CR1).
G If VAC in 6LF1 is not OK, check that contactor 6K5 is ON.
-- If 6K5 is ON, check VAC in T1,T2 and T3 (in 6K5).
-- If voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1.
-- If voltage is not OK, replace the defective fuse (F3, F4 or F5).
• If Contactor 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK.
G If it is not OK, check and/or replace 3F6 and 6T2.
G If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC,
-- if --LINE CONT is OK, replace 6K5.
-- If --LINE CONT is not OK, check continuity in J3-10 at ATP Console Board.
-- If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10
and “A” in 6K5.
-- If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board.
C. IF LED DS1 LIGHTS AND IT IS A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR.

Check Contactor 6K5,
• If 6K5 is ON, check output voltage of 6K5.
G If 6K5 output voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1.
G If 6K5 output voltage is not OK, check and replace 6F1, 6J1 and Andersen connectors.
• If 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK.

G If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC in J3-10 at ATP Console
Board,
-- if --LINE CONT is OK, replace 6K5.
-- If --LINE CONT is not OK, check continuity in J3-10 at ATP Console Board.
-- If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10
and “A” in 6K5.
D. IF LED DS1 DOES NOT LIGHT AND IT IS A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR.

Check Contactor 6K5,
• If 6K5 is ON, check output voltage of 6K5.
G If 6K5 output voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1.
G If 6K5 output voltage is not OK, check and replace 6F1, 6J1 and Andersen connectors.
• If 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK.

G If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC in J3-10 at ATP Console
Board,
-- If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10 and
“A” in 6K5.
TR-1005R4 43
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E12
DESCRIPTION : No mA during exposure or mA out of tolerance. Wrong filament current.

APPEARS WHEN : After exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Error 12 appears after the Exposure to alert the operator that the mA at the starting of the exposure has
not been correct. During the first 10 ms the Generator applies constant filament current to the tube.
This current is proportional to the current already calibrated for that mA station at the kVp selected for
that Exposure (filament numbers). Near the end of these 10 ms, the HT Controller reads the mA and if
they are found to be a 30% under or over of what has been selected, it sends error 12 to the Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Calibration data for kVp and mA that produces E12 are not correct.
The mA jumper on the HV Transformer is open, or it is not making good contact. The mA read at the
beginning of the exposure is 50% of the correct value (because one branch is open).
There is a problem on the reading of the mA.
No correct heating prior to the Exposure. The filament has not reached its correct temperature and
the mA at the starting of the exposure is low. It usually occurs when the “Prep” and “Exp” buttons are
pressed down at the same time.
Making an exposure immediately after getting out of calibration mode in extended memory.
+5 VDC , +12 VDC or --12 VDC Power Supplies of HT Control Board (mesured at TP2, TP3 and TP4
of this Board) have excesive ripple or VDC measured is not correct.
ACTIONS
1. Connect a scope to the following Test Points in the HT Control Board and check that the voltage
is correct, if not adjust it with the respective Potentiometer in the Power Supply Board (refer to
Section 2.1 - Low DC Voltage Power Supply Test):
TP2 (+5 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R12 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.
TP3 (+12 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R26 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.
TP4 (--12 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R25 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.
2. Check calibration data for the mA Open Loop (filament numbers) as stated in the Service Manual
for all combination of kVp and mA when this error appears.
With a scope connected to the Test Point TP5 (mA) in the HT Control Board check that the mA
read is within the ratio of 1V=100 mA (± 5%) for V2 and V3 software versions, for V4 and up the
ratio is 1V=10mA from minimum mA to 80 mA and 1V=100mA from 100 mA to the maximum
rating. If it is not, the cause could be that the mA second test is not measuring right, or a wrong
measurement performed in the Generator. (Refer to step 3).
3. Check that the jumper in the mA test point of the HV Transformer is well placed and tighten.
4. With a scope check that during the entire Exposure signals on the test point TP13 (--mA) and
TP14 (+mA) on the HT Control Board connectors are symmetrical (± 10%). If one is found
missing or not symmetrical, measure on pin 6 and 7 of J4 on the HT Control Board. If they are
symmetrical on both points, the problem could be in the HT Control Board. If they are not correct,
check that the connections made on the HV Transformer in J1-E, D, K terminals for Compact
Generators (in TB1, terminals 1, 4 and 5 for no Compact Generators) are well connected and
tighten. Also check that the GND wire is connected to the GND stud. If connections are correct
the problem is in the HV Transformer.
44 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5. Connect a scope to the Test Point TP5 (mA) in the HT Control Board. Check that when an
exposure is made by pressing at the same time the “Prep” and “Exp” controls, the mA at the
beginning of exposure is low. Check that when the exposure is made by pressing first the “Prep”
control and then the “Exp” control, the mA at the beginning of exposure is correct.
6. For Low Speed Generators:
G Reprogram the “Rotor Acceleration and Filament Setting Time” as stated in the Service
Manual, one step over the time as it was before (a.e.: if it was 1.2 seconds, reprogram for
1.8 seconds) and check if boosting is well configured.
7. For High Speed Generators:
G When performing the test for High Speed Generators check that the self-maintaining mode
is not active. In order to check if the problem disappears, select the highest mA station for
Small Focus and the lowest kVp allowed for this mA station (a.e. 40 kVp, 150 mA, SF).
Make an Exposure by pressing at the same time the ”Prep” and “Exp” controls; check that
the mA reading at the beginning of the Exposure is correct. Do the same for Large Focus
(a.e. 50 kVp, 500 mA, LF). If it is found not correct, reprogram a step over at the time for
each case, and test again.
ERROR CODE : E13
DESCRIPTION : No kVp during exposure or kVp out of tolerance.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. May abort exposition.
APPEARS WHEN : During and after exposures.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : No kVp during exposure.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Note . This error assumes that the fault is not on the IGBT and is not due to arcing in the
X-ray Tube.
Defective HV Transformer.
Defective HT Controller Board.
Defective IPM Driver Boards.
Poor connection on the IPM Driver Boards.
ACTIONS
1. Check 5 VDC between P1-4 and P1-3 (GND) in both IPM Driver Boards.
2. Check 115 VAC between pins 1 and 2 of connector P2 on the same Boards.
3. If it is OK, check if the -kVp (TP12) and +kVp (TP 11) test points on the HT Controller Board are
symmetrical. If they are not, check signals -- kV and + kV (in Compact Generators between P4-1
and J1-B at HV Transformer and also between P4-2 and J1-C at HV Transformer) (in no
Compact Generators between P4-1 and TB1-3 at HV Transformer and also between P4-2 and
TB1- 4at HV Transformer) if they are OK, replace the HV Transformer.
4. Check the connectors on the IPM Driver Boards. Check continuity in P3-1 (-kV DR1), P3-2
(--kVDR2) and those signals in IPM Driver Boards. Check with a scope in TP17 (1V=33.33kVp),
if value is OK, replace HT Controller Board; if value is not OK, replace IPM Driver Boards.
5. If kVp value and time is OK and “E13” appears, check that for software version V3 and up the
Dip-switches of A3024SW3 are all in OFF position at ATP Console Board.
TR-1005R4 45
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E14
DESCRIPTION : Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.

APPEARS WHEN : During and after exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The “Exp” signal is grounding on the HT Controller Board.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the connector J1 on HT Controller Board and check grounding of pin 6 of P1.
2. If so, replace the HT Controller Board.
3. If it is not, remove the connector J3 on the Console, and check pin 1 on connector J3 on the
Generator Cabinet.
4. If GND, replace the communication cable J3; if not, replace the ATP Console Board.
ERROR CODE : E15
DESCRIPTION : No current on Filament. Wrong selection of Focal Spot detected during “Prep”.
ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow “Prep”.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : No current detected on Focal Spot (Filaments Off).
POSIBLE CAUSES
A -- There is not supply in Filament Board or poor connection on the Cathode HV Cable or defective
Filament Transformer inside the HV Transformer or defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer
(if the system is equipped with two tubes)
B -- Wrong signal --FIL1 ACK
46 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ACTIONS
A. THERE IS NOT SUPPLY IN FILAMENT BOARD, OR POOR CONNECTION ON THE
CATHODE HV CABLE, OR DEFECTIVE FILAMENT TRANSFORMER, OR DEFECTIVE HV
SWITCH.
Note . For Generators with two tubes:

- if the error appears in both tubes, go to step 1.
- if the error appears in only one tube, interchange HV Cables.
- if error remains when selecting the same tube from Console, replace HV
Transformer, if does not appear go to step 8.
1. Check through the X-ray tube window if the selected filament is On. Check both circuits to detect
which one is causing the error code.
2. If none lit when selected, check in the DC output on the BR1 rectifier (324 Dc approx.) or input
voltage (220 VAC approx.). If input voltage is OK and output voltage is not OK, replace rectifier.
If it is OK go to step 3.
3. Check if the Led’s DS1 and DS2 are ON in the Filament Board. If they are not, replace the Board.
4. If everything is OK, check DC voltage between P2-4 and P2-1 (324 DC approx.). If not enough
voltage detected, review circuit between BR1 and T2 transformer. Replace Filament Board if
defective.
5. If it is OK, check the AC voltage between pin 4 on connector P3 on Filament Board Fil. Sup.) and
pins 15 or 16 (depending on filament selection) on connector P4 on Interface Control Board. The
range should be between 90 and 200 VAC.
6. If not, check voltage in Pin 17 of connector P4 at Interface Control Board and Pin 4 of connector
P3 at Filament Board, also Check P14and 14 of connector P4. If not, replace the Interface Control
Board.
7. If it is OK, check continuity between HV Transformer connector and Interface Board.
8. If it is OK, check continuity of HV Cable connector (between common C and S (Small Focus)
and between common C and L (Large focus). The OHM value should be very low in both cases
( 0.01 approx.)
9. If it is OK, replace the HV Transformer. If it is not OK, check all connections from HV Cable to
the tube. Replace cable if necessary.
10. If HV Cable is OK, check tube filaments. Replace Tube if necessary.
TR-1005R4 47
Troubleshooting
B. WRONG SIGNAL - FIL1 ACK

Perform the following diagnosis if after pressing “Prep” the Error Code “E15” appears on the Console
and after reseting it, the Console displays Error Code “E04”.
START
Press “Prep”
Check and REPAIR Check --FIL1 ACK
NO YES and check - FIL1 ACK at
link P1-8 HT Controller at Interface Board in
Interface Board (P4-22).
& P4-22 Interface Board P1-8 at HT Controller.
Is it Low Level?
Is it ok?
NO
YES
Check if K7
Replace YES is active when
HT Controller Board selecting FIL1*.
Press Prep?
Is it active?
NOTES
1) FIL1 is Small Focus in Tube1 and it is Large Focus in Tube2.
NO
2) FIL1 SLC is activated when selecting FIL1 during Stand by

for RAD Tubes. For R&F Tubes it is activated at “Prep”.
Check signal
FIL1 SLC at P4-19
Replace YES
Interface Board.
Interface Board
Is it at Low Level when
selecting FIL1*?
NO
Check and fix

link P1-13 in YES Check Signal --FIL1 Replace
NO
HT Controller SCL in P1-13 at HT HT Controller Board
with P4--19 in Controll. Is it OK?
Interface Board
48 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E16
DESCRIPTION : Invalid value of : kVp, mA or kW.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow “Prep” or “Exp”.
APPEARS WHEN : In “Prep”
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Selected mA or kVp are not correct.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong maximum kVp configuration.
Wrong software compatibility on the Generator Cabinet and Console.
When pressing “Prep” during calibration of Open Loop mA with a technique that overpasses the
Generator power kVp/mA.
ACTIONS
1. Check the switch 5 of SW2 on HT Controller Board (125 kVp in open position and 150 kVp in
closed position).
2. Check the software version on U5 of HT Controller Board and U24 of ATP Console Board.
3. Set calibration data manually as per calibration procedure table “mA calibration number change”
at calibration section in this manual.
ERROR CODE : E17
DESCRIPTION : Communication error between ATP Console CPU Board and HT Controller Board.
ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop.
APPEARS WHEN : Once initialization phase is over at any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : No communication between Console and Generator Cabinet.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Defective communication cable between Console and Generator Cabinet (J3).
Noise on the bucky circuitry.
Defective HT Controller Board or defective ATP Console Board.
The “Prep” signal from Console to HT Controller is short--circuited to ground.
ACTIONS
1. Turn Generator OFF/ON.
2. If E01 appears, follow procedure for E01.
3. If E01 does not appear, it is an intermittent error due an external device, install a R--C filter in the
power supply and at bucky start circuitry.
4. If error persists, replace HT Controller or ATP Console Boards.
TR-1005R4 49
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E18 OR ROTOR ERROR
DESCRIPTION : Rotor running without order or Rotor error.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : The X-ray tube is not rotating while “Prep” is active, then the exposures are inhibited or the X-ray
tube anode is rotating without Console command.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Defective relay K1 (solid State) on the low speed module.
Signal –RTR on HT Controller Board is active.
Defective HT Controller or Low Speed Control Boards.
± 12 VDC power supplies missing on HT Controller Board.
ACTIONS
In Stand-by:
1. Check if the signal RTR test point (TP6 on HT Controller ) is logic “0”. If yes, check if K1 works
properly.
2. If it is OK, check if the ± 12 VDC power supplies are correct.
3. If it is OK, replace the H. T. Controller.
4. If not logic “0” check K1 at Low Speed Module.
5. If K1 defective, replace.
In “Prep”: (Rotor error/E18).

When Console has not “ Rotor Error” indication , E18 Appears.
50 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
IF E18 OR ROTOR ERROR APPEARS IN “PREP” (ONLY FOR LF-RAC)
VERIFY STARTER IS CONFIGURED TO

VISUALLY CHECK CORRECT TUBE AND CAPACITOR
THAT ANODE IS YES INSTALLED.
TURNING WHEN +
PRESSING “PREP” VERIFY AT SIGNAL DELAYED +24V THAT
DOES IT TURN? LINE VOLTAGE IS TOO LOW -- THAT MAY
CAUSE ROTOR ERROR OR E18.
+
CHECK WITH THE SCOPE SIGNAL RTRI
AT TP6 HT CONTROLLER. SEE
ILLUSTRATION BELOW.
CHECK
TUBE STATOR NO
2.2 V
YES
PREP
CHECK 0.8
LINK CHECK VAC IN TS2 --
FROM TS2 YES
CONNECTIONSSTATOR running
TO TUBE
STATOR PRESSING “PREP” IS IT
IS IT OK? OK?
t
NO
REPAIR CONNECTIONS NO tprep
CHECK SIGNAL
REPLACE FUSE 6F6 YES
+24 DELAYED
IS IT OK?
NO
CHECK IF --
START &--ACC NO REPEAT CONFIGURATION OF
REPLACE K1 OR YES ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME
ARE AT LOW LO-
LF--RAC BOARD GIC LEVEL WHEN FOR LOW SPEED
PRESSING PREP
TR-1005R4 51
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E19
DESCRIPTION : mA detected without “Exp” command.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop. It is necessary to turn
off the equipment.
APPEARS WHEN : In stand-by or during initialization.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Current in tube without ”Prep” command.
POSIBLE CAUSES
± 12 VDC power supplies missing on the H. T. Controller Board.
Defective H. T. Controller.
mA signal on H T Controller is active.
ACTIONS
1. Check ± 12 VDC power supplies.
2. Check a level logic “0” in TP5. Check also a level logic “0” in TP13, TP14 connector P4-6 y P4-7.
3. If it is OK, replace the HT Controller or Filament Drive Boards one by one.
ERROR CODE : E20
DESCRIPTION : kVp detected without “Exp” command.

APPEARS WHEN : In stand-by or during initialization.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : kVp detected without “Exp” command.
When E20 appears on Console (E20) means that the error can not be solved without turning off the
equipment.
POSIBLE CAUSES
--12 VDC power supply missing.
Defective HT Controller Board.
ACTIONS
1. Check --12 VDC power supply.
2. Check logic level “0” in TP7 and TP11, TP12, P4-1 and P4-2.
3. If it is OK, replace HT Controller Board.
52 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E21
DESCRIPTION : Wrong Tube-1 selection.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow working unless the error is solved or other tube is selected.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment mainly after initialization or when changing tube selection.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Wrong tube 1 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The –HT INTLK is not grounding (tube 1 selection).
Defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (two tubes option).
The --HT INTLK is missing.
ACTIONS
Only for one tube option (no Compact Generators):
1. Check signal –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 0 VDC in tube 1
selection.
2. If it is not OK, check pin 9 of TB1 and ground is 0 Ω. If it is not, replace the HV Transformer.
3. If it is OK, check signal -HT LINK in ATP Console Board (J3-13), if not “0” in J3-13, check link
between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “0” and E21 appears, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for one tube option (Compact Generators):

1. Check the –HT INTLK in 6J3-13 (Generator Cabinet), it should be “0” VDC in tube 1 selection.
2. If it is not OK, check Jumper between 6J3-13 and 6J3-16 (GND).
3. If 6J3-13 = 0, check 6J3--13 in ATP Console Board.
4. If not “0” in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “0” and E21 appears, replace
ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (no Compact Generators):

1. Check the –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 0 VDC in tube 1
selection.
2. If it is not OK, check between pin 9 of TB1 and ground is 0 Ω. If not replace the HV Transformer.
3. If it is OK, check 0V at J2-13 in ATP Console.
a. If it is not OK, check between J3-13 in ATP and TB1-9.
b. If it is OK, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (Compact Generators):

1. Check logic “0” in J3-13 in ATP Console Board, if “0” VDC, replace ATP Console Board.
2. If not “0”, turn off equipment, disconnect J1 of HV Transformer and check continuity between
J1-J and J3-13 in ATP Console Board.
3. If it is not OK, check cable and replace if necessary.
4. If connection is OK, replace HV Transformer.
TR-1005R4 53
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E22
DESCRIPTION : Wrong Tube-2 selection.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow working unless the error is solved or other tube is selected.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment mainly after initialization or when changing tube selection.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Wrong tube 2 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The –HT INTLK is not high logic level 5V (tube 2 selection).
Defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (two tubes option).
The --HT INTLK is grounding.
ACTIONS
Only for one tube option (no Compact Generators):
1. Check signal –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 5 VDC in tube 2
selection.
2. If it is not OK, check pin 9 of TB1 and ground is infinite Ω. If it is not, replace the HV Transformer.
3. If it is OK, check signal -HT LINK in ATP Console Board (J3-13), if not “1” in J3-13, check link
between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “5” and E22 appears, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for one tube option (Compact Generators):

1. Check the –HT INTLK in 6J3-13 (Generator Cabinet), it should be “5” VDC in tube 2 selection.
2. If it is not OK, check that 6J3-13 is not grounding.
3. If 6J3-13 = 5, check 6J3--13 in ATP Console Board.
4. If not “5” in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “5” and E22 appears, replace
ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (no Compact Generators):

1. Check the –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 5 VDC in tube 2
selection.
2. If it is not OK, check between pin 9 of TB1 and ground is infinite Ω. If not replace the HV
Transformer.
3. If it is OK, check 0V at J2-13 in ATP Console.
a. If J2-13 is not OK, check 5V between J3-13 in ATP and TB1-9.
b. If it is OK, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (Compact Generators):

1. Check logic “5” in J3-13 in ATP Console Board, if “5” VDC, replace ATP Console Board.
2. If not “5”, turn off equipment, disconnect J1 of HV Transformer and check continuity between
J1-J and J3-13 in ATP Console Board.
3. If it is not OK, check cable and replace if necessary.
4. If connection is OK, replace HV Transformer.
54 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E23
DESCRIPTION : Calibration data not stored

ERROR TYPE : Indicative although it is almost impossible to find if not provoked.
APPEARS WHEN : When trying to save a calibration data.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Calibration data not stored. Calibration value intended to be stored has not been properly
recorded.
POSIBLE CAUSES
This problem may be shown randomly.
This problem is continuos or occurs frequently and the communication between the Generator
Cabinet and the Console is too noisy.
ACTIONS
1. Store data again.
2. Check communication cables.
3. Route communication cables in different way.
TR-1005R4 55
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E24
DESCRIPTION : The Bucky has not been detected to be moving.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposition.
APPEARS WHEN : At the beginning of exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Wrong Exposure signal from Buckies.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Malfunction of the bucky.
Wrong wiring of the bucky.
Wrong bucky selection.
ACTIONS
CHECK
NO REVIEW WORK STATION NO CONFIGURE
- DRCMA AT PREP
CONFIGURATION CORRECTLY
IS IT AT LOW IS IT OK?
LEVEL?
YES YES
CHECK K2 FOR CHECK

NO BUCKY 1 & K3 FOR J3-14,J3-11 AT
NO REPLACE
REPAIR
BUCKY 2 ATP CONS. ATP CONSOLE BOARD
CONNECTION
ARE THEY ON? IS IT OK?
YES
YES
CHECK AND REPAIR
LINK J3--14 //P4-12 AT
YES CHECK-BUCKY INTERFACE BOARD
REPLACE MOTION 1&2 AT J3--11 / P4-13 AT
INTERFACE BOARD INTERFACE BOARD INTERFACE BOARD
P4-11 & P4-10 AT LOW
LEVEL IS IT OK?
NO
PROBLEM AT BUCKY
56 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E25
DESCRIPTION : Battery failure in Battery Powered Generators.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO : All Battery Powered Generators.
APPEARS WHEN : At “Prep” in any Battery Powered Generators and at any moment in Generators with Stand-Alone.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Batteries charge level is momentarily low or some batteries are discharged or damaged.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Batteries are discharged.
Some Battery Charger Sector is not working properly or some Batteries are damaged.
ACTIONS
A. PRELIMINARY
E25 appears when the Generator has not been used for a period of time, it usually allows 2 or 3
exposures and then E25 appears.
If this is the case, charge Batteries and perform exposures until the batteries are totally discharged,
then charge again and perform exposures again to discharge, repeat the procedure 5 or 6 times. This
is the way to charge batteries fully and safe.
B. BATTERIES FULLY CHARGED AND “E25” APPEARS

1. Check Corrosion in metal contacts of Batteries.
2. Check charger Leds on Battery Charger. Green Leds and LED DS1 should be ON.
3. Check voltage in J1 of Battery Charger Board: J1-16 & J1-15, J1-14 & J1-13...... , J1-2 & J1-1.
• With Generator OFF and disconnected from Mains, the voltage to be found is: 26.6 VDC.
• With Stand-Alone mode, disconnected the Generator from Mains and with the Generator turned
On, the voltage should be: 25.4 VDC.
G If voltage is not OK, check the batteries status and replace defective batteries if needed
(refer to Section 2.6.2 - Identifying and Replacing Defective Batteries).
G If total voltage is correct and E25 appears, check the measure circuit.
-- In Generators with Stand-Alone check links between J1-18 (HT Controller) & J3-5
(Stand-Alone), J1-19 (HT Controller) & J3-6 (Stand-Alone), J1-20 (HT Controller) &
J3-7 (Stand-Alone). If links are OK and batteries voltage is OK but signals are below
minimum required (that is --BATST3 is “0”, BATST2 is “0” and BATST1 is “1”), check
HT Controller Board and Stand-Alone Board, replace the defective Board found.
-- For Generators without Stand-Alone check that signal -BAT FAULT at P5-2 of
HT Control Board is at “High Level”.
If -BAT FAULT is at “High Level”, replace HT Controller Board.
If -BAT FAULT is at “Low Level”, check J2-2 in Battery Charger Board. If not “Low
Level” replace cable. If “Low Level“ replace the Battery Charger Board.
TR-1005R4 57
Troubleshooting
C. LEDs CHECKING ON THE BATTERY CHARGER BOARD

1. GREEN LEDS ARE ON BUT LED DS1 IS OFF
Check that 24 V are present in J2-1 of Battery Charger Board.
• If it is OK, replace Battery Charger Board.
• If it is not OK, check 24V in J2-7 Line Monitor.
G If it is OK, repair links between J2-1 of Battery Charger Board & J2-7 of Line Monitor Board.
G If it is not OK, check 20 VAC between J2-5 and J2-6 at Line Monitor Board.
-- If it is OK, replace Line Monitor Board.
-- If it is not OK, check voltage from 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer to the Line Monitor
Board and replace it if necessary.
2. SOME GREEN LEDS ARE NOT ON AND DS1 IS ON.

Check Fuses F7 to F21(2A, 250 VAC) (Charger Sectors) of the Battery Charger Board.
Check VAC at J6 and J4 in Battery Charger Board (connectors J6 and J4 must be plugged in the
Board), it should be 28 VAC (measure between: J6-1 & J6-2, J6-3 & J6-4........... until J6-15 & J6-16,
and also check J4-1 & J4-2 ........ until J4-13 & J4-14).
• If VAC is OK, replace Battery Charger Board.
• If VAC is not OK, unpplug connectors J6 and J4 from the Battery Charger Board and repeat the
measure checking VAC from 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer at connectors J6 and J4, it
should be 28 VAC (measure between: J6-1 & J6-2, J6-3 & J6-4........... until J6-15 & J6-16, and
also check J4-1 & J4-2 ........ until J4-13 & J4-14). Check 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer and
replace it if necessary.
3. NONE LED IS ON
Check that Generator is Powered ON.
If DL1 is blinking (yellow) at Line Monitor Board and DL2 and DL3 are OFF:
• Check VAC between J2-1 and J2-3 at Line Monitor Board.
G If no VAC found, replace Line Monitor Board.
G If VAC found, check VAC in 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer.
-- If no VAC found, check and fix connection at 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer.
-- If VAC found, check 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer.
If DL1 is blinking (yellow) at Line Monitor Board while DL2 and DL3 are ON (any of them):
• Check Line VAC +/- 15%.
G If Line VAC is not OK, it is an external problem.
G If Line VAC is OK, review the Line Monitor Board adjustment.
Line Monitor Board Adjustment: Configure SW1 at Line Monitor Board according to
Power Line Voltage (refer to Installation chapter in Service Manual). Measure the Power
Line Voltage with a Digitalmeter and adjust VDC in TP2 with POT1 at Line Monitor Board
as per the following formula:
V measured V(measured:220V)
× 2.5 = VTP2 Example: × 2.5 = VTP2(2.4VDC)
V nominal V (nominal:230V)
V measured is the real voltage obtained with polymeter.

V nominal is the SW1 configuration Voltage.
If all Leds are off at Line Monitor Board:

• Check VAC in J2-1 / J2-2 at Line Monitor Board.
G If VAC is OK, review configuration of Jumper SW1.
G If VAC is not OK, check (Magnetothermic ) 1SW1 is ON and external VAC power.
58 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E26
DESCRIPTION : Voltage failure in Battery Powered Generators with Stand-Alone.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal error. System shut down.
APPLICABLE TO : All Battery Powered Generators with Stand-Alone.
APPEARS WHEN : At the beginning of exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : System failure
POSIBLE CAUSES
No voltage detected at Stand Alone.
Shutdown
DC is below or over specifications
HT Controller cables are accidentally grounded.
ACTIONS
1. Check that DL4 is ON, if it is OFF, Stand Alone Board is not powered.
2. Check that DL3 is OFF, if it is ON, a shutdown has occurred.
3. Check that DL5 is OFF, if it is ON, DC is below or over specifications.
4. Check that battery voltage cables connected to HT Controller are not grounded.
ERROR CODE : E27
DESCRIPTION : Failure in Console EPROM. Bad checksum.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator does not start.
APPEARS WHEN : During Console initialization.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : The Console performs a checksum procedure of EPROM when it has been configured to a
non-allowed calibration and it has found this value to be incorrect.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Console has been configured in a non communication mode.
The non volatile RAM does not calculate and compare the Console checksum.
The EPROM (U24) has been corrupted.
ACTIONS
1. Check if dip--switch SW2 on ATP Console is well configured per Service Manual.
2. If error remains, replace the non--volatile RAM (U23) on ATP Console.
3. If error remains, replace the EPROM (U24) on ATP Console.
TR-1005R4 59
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E29
DESCRIPTION : “ALL CLEAR” signal not active.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow “Prep”.
APPLICABLE TO : Nucletron Generators.
APPEARS WHEN : When pressing “Prep” in P00 mode.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Exposure is not allowed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
“All Clear” signal is not ready after 5 seconds with “Prep” activated.
ACTIONS
Release the exposure controls, press the “System Reset” button and check the system.
ERROR CODE : E30
DESCRIPTION : Relay K1 not active.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow “Prep”.
APPEARS WHEN : When pressing “Prep” in P00 or P03 mode.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Test--scan not started.
POSIBLE CAUSES
MOSTA signal is not received at system or relay K1 is not active.
ACTIONS
Release the exposure controls, press the “System Reset” push-button and check the system.
60 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E31
DESCRIPTION : Long exposition is not initiated.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow long “Exp”.
APPEARS WHEN : During exposition phase in P00 mode.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Signal from K3 has not been detected after 1.6 seconds.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Signal from K3 has not been detected after 1.6 seconds.
The system is not ready to make the exposure or the operator has aborted the exposure.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE : E32
DESCRIPTION : Long exposition is not cut (after 3.2 seconds) as relay K3 was not detected.
ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Cut exposition at 3.2 seconds of buckup.
APPEARS WHEN : During exposition phase in P00 mode.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Signal from K3 is not received.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Signal from K3 is not received.
Exposure not completed, time is longer than 1.6 seconds.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4 61
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E33
DESCRIPTION : No communication between Generator and Serial Console or PC Unit.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with Serial Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Serial Communication Error.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Connecting cable between Console and Generator is loosen or damaged.
Damaged ATP Console CPU Board or Serial Console.
ACTIONS
1. Check connection cable between connector J7/J8 from ATP Console CPU Board to connector
J5 of Compatibility Module (as per Generator model) and then check cable from J5 to Serial
Console.
2. If error remains, check ATP Console CPU Board and Serial Console, replace defective part
found.
ERROR CODE : E34 -- TECHNIQUE ERROR
DESCRIPTION : Technique error.

ERROR TYPE : Informative without acoustic alarm or Fatal after exposition. It does not allow exposition.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment after parameter selection or after exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “Technique error” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of
Consoles E34 appears in display.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The calibration for that parameters is wrong.
ACTIONS
1. If it occurs with time parameters close to 1mS, it means that the cable capacity is excessive for
a short exposition. Also the calibration for that parameters is wrong. Check Service Manual
Section: Exposure Time Adjustment.
2. If it happens at Fluoroscopy mode with ABC, it means that the equipment is not able to perform
that operation. Perform Jumper W1 in Fluoro CPU.
3. If it happens after exposition, it means a failure in exposition timer and backup has been
cut. Dangerous. Reset APR and reconfigure values.
62 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E35 -- DOOR OPEN
DESCRIPTION : Door Open.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. It may inhibit Exposition depending on the configuration of SW1.2 at Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “Door Open” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles
E35 appears in display. Does not allow “Prep” and “Exp”.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Door open or cable disconnected or cable not installed.
ACTIONS
1. Close door.
2. If that is not the reason for the error, check Jumper TS1-22 & TS1-23. See Installation Manual
Section: Door Interlock Signal.
ERROR CODE : E36 -- HEAT UNITS
DESCRIPTION : Heat Unit. Overheating.

ERROR TYPE : Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow expositions.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “Heat Unit” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles
E36 appears in display. Does not allow “Prep” and “Exp”.
POSIBLE CAUSES
If it appears at initialization means that the thermostat of the selected tube is connected or it does not
exist, if so connect to ground the correspondent signal.
If it appears at any other moment is because the tube thermostat has been activated.
It also may appear during the calibration process due to the high number of starting.
ACTIONS
1. Check correct installation of signal Thermostat/Presostat. See Installation Manual. If tube has
not this signal, perform a Jumper indicated in Installation Jumper.
2. Wait until temperature is lowered.
TR-1005R4 63
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E37 - TUBE OVERLOAD
DESCRIPTION : Tube Overload.

ERROR TYPE : Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow Exposition.
APPEARS WHEN : After “Exp” due to Tube overheating. After changing radiographic parameters. In some Consoles
this error may not appear as they are provide with an automatic blocking that disable parameters
above tube capacity.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “Tube Overload” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of
Consoles E37 appears in display. Exposures are not allowed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
1. Parameters selected for a new exposition are above tube capacity. (Heat Units or Rating).
2. Capacity Line frequency is wrong. (see SW1.1 at Console) or Tube selected in extended position
E02 or E18 is not correct.
ACTIONS
1. Wait for Tube to cool and Heat Units available increase or modify Exposition parameters.
2. If Heat Units of tube are 100% and E37 or “Tube Overload” warning appear: Check 3024SW1.1
in ATP Console. See Configuration Chapter in Service Manual and Test Switches or verify the
X-Ray Type Selection: E02 for Tube 1 and E18 for Tube 2 in Configuration Chapter of Service
Manual.
ERROR CODE : E41
DESCRIPTION : Dosimeter failure. Communication failure between Tube-1 Dosimeter and Generator.
APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with Dosimeter.
APPEARS WHEN : Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong Physical connection between Dosimeter and System for Tube-1.
ACTIONS
1. Check cable connections between Dosimeter and System.
2. Turn Off and On the Generator to reset the Radiation Measuring System.
64 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E42
DESCRIPTION : Autotest error on Tube-1 Dosimeter.

APPEARS WHEN : Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1 or during regular operation.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection. Failure test in Dosimeter.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Error during electronic checking of Counter Module for Tube-1.
ACTIONS
3. If required, replace Counter Module for Tube-1.
ERROR CODE : E43
DESCRIPTION : Tube-1 Ion Chamber status check error.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection. Wrong Ion Chamber status request.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Error during Ion Chamber checking for Tube-1. Ion Chamber not operative.
ACTIONS
3. If required, replace Ion Chamber for Tube-1.
TR-1005R4 65
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E44
DESCRIPTION : Dosimeter failure. Communication failure between Tube-2 Dosimeter and Generator.
APPEARS WHEN : Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-2.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong Physical connection between Dosimeter and System for Tube-2.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE : E45
DESCRIPTION : Autotest error on Tube-2 Dosimeter.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection. Failure test in Dosimeter.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Error during electronic checking of Counter Module for Tube-2.
ACTIONS
3. If required, replace Counter Module for Tube-2.
66 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E46
DESCRIPTION : Tube-2 Ion Chamber status check error.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection. Wrong Ion Chamber status request.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Error during Ion Chamber checking for Tube-2. Ion Chamber not operative.
ACTIONS
3. If required, replace Ion Chamber for Tube-2.
ERROR CODE : E47
DESCRIPTION : Capacitors not charged when PREP.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO : Capacitor Generators.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “E47“.
POSIBLE CAUSES
No power in line.
Defective Capacitor or circuit.
ACTIONS
1. Press the respective button on the Console to reset the Error indication.
2. Wait one minute for Capacitor Charging before activating “PREP” control.
TR-1005R4 67
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E48
DESCRIPTION : Collimator Error.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow exposure.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Showed as “Technique Error” in Consoles with this light indicator. For the rest of Consoles E48
appears displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Collimator blades closed or in motion during exposure.
Defective Collimator.
ACTIONS
1. Check collimator blades.
2. If it is OK, check the TS3-20 is at low level.
• If it is not at low level : Problem in Collimator.
• If signal at low level, check J2-6 in ATP Console
G if it is at low level, replace ATP Console Board
G If is at high level, check and fix link between J2-6 and TS3-20.
ERROR CODE : E49
DESCRIPTION : Exposure Cycle Error.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow exposure.
APPLICABLE TO : Generators with two X-ray Tubes for RAD only with “Exposure Cycle” feature (a.e. Brandis).
APPEARS WHEN : Exposure is not performed or it is aborted.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E49 appears on Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended.
Exposure order is interrupted.
ACTIONS
2. Repeat the exposure.
3. If error remains, check Handswitch or “EXP” button and replace what is wrong.
68 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E50
DESCRIPTION : Interrupted Exposure.

APPEARS WHEN : When operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E50 appears on Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended.
ACTIONS
2. Repeat the exposure.
3. If error remains, check Handswitch or “EXP” button and replace what is wrong.
ERROR CODE : E51
DESCRIPTION : Checksum failure or EPROM corrupted.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. System does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO : Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN : After self-test.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : At power On, after the Generator autocheck, E51 is displayed and it is not possible to make
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
DRAC program memory corrupted.
ACTIONS
1. Replace U17 in Control DRAC Board.
TR-1005R4 69
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E52
DESCRIPTION : Microcrontroller RAM failure.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Exposure is not allowed.
APPLICABLE TO : Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC
APPEARS WHEN : After self-test.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : At power On, after the Generator autocheck, E52 is displayed and it is not possible to make
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
U17 in Control DRAC Board is defective.
ACTIONS
1. Replace U17 in Control DRAC Board.
ERROR CODE : E53
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient DC BUS voltage at low level voltage (220 VAC).

APPEARS WHEN :
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E53 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, are low or absent.
Voltage at TP18 is < 1.1 VDC.
ACTIONS
1. Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB, it must be higher than 200 VDC.
2. If it is not OK, perform Error 11 checking.
3. If it is OK, check FILT 1, F3 and F4 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
4. If it is not OK, replace F3 or F4 or INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
5. If it is OK, Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB.
6. If it is not OK, replace Cable between J2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB and J2 CONTROL DRAC
PCB.
7. If it is OK, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
70 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E54
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient DC BUS voltage at high level voltage (480 VAC).

APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, is low (out of range).
Voltage at TP18 is < 2.48 VDC.
ACTIONS
1. Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB, it must be higher than 447 VDC.
2. If it is not OK, perform Error 11 checking.
3. If it is OK, check FILT 1, F3 and F4 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
4. If it is not OK, replace F3 or F4 or INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
5. If it is OK, Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB.
6. If it is not OK, replace Cable between J2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB and J2 CONTROL DRAC
PCB.
ERROR CODE : E55
DESCRIPTION : Excessive DC BUS voltage at 480 or 380 VAC.

APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, are high (out of range).
Voltage at TP18 is > 4.92 VDC.
ACTIONS
1. Check the input voltage to the Generator at TS2--20, TS2--21 and TS2--22, it must be according
to specifications max. 480 VAC + 10%. If it is not OK, check Input Power Line.
2. If Power Input is OK, check the DC Voltage between J2--1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB,
it should be less than 890 VDC.
3. If Voltage is < 890 VDC replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
4. If voltage is > 890 VDC, switch OFF and disconnect J2--1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC . Switch
ON and measure voltage in DC BUS +/--.
5. If it is OK, replace CONTROL DRAC.
6. If not OK, check Power Module and FILT1 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. Replace defective part.
( Power Module or FILT1 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB).
TR-1005R4 71
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E56
DESCRIPTION : Excessive reference voltage.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive reference voltage.
ACTIONS
1. Check voltage at TP15, it must be 0V.
2. If not 0V, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
72 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E58
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM

APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E58 is displayed and it is not possible to make
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS
1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube
Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective,
replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator
specifications.
4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.
5. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
6. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB
in the following way:
G Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between:

P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse
N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
Note . In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the
generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these
points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If
any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
7. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP”
a. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b. If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d. If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of
Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f. If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4 73
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E59
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM

Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS
specifications.

74 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E60
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM

exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS
specifications.
3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary).

TR-1005R4 75
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E61
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM.

Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS
specifications.
4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main).

76 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E62
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.

APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

TR-1005R4 77
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E63
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E63 is displayed and it is not possible to make
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

78 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E64
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.

exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

TR-1005R4 79
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E65
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.

Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

80 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E66
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in main winding running at 3300 RPM.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During running of the anode at low speed, E66 is displayed and it is not possible to make
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

TR-1005R4 81
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E67
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM.

Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

82 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E68
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM.

exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

TR-1005R4 83
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E69
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in main winding running at 3300 RPM.

Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

84 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E70
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in main winding running at 10000 RPM.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During running of the anode at high speed, E70 is displayed and it is not possible to make
exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

TR-1005R4 85
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E71
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM.

Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

86 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E72
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM.

exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

TR-1005R4 87
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E73
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in main winding running at 10000 RPM.

Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

88 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E74
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in main winding braking at 3300 RPM.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E74 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
3. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the X-ray Tube Stator
specifications.
4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If
winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2.

TR-1005R4 89
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E75
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM.

POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
3. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator
specifications.

90 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E76
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM.

POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

TR-1005R4 91
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E77
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in main winding braking at 3300 RPM.

POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

92 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E78
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in main winding braking at 10000 RPM.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at high speed, E78 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

TR-1005R4 93
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E79
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM.

POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

94 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E80
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM.

POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

TR-1005R4 95
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E81
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in main winding braking at 10000 RPM.

APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at high Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at high peed, E81 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

96 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E82
DESCRIPTION : Wrong X-ray Tube selection.

APPEARS WHEN : When changing Tube selection.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Changing the tube selection, E82 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
No tube selected.
ACTIONS
1. Check that the Dip switch 3243--SW4--6 is in on position (tube selection inhibited).
2. Check delayed switch off.
ERROR CODE : E83
DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in DC Brake.

APPEARS WHEN : During Anode braking in DC voltage.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode with DC voltage, E83 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in main or auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS
specifications.
TR-1005R4 97
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E84
DESCRIPTION : Incorrect Tube selection signal.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Changing the tube selection E84 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
No tube selected. X-Ray selection Signal is not correct on the Control DRAC PCB.
ACTIONS
1. Check that the Dip Switch 3243SW4--6 on the Control DRAC PCB is in ON position.
ERROR CODE : E85

POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
98 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E86

POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
2. Check the connection of common wire.
3. Check the voltage at TP36 in Control DRAC Board.
ERROR CODE : E87
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 3300 RPM.

APPEARS WHEN : During acceleration of Anode at Low Speed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in common wire is detected.
ACTIONS
specifications.
TR-1005R4 99
Troubleshooting

ERROR CODE : E88
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in common wire running at 3300 RPM.

APPEARS WHEN : Running the Anode at Low Speed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

100 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E89
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.

APPEARS WHEN : During acceleration of the Anode at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E89 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

TR-1005R4 101
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E90
DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in common wire running at 10000 RPM.

APPEARS WHEN : Running the Anode at High Speed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ACTIONS
specifications.

102 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E91
DESCRIPTION : Incorrect signal measure in IPRINC (CH2).

APPEARS WHEN : In Stand-by situation.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The system is detecting current through main wire and it should be zero.
ACTIONS
1. Check the voltage at TP1 and TP17 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.
ERROR CODE : E92
DESCRIPTION : Incorrect signal measure in IAUX (CH3).

APPEARS WHEN : In Stand-by situation.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The system is detecting current through auxiliary wire and it should be zero.
ACTIONS
1. Check the voltage at TP3 and TP16 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.
TR-1005R4 103
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E93
DESCRIPTION : Incorrect signal measure in ICOM (CH4).

APPEARS WHEN : In Stand-by.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The system is detecting current through main wire and it should be zero.
ACTIONS
1. Check the voltage at TP1, TP3 and TP36 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.
ERROR CODE : E95
DESCRIPTION : Rapid Termination

APPLICABLE TO : Generators with Rapid Termination application Installed.
APPEARS WHEN : While Exposure. (after 10ms from exposure or after 10% of the exposure back-up time whatever
is first).
POSIBLE CAUSES
The selected Ion Chamber or the selected parameters (short backup time) are not appropriate for an
exposure with AEC
Switch SW1--3 in ATP Console A3024--XX PCB is in ON position.
ACTIONS
2. Select appropriate Ion Chamber or modify parameters.
3. if error remains check SW1-3 in ATP Console A3024--XX PCB is in OFF position.
104 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E96
DESCRIPTION : Voltage missing at PCB A3517--01.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO : Capacitor Powered Generators only.
APPEARS WHEN : At any time.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E96 appears at console display.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Failure in Power supply of PCB A3517--01.
Failure in reference voltage 10V.
ACTIONS
1. Turn Off Generator and wait for the DC Link Capacitors to discharge. For that, refer to Capacitor
Discharge Procedure.
2. Replace A3517--01 PCB.
ERROR CODE : E97
DESCRIPTION : Voltage in capacitors not balanced.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO : Capacitor Powered Generators.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E97 appears at Console display.
POSIBLE CAUSES
1.-- Failure at measurements circuitry of PCB A3517--01.
2.-- Failure in Resistors 8R1 and 8R3 (voltage regulating resistors).
3.-- Failure in DC Link Capacitors.
ACTIONS
1. For Cause 1: Replace PCB A3517--01.
2. For Cause 2: Replace resistors 8R1 and 8R3.
3. For Cause 3: Replace all DC Link Capacitors.
TR-1005R4 105
Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE : E98
DESCRIPTION : Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board set for Configuration and Calibration Mode Active.
ERROR TYPE : Informative. It allows normal operation.
APPEARS WHEN : After turning on the Control Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E98 appears at console display.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board set in “ON” position.
ACTIONS
1. Reset the error condition by pressing the respective button on the Console.
Keep in mind that this error will appear each time the Generator is turned OFF/ON during service
procedures (configuration, calibration, etc.) whenever Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console
Board is in “ON” (closed) position (for service mode allowed).
2. When servicing is finished and the Generator is ready for normal operation, turn the Generator
OFF and set Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board in “OFF” (open) position (operation
mode).
106 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
SECTION 5 CENTRAL LISTING
5.1 HT CONTROLLER BOARD
5.1.1 HT CONTROLLER BOARD (A3000--10/20)
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH DESCRIPTION
SW2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND TEST 8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
JP1 A A3000--10 VERSION

B A3000--20 VERSION
BOARD CONFIGURATION
B A3000--20 VERSION
LEDs
LED COLOR DESCRIPTION
SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK DETECTION BETWEEN

CONTROL CONSOLE AND POWER MODULE.
LED STARTS IN A QUICK FLASHING MODE UNTIL SERIAL
DS1 YELLOW
COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE CONTROL
CONSOLE AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH
OF ABOUT 2 PER SECOND.
POTENTIOMETERS
POTENTIOMETER RATING DESCRIPTION
R29 10K, 1/2w FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT OF HV INVERTER
R49 20K, 1/2w FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT FOR FILAMENT INVERTER
R51 10K, 1/2w DEAD TIME CONTROL FOR FILAMENT INVERTER
RELAYS
RELAY RATING DESCRIPTION
K1 +12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST --12 VDC SUPERVISOR
TR-1005R4 107
Troubleshooting
5.1.2 HT CONTROLLER BOARD (A3000--30/33/34/35/36 & so)
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
SW2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND TEST 8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
JP1 1 COMPATIBLE WITH OLD

LOW SPEED STARTER
2 COMPATIBLE WITH LF-RAC (LOW

SPEED STARTER) AND
DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
BOARD CONFIGURATION
JP2 1 COMPATIBLE WITH OLD
LOW SPEED STARTER
2 COMPATIBLE WITH LF-RAC (LOW

SPEED STARTER) AND
DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
LEDs
SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK DETECTION BETWEEN

CONTROL CONSOLE AND POWER MODULE.
DS1 YELLOW
COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE CONTROL
CONSOLE AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH
OF ABOUT 2 PER SECOND.
DS2 YELLOW EXPOSURE INDICATOR
DS3 YELLOW PREPARATION INDICATOR
POTENTIOMETERS
R29 10K, 1/2w FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT OF HV INVERTER
R49 20K, 1/2w FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT FOR FILAMENT INVERTER
RELAYS
K1 +12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST --12 VDC SUPERVISOR
108 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.2 FILAMENT CONTROL BOARD
JUMPERS / SWITCHES

BOARD CONFIGURATION. JP1-A FOR NORMAL APPLICATION
B A3004--04 VERSION
LEDs
DS1 GREEN FILAMENT DRIVER STATUS INDICATOR:

BOTH LEDs ARE OFF: 220VAC POWER SUPPLY IS MISSING
DS2 GREEN ONLY ONE LED IS OFF: THE BOARD IS DEFECTIVE
5.3 INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
EXPOSURE ENABLE RELAY ( K4 ) CAN BE SUPPLIED FROM

W1 2--1 AUXILARY BUCKY SUPPLY
2--3 NORMAL
INTERNAL +24VDC ( NORMAL ), OR FROM EXTERNAL
VOLTAGE ( AUXILIARY BUCKY SUPPLY ).
W2 2--1 NORMAL FLUORO EXPOSURE SYNCHRONIZATION WITH AC LINE

2--3 LOGIC LINE SYNC DIRECTLY ( NORMAL ), OR THRU A LOGIC CIRCUITRY.
W3 A POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY

B NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY


W6 A POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY THE OUTPUT OF THE PHOTO TUBE/ION CHAMBER HIGH
B NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY CAN BE SELECTED AS :
W7 A POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY -- POSITIVE OUTPUT ( JUMPER POSITION -- A )

B NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY -- NEGATIVE OUTPUT ( JUMPER POSITION -- B )


TR-1005R4 109
Troubleshooting
LEDs
DS1 GREEN GENERATOR POWER ON INDICATOR
POTENTIOMETERS
R29 5K, 1/2w ION CHAMBER POSITIVE HIGH VOLTAGE ADJUST
RELAYS
K1 -- POWER ”ON” +6VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT GENERATOR POWER ON
K2 -- BUCKY 1 +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT BUCKY 1 DRIVE
K3 -- BUCKY 2 +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT BUCKY 2 DRIVE
K4 -- BUCKY MOTION +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT BUCKY EXPOSURE ENABLE
K5 -- SOL DR +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT HV TRANSFORMER SOLENOID DRIVE
K6 -- TUBE 1 +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT TUBE FILAMENT PREHEAT SELECTION
K7 -- SM SPOT (RAD) +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT SMALL/LARGE FILAMENT SELECTION
K8 +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT DELAYED +24VDC AND +5VDC
K9 +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT BUS DC DISCHARGE WITH POWER OFF
K10 +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT ROOM LIGHT CONTACT
K11 PhotoMOS Relay, SPST FILAMENT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
110 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.4 LVDC POWER SUPPLY
POTENTIOMETERS
R12 2K, 1w +5 VDC ADJUST
R25 2K, 1w --12 VDC ADJUST
R26 2K, 1w +12 VDC ADJUST
5.5 CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARD
LEDs
CHARGE INDICATOR OF THE HT INVERTER CAPACITORS:

DS1 GREEN LED OFF: NO CHARGE
LED ON: CHARGE ACCORDING TO BRIGHTNESS
5.6 LOCKS BOARD
FUSES
FUSE RATING NOMINAL DESCRIPTION
F14 10 A, 250 V, S.B. 24 VAC LOCKS/LAMP
F15 10 A, 250 V, S.B. 24 VAC LOCKS/LAMP
TR-1005R4 111
Troubleshooting
5.7 ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JP1 POS A COMM--COL1

POS B COMM--COL0
JP2 POS A PREP--ROW5

POSITION ”B” FOR APPLICATION MODE.
POS B PREP--ROW1
JP3 POS A EXP--ROW4

POS B EXP--ROW0
JP4 POS A LINE SYNC

SET ALWAYS IN POSITION “B”.
POS B CAM SYNC
JP5 POS A VD SELECTION POS. A -- SELECTION OF IC REFERENCE OUTPUT

POS B IC4 SELECTION POS. B -- SELECTION OF AEC ION CHAMBER (IC4) OUTPUT (NORMAL MODE).
POS C PT INPUT SELECT. POS. C -- SELECTION OF PHOTOMULTIPLIER (PT INPUT) OUTPUT FOR ABC.
JP6 POS A 27C512/27C1001/274001

MEMORY SELECTION. SET ALWAYS IN POSITION “A”.
POS B 27C256
JP7 POS A RS485

POS B RS422 JP7, JP8 :
POS A -- RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
POS.
JP8 POS A RS485 POS. B -- RS422 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
POS B RS422
JP9 POS A RS232

POS B RS422 & RS485
JP9, JP10, JP11 :
JP10 POS A RS232
POS. A -- RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
POS B RS422 & RS485
POS. B -- RS422 & RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
JP11 POS A RS232
POS B RS422 & RS485
JP12 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION JUMPER FACTORY NOT CONNECTED (SET ONLY FOR A3024--31 BOARD)
JP13 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION JUMPER ALWAYS FACTORY SET.
JP14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION JUMPER FACTORY SET FOR NORMAL MODE. REMOVED FOR MOBILE APPLICATION.
JP15 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

JUMPERS FACTORY REMOVED FOR NORMAL MODE.
MODE SET FOR MOBILE APPLICATION
APPLICATION.
JP19 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION JUMPER FACTORY SET IN “A” POSITION (SER IN “B” ONLY FOR A3024-32 BOARD)
JP21 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION JP21, JP22 :

POS A -- RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
POS.
JP22 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION POS. B -- RS422 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
SW1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 4 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
SW2 TEST 4 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
SW3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH NOT USED -- ALL SWITCHES IN “OFF” POSITION
SW4 NOT USED 4 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH NOT USED
112 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
LEDs
WATCH--DOG TIMER OPERATION INDICATOR :

DS1 YELLOW LED ON INSURES THE MICROPROCESSOR AND SOFTWARE IS
WORKING CORRECTLY
CONSOLE MICROPROCESSOR OPERATION INDICATOR :

DS2 YELLOW COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE HT CONTROLLER
AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH OF ABOUT 2
PER SECOND.
RELAYS
K1 +12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST PREP ORDER
K2 +12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST EXP ORDER
K3 +12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST AUTO OFF
DIGITAL SYSTEM PREP -- EXTERNAL

K4 +12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPDT
SYNCHRONISM SELECTION
5.8 FLUORO CPU BOARD
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
W1 JUMPER INSTALLED FOR ABC DISABLE

W1 ABC SELECTION
W1 JUMPER REMOVED FOR ABC ENABLE
W2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION W2 JUMPER ALWAYS INSTALLED
LEDs
FLUORO MICROPROCCESOR OPERATION INDICATOR :

DS1 YELLOW FLASHING WHEN TUBE-2 IS SELECTED AND THERE IS
COMMUNICATION WITH CONSOLE CPU BOARD.
TR-1005R4 113
Troubleshooting
5.9 FLUORO -- RF ADAPTATION BOARD
5.9.1 RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--03)
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER POSITION DESCRIPTION
Remove all
JP1, JP3, JP4, 230 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
jumpers
JP8 JP9,
JP8, JP9 JP10,
JP10
JP12, JP13, JP14 Set only JP1,
JP8 and JP12

JP2

JP5

JP6

JP7

JP11

JP15

JP16

JP17

JP18
A Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the Line sync.
JP19 B Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the TV Camera sync.
C Pulsed Fluoro sync. from an external sync. (digital, etc.)
A For ABC OUT signal from the video in
JP20 B For ABC OUT signal from a negative System ABC signal
C For ABC OUT signal from a positive System ABC signal
A ABC OUT signal generated from a System ABC signal

JP21
B ABC OUT signal incoming directly from the System
Set When JP21 in position A

JP22
Removed When JP21 in position B
Set Normal position

JP23
Removed To reduce noise in the ABC circuitry
114 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.9.2 RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--04)
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER POSITION DESCRIPTION
Set all jumpers +24 VDC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
JP1, JP3, JP4, Remove all

JP8,, JP9,, JP10,, jumpers
JP12 JP13,
JP12, JP13 JP14
Set only JP1,
JP8 and JP12

JP2

JP5

JP6

JP7

JP11

JP15

JP16

JP17

JP18
A Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the Line sync.
JP19 B Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the TV Camera video.
C Pulsed Fluoro sync. from an external sync. (TV Camera, digital, etc.)
A For ABC OUT signal from the video in
JP20 B For ABC OUT signal from a negative System ABC signal
C For ABC OUT signal from a positive System ABC signal
A ABC OUT signal generated from a System ABC signal

JP21
B ABC OUT signal incoming directly from the System
Set When JP21 in position A

JP22
Removed When JP21 in position B
Set Normal position

JP23
Removed To reduce noise in the ABC circuitry
A Normal position
JP24
B For Fluoro order enable
TR-1005R4 115
Troubleshooting
5.10 AEC CONTROL BOARD
5.10.1 AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--01/02/05)
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JP1 A FOR TV CAMERA

B FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER
C FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG
A3012-05:
A3012 05: JP1
JP1-C,
C JP2-A
JP2 A AND JP4
JP4-B
B FOR FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG
ATS DIG
JP2 A FOR TV CAMERA A3012-02: JP1-A, JP2-A AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA
B FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER A3012-01: JP1-B,, JP2-B AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP4 A FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER -- AEC

B FOR ION CHAMBER -- AEC & ATS--DIG
POTENTIOMETERS
R10 10K, 1/2w LOW SENSIBILITY ION CHAMBER ADJUSTMENT
R11 10K, 1/2w KVP DOWN WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
R12 10K, 1/2w KVP UP WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
116 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.10.2 AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--06/07/09)
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JP1 A FOR TV CAMERA JP1-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA

B FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER JP1-B FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER
C EXTERNAL kV CONTROL JP1-C FOR ABC WITH EXTERNAL kV UP & DOWN CONTROL
JP3 B FOR NORMAL OPERATION JP3-B FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP4 A FOR NORMAL OPERATION JP4-A FOR NORMAL OPERATION (Only in A3012-06)
POTENTIOMETERS
R10 10K, 1/2w PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR CINE MODE
R11 10K, 1/2w KVP DOWN WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
R12 10K, 1/2w PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR RAD OR DSA MODE
R13 10K, 1/2w PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR FLUORO MODE
R14 10K, 1/2w KVP UP WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
R22 10K, 1/2w LOW SENSIBILITY ION CHAMBER ADJUSTMENT
R23 10K, 1/2w PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR DSI MODE
TR-1005R4 117
Troubleshooting
5.11 AEC ADAPTATION BOARD
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03)
JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER TYPE
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4 B B B
IC1 = IC2 B A A
JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER OUTPUT
NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT A A A A

TP1 -- R11 TP2 -- R8 TP4 -- R2 TP12 -- R5
118 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.12 LF-RAC BOARD (LOW SPEED STARTER)
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
TB2 -- T1 TUBE 1 STATOR SUPPLY JUMPER WITH TB1--7, 8, 9 : 330 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 STATOR
VOLTAGE SELECTION JUMPER WITH TB1--4, 5, 6 : 220 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 STATOR
TB2 -- T2 TUBE 2 STATOR SUPPLY JUMPER WITH TB1--7, 8, 9 : 330 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 STATOR
VOLTAGE SELECTION JUMPER WITH TB1--4, 5, 6 : 220 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 STATOR
TB3 -- T1 TUBE 1 STATOR SHIFT JUMPER WITH TB1--11, 12, 13 : 30 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 AUXILIARY
CAPACITOR SELECTION JUMPER WITH TB1--14, 15, 16 : 15 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 AUXILIARY
TB3 -- T2 TUBE 2 STATOR SHIFT JUMPER WITH TB1--11, 12, 13 : 30 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 AUXILIARY
CAPACITOR SELECTION JUMPER WITH TB1--14, 15, 16 : 15 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 AUXILIARY
JUMPER WITH TB1--21, 22, 23 : 115 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 FAN
TB4 -- T1 TUBE 1 FAN VOLTAGE SELECTION
TB4 -- T2 TUBE 2 FAN VOLTAGE SELECTION
LEDs
DS1 YELLOW ROTOR ACCELERATION STATUS INDICATOR
DS2 YELLOW TUBE 2 SELECTION INDICATOR
DS3 YELLOW ROTOR BRAKE STATUS INDICATOR
ROTOR CURRENT STATUS INDICATOR :

DS4 YELLOW HIGH BRIGHTNESS WHEN THE ROTOR ACCELERATION, AND
NORMAL BRIGHTNESS IN THE ROTOR RUN STATUS
FUSES
F1 6 A, 250 V, S.B. 220 VAC ROTOR
RELAYS
K1 / KACC +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 2 Fom C ROTOR ACCELERATION
K2 / KCT +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 3 Form C TUBE 2 SELECTION (FROM HT CONTROLLER)
K3 / KBR +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 2 Fom C ROTOR BRAKE
K4 / KCTR +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 4 Form C TUBE 2 SELECTION (COILS)
K5 / KCTRR +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 3 Form C TUBE 2 SELECTION (FANS & HV TRANSF--SWITCH)
TR-1005R4 119
Troubleshooting
5.13 LV-DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
5.13.1 DELAYED SWITCH-OFF BOARD
RELAYS
K1 +12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST SWITCH-OFF DELAYED
K2 +12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST SWITCH-OFF MAINTAINED
5.13.2 CONTROL DRAC BOARD
JUMPERS / SWITCHES
LEDs
DL1 RED ERROR STATUS
DL2 (flashing) YELLOW CODE STATUS
DL3 (ON) YELLOW READY
DL4 (ON) YELLOW TUBE 1 SELECTED
DL5 (ON) YELLOW TUBE 2 SELECTED
DL6 (ON) YELLOW DC BRAKE
DL7 (ON) YELLOW BUS DC+
DL8 (ON) YELLOW BUS DC--
RELAYS
RL2 +12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST READY
120 TR-1005R4
Troubleshooting
5.13.3 INTERFACE DRAC--HF BOARD
LEDs
DS1 GREEN BUS DC
FUSES
F1 0.5 A, 250 V, S.B. 220 VAC 220 SUPPLY
F2 0.5 A, 250 V, S.B. 220 VAC 220 SUPPLY
F3 15 A, 250 V, S.B. 220 VAC BUS DC--
F4 15 A, 250 V, S.B. 220 VAC BUS DC+
5.13.4 DRAC MISCELLANEOUS
RELAYS
K1 RELAY +24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 3 Fom C TUBE 1 SELECTED
K3 CONTACTOR +24VDC COIL, 15A/250V CONTACT, 3NA DC BRAKE
KT1 CONTACTOR +24VDC COIL, 15A/250V CONTACT, 3NA TUBE 1 SELECTED
TR-1005R4 121
Troubleshooting
5.14 CABINET MISCELLANEOUS FOR LINE POWERED GENERATORS
FUSES
F2 1.5 A, 250 V, S.B. 220 VAC 220 VAC SUPPLY LOCATION -- RECTIFIER PANEL
F3 50 A, 600 V, S.B. LINE LINE -- L1 LOCATION -- CABINET FRAME
F4 50 A, 600 V, S.B. LINE LINE -- L2 ” ”
F5 50 A, 600 V, S.B. LINE LINE -- L3 ” ”
F6 3 A, 250 V, S.B. 19 VAC +24V SUPPLY LOCATION -- RECTIFIER PANEL
F7 3 A, 250 V, S.B. 10.4 VAC +12V UNR SUPPLY ” ”
F8 3 A, 250 V, S.B. 115 VAC 115 VAC SUPPLY ” ”
F9 0.4 A, 250 V, S.B. 220 VAC 220 VAC LVDC LOCATION -- FRONT PANEL
F12 10 A, 250 V, S.B. LINE INPUT TRANSFORMER LOCATION -- BACK PANEL
F13 10 A, 250 V, S.B. LINE INPUT TRANSFORMER ” ”
F14 10 A, 250 V, S.B. LINE LINE OUTPUT -- U LOCATION -- CABINET FRAME
F15 10 A, 250 V, S.B. LINE LINE OUTPUT -- V ” ”
F16 10 A, 250 V, S.B. LINE LINE OUTPUT -- W ” ”
NOTE.-- FUSES F14, F15, F16 ARE ONLY INSTALLED IN VERTICAL GENERATOR CABINET, NEVER IN COMPACT MODEL.
RELAYS
K1 SOLID STATE RELAY +24VDC INPUT, 10A/250V OUTPUT ROTOR START RELAY
K3 110VAC COIL, 12A/250V CONTACT, 4PDT POWER INPUT RELAY
K5 CONTACTOR +24VDC COIL, 50A/600V CONTACT, 3 POLE LINE CONTACTOR
K6 CONTACTOR +24VDC COIL, 50A/600V CONTACT, 3 POLE CHARGE CONTACTOR
122 TR-1005R4
MA-1004R4
Maintenance
Maintenance
REVISION HISTORY
0 APR 1, 2001 First edition
1 DEC 20, 2001 Text revision
2 APR 15, 2005 Review of Maintenance procedures
3 DEC 12, 2005 Reference to Calibration Chapter
4 MAR 26, 2008 Calibration of Touch Screen Sensor
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.

MA-1004R4
Maintenance
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.3.1 External Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3.2 Internal Cabinet Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3.3 Internal Touch Screen Console Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4 Cable Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.4.1 Ground Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.4.2 AC Power Supply in X-ray Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.5 Control Console Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.5.1 Touch Screen Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.6 HV Transformer Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.7 X-ray Tube Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.8 Radiographic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2.8.1 Test for kV Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.8.2 Test for Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.8.3 Test for Digital mA Loop Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.9 AEC Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.9.1 Optical Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.9.2 kV Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.9.3 ATS Digital AEC (RAD) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.10 Fluoro Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.11 ABC Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3 SPECIAL MAINTENANCE RELATED TO BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS 21
3.1 Battery Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2 Battery Charger Test and Battery Condition Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
i MA-1004R3
Maintenance
ii MA-1004R3
Maintenance
The purpose of this Periodic Maintenance is to assure continued safe

performance of the X-ray Generator, to increase serviceability, to reduce the
costs (down time, repairs, etc.) and to assure the safety (personal risk).
The following checks and maintenance procedures, together with the

suggested intervals, are the manufacturer’s recommendation for the most
effective Periodic Maintenance schedule for this Generator.
Service tasks here described must be performed exclusively by service

personnel specifically trained on medical X-ray Generators.
The first Periodic Maintenance Service should be performed six (6) months
after installation, and the subsequent services every twelve (12) months.
Periodic Maintenance Service depends on the working load of the Generator
and X-ray Tube.
Note . Take note in the Data Book all the periodic maintenance services
carried out and the data changes made during any maintenance
service.
MA-1004R4 1
Maintenance
2 MA-1004R4
Maintenance
SECTION 2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
When any major component, such as a X-ray Tube,

HV Transformer or major circuit board, is replaced in the
system, perform the respective Configuration and
Calibration procedures.
Update and take note in the Data Book any new data entered
in memory.
If the HT Control Board or the ATP Console CPU Board is

Extended Memory data with the values noted in the Data
Book.

Before starting the periodic maintenance procedures, it is recommended to

make a test exposure using the same operating factors and conditions as a
typical exposure.
Perform the X-ray tube warm-up procedure if the tube has not been in use for
approximately one hour. (Refer to Operator Manual of the Console).
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
The tools and test equipment required to perform the Periodic Maintenance
Service are the same as specified in “Installation” document.
MA-1004R4 3
Maintenance
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH

VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL
CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON
THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF,

IGBTS.


OF THE EQUIPMENT.
4 MA-1004R4
Maintenance
BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR:

POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG.
WHEN IT DOES NOT WORK WITH STAND-ALONE, IT IS

POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN
THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT
IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE
WHEN IT WORKS WITH OPTIONAL STAND-ALONE IT IS

POWERED ON IN ALL SITUATIONS. WHEN THE UNIT IS
TURNED ON, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE

OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CONTACTOR 6K5, LINE
FUSES, BATTERY CHARGER BOARD, LINE MONITOR
BOARD, BATTERY MONITOR BOARD, ENERGY GUARD
BOARD AND STAND-ALONE BOARD) ARE PERMANENTLY
POWERED ON AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL
OF THE BATTERIES (APPROX. 400 VDC) ALTHOUGH THE
UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL
AREA.
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR:

POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG. IT IS POWERED ON
UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM
ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT IS
POWERED, THE NEON (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE

OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CAPACITOR OF HV
INVERTER, STORAGE CAPACITORS MODULE, LINE FUSES,
DC BUS FUSES, ETC.) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON
AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE
CAPACITORS (APPROX. 800 VDC), ALTHOUGH THE UNIT IS
DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL
AREA.
MA-1004R4 5
Maintenance
2.3 GENERAL CLEANING
NEVER ATTEMPT TO CLEAN OR HANDLE ANY PART OF THE

X-RAY GENERATOR WHEN IT IS TURNED ON. SWITCH OFF
THE GENERATOR MAIN DISCONNECT BEFORE CLEANING
OR INSPECTING.
2.3.1 EXTERNAL SURFACES
Clean external covers and surfaces frequently, particularly if corroding

chemicals are present and specially parts in contact with the patient, with a cloth
moistened in warm water with mild soap solution. Rinse wipe with a cloth
moistened in clean water. Do not use cleaners or solvents of any kind.
Clean Console keyboard and displays with a cloth dampened in warm water.
Rinse wipe with a cloth dampened in clean water.
Also check painted surfaces for scratching and touch up as required.
2.3.2 INTERNAL CABINET CLEANING
Remove the external access cover from the Generator Cabinet.
Visually inspect all major components for dust or foreign items. Search carefully
to detect objects which might cause short circuits and for loose connections.
If excess dust is present, clean the interior of the Generator Cabinet using a dry
brush or vacuum cleaner. Make sure that the fans operate properly and the vent
holes of the cabinet are not obstructed.
2.3.3 INTERNAL TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE CLEANING
MAKE SURE THAT THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE IS

POWERED OFF OR UNPLUGGED.
Remove the front cover of the Touch Screen Console.
Visually inspect internally for dust or foreign items. Search carefully to detect
objects which might cause short circuits and for loose connections.
If excess dust is present, clean the interior of the Touch Screen Console using
a dry brush or vacuum cleaner. Make sure that the fans operate properly and
the vent holes are not obstructed.
Clean the Touch Screen sensor with an isopropyl alcohol and water solution
ratio of 50:50 , always damp the lint-free cloth and then clean the screen. Spray
the cleaning liquid onto the cloth, never spray directly on the screen.
6 MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.4 CABLE CHECKS
CAREFULLY HANDLE ALL INTERNAL PARTS OF THE UNIT.
Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure and that all cable
clamps and strain reliefs are in place. Also check that connectors do not have
exposed wire-veins and check cable sheaths (cable cover) for wear and fraying.
Check that all cables are correctly routed.
2.4.1 GROUND CABLE CONNECTIONS
The central reference ground of the X-ray System and Generator is located at
Check the ground lead interconnections continuity using a multimeter at its

lowest ohms range.
2.4.2 AC POWER SUPPLY IN X-RAY ROOM
Measure the value of AC power supply between all phases, neutral and ground.
Check that these values comply with the tolerances established at the original
installation.
MA-1004R4 7
Maintenance
2.5 CONTROL CONSOLE CONDITION
Check the proper connection and condition of the cables connected to the
Console.
If applicable, check the Handswitch condition. Verify that the Handswitch cable
and its connection to the Console are in good condition.
Check correct operation of the buttons, displays and indicators by performing

the following test:
1. Turn the Generator / Console ON.
2. If the Console is a Touch Screen Console, touch on different points of the

operator application on the Touch Screen to check that the Touch Screen
Sensor is properly calibrated. If it is not calibrated, perform the procedure
described in Section 2.5.1 -- Touch Screen Sensor Calibration.
3. If applicable, check the Handswitch condition. Verify that the Handswitch

cable and its connection to the Console are in good condition.
4. Select a radiographic technique and observe:
G Indicators of the selected workstation and Focal Spot.
G Technique parameters are displayed on the Console. Change

technique parameters and observe that changes are correctly
displayed.
G Select the parameters for an usual exposure. Press “Prep” and

verify that the “Ready” indicator is activated. Release “Prep” and
observe that the “Ready” indicator is deactivated.
G Make the exposure, and verify that radiographic exposure signal

sounds and the “Prep” and “X-ray On” indicators are activated
during the exposure.
5. If AEC is installed, select a technique with AEC and observe that the
indicators of the selected AEC controls are activated.
6. If APR is installed, select an APR technique and observe:
G Indicators of the selected Patient Size are activated and the Body
Region / Anatomical Views are shown on the APR Display and its
corresponding parameters are shown on the RAD Display.
G Change the APR technique and observe that selection and

parameters changes on both Displays.
8 MA-1004R4
Maintenance
7. If Fluoro is installed, select a workstation for Fluoro operation and

observe:
G Fluoro parameters are displayed on the Fluoro Display.
G Change the Fluoro kV and observe that changes are correctly

displayed.
G Check selection of another functions related to Fluoro if they are

present (ABC, PPS, etc.).
2.5.1 TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR CALIBRATION
Note . This calibration procedure only applies to Touch Screen Console.
If required to calibrate the Sensor of the Touch Screen because the buttons can
not be properly selected or because the Compact Flash has been changed,
perform the next procedure:
CALIBRATION FOR AN “ELO” TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR
2. Press the “Start--Windows” button on the keyboard connected to the

Touch Screen Console, then select (double-click):
“Settings / Control Panel / EloTouchscreen”.
3. Execute the “Align” program and follow the process touching on the
indicated places. Click on “Yes” and “OK”, then close the “Control Panel”.
4. Return to the Application through “Start” and select: “Programs / Start up

(select the first one) / Console”.
CALIBRATION FOR A “3M” TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR
2. On the PC Desktop, press the“Start-Windows” button on the keyboard

connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select: “Programs / UPDD
/ Calibrate”.
3. Execute the “Calibrate” program and follow the process clicking on the
indicated places.
4. When finish this calibration, come back to the Application by entering

again in “Start” and select: “Programs / Start up (select the first one) /
Console”.
MA-1004R4 9
Maintenance
2.6 HV TRANSFORMER CONDITION
The HV Transformer contains “Shell Diala AX” oil.
Check that there is not oil leakage. If found, remove the oil fill plug from the top
of the HV Transformer and verify that the oil level is within 20 mm (3/4”) of the
top surface of the HV Transformer. If necessary add oil “Shell Diala AX”.
Note . This point does not apply to the hermetic HV Transfromers (black
aluminium HV Transformers).
Make sure that:
• HV oil in the HV Cable terminals is clean and shows no evidence of

arcing.
• HV Cable terminal rings are tight.
2.7 X-RAY TUBE CONDITION
Make sure that:
• All parts are mechanically secure with no oil leaks.
• HV grease on the HV Cable terminals is clean and shows no evidence

of arcing.
• HV Cable terminal rings are tight.
10 MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.8 RADIOGRAPHIC PARAMETERS
With the generator power OFF, connect:
G Non-invasive kV Meter to measure kV.
G mAs Meter to the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer

to measure mA or mAs (connect the mAs Meter for Digital mA
Loops calibration).
Note . Test points on the HT Controller PCB can also be used to monitor
the kV and mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the
unit. These test points must be checked with scope. (Refer to
Calibration chapter -- Section 2 “Calibration Procedures”, for test
points and scale factors).
2.8.1 TEST FOR kV LOOP
1. Verify that dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board is in “Off”

position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
2. Turn the Generator ON and select the “Direct” (No Bucky) workstation in
one of the X-ray Tubes.
3. Select 80 kV, 200 mA (or the first mA station for Large Focus), 100 ms.
Make an exposure and note the kV at the end of the exposure.
4. Check that the kV value read on the kV Meter must be 80 ±1 kV.
If the kV value does not comply with the above value, perform the
respective Calibration procedures.
MA-1004R4 11
Maintenance
2.8.2 TEST FOR DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN
1. Set the dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “On”

position (Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).
Note . Only for Generators with LF-RAC (LSS):
-- When the mA Loop is open (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in “On”), the

rotor runs for two minutes after release the handswitch
push-button from “Preparation” position.
-- When the mA Loop is closed (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in “Off”),

the Tube will brake after release the handswitch push-button from
“Preparation” position.
2. Enter in Manual Calibration selecting the “Direct” (No Bucky) workstation

of the corresponding X-ray Tube.
3. Select 80 kV and the following mA stations. Make an exposure and note

the mAs values read on the mAs Meter.
G Minimum mA for Small Focal Spot.
G Maximum mA for Small Focal Spot.
G Minimum mA for Large Focal Spot.
G Maximum mA for Large Focal Spot.
4. Check that the mAs values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mAs
displayed on the Console with a tolerance of ±6% mAs.
If the mAs values do not comply with the above values, perform the
respective Auto-Calibration procedures.
5. Repeat this test for the second X-ray Tube.
6. Turn the Generator OFF and set the dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT
Controller Board in “Off” position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
12 MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.8.3 TEST FOR DIGITAL mA LOOP CLOSED
1. Turn the Generator ON and select the “Direct” (No Bucky) workstation in
one of the X-ray Tubes.
2. Select the following parameters, make an exposure and note the mAs
values read on the mAs Meter.
G 80 kV, 100 ms, 50 mA.
G 80 kV, 100 ms, 200 mA.
3. Check that the mAs values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mAs
displayed on the Console with a tolerance of ±4% mAs.
4. If the mAs values do not comply with the above values, perform the
respective Auto-Calibration procedures.
5. Turn the Generator OFF.
2.9 AEC CHECKS
Note . For AEC calibration, use the same Film and Cassettes used by the
customer. AEC calibration must be performed using the Medium
Film/Screen speed combination. The Medium Film/Screen speed
has to be double of the Slow and half of the Fast (a.e. 200--Slow,
400--Medium, 800--Fast).
Note . When using CR (Computer Radiography) or DR (Digital

Radiography) instead of measuring Optical Density:
-- measure the Image Gray level by using the needed software

tools inside each application (refer CR or DR documentation).
-- or measure the Dose level:

-- For CR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the
Cassette and centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber.
-- For DR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the
Panel, centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber and with
the Grid removed.
MA-1004R4 13
Maintenance
2.9.1 OPTICAL DENSITY
Note . The Film Optical Density must be measured always on the same
point for all the X-ray Films developed during this procedure.
The recommended point is on the central axis of the Film with

relation of the Anode and Cathode and as close as possible to
center of the Film.
A K
USEFUL BEAM
DENSITOMETER FILM

4. Select a workstation for the Ion Chamber to be tested. Select on the

Console:
back-up time.
G AEC Menu: “Central Area”, “Density 0” and “Medium

Film/Screen”.
14 MA-1004R4
Maintenance
necessary, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA
station) and make the exposure again.

customer. Make an exposure, develop the film and check the Optical
Density, it should be 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density).
7. If the Optical Density is not as required, perform the respective AEC

Calibration procedure.
Generator.
2.9.2 kV COMPENSATION
1. Select a workstation for the Ion Chamber to be tested. Select on the

Console:
back-up time.

Film/Screen”.
2. Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check that the
Exposure Time is lower than 1 second. If necessary for that, change the
Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the
selected for 55 kV.
selected for 90 kV.
MA-1004R4 15
Maintenance
selected for 110 kV.

customer. Make an exposure at 55 kV and 90 kV (use the final Copper
thickness and the selected mA station noted before for each kV), develop
the film and measure the Optical Density obtained with those exposures.
Check that the film variation range is the same ±0.2 of the Optical
Density (or ±20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR)
obtained before at 70 kV (Optical Density Adjustment -- Section 2.9.1).
6. If the variation values is not as required, perform the respective AEC

Calibration procedure.
Generator.
2.9.3 ATS DIGITAL AEC (RAD) (OPTIONAL)
Note . If the Generator is interfaced with an “ATS Digital System”, Digital

AEC test has to be performed as explained in the “ATS Digital
System” documentation.
16 MA-1004R4
Maintenance
2.10 FLUORO CHECK
Fluoro functions are calibrated by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the Generator ON.
Make sure that the Small Filament of the X-ray tube is properly
warmed-up.
2. Set up a Dosimeter to measure the Maximum Entrance Skin Exposure

entire active volume within the primary beam. Place the Tube-Collimator
Assembly as close as possible to the Table-Top, fully open the Collimator
Blades and align the Image Intensifier with the light beam. Block radiation
input to Image Intensifier with a Lead Apron. (Refer to Illustration in
Fluoro Calibration).
Note . Note that in practice, the rejection limits for entrance exposure rate
must be somewhat less than the maximum specified due to
Dosimeter calibration accuracy.
REJECTIONS LIMITS
METER CALIBRATION
ACCURACY FOR 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) MAXIMUM FOR 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) MAXIMUM
±15% 4.25 R/min (37 mGy/min) 8.5 R/min (74 mGy/min)
3. For testing the Dose, make a Fluoro exposure at maximum kV and

measure the dose applied, it should not be over the Rejection Limits for
5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) or 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) (refer to the above
table).
In case that the value is not acquired, perform the respective Fluoro
calibration process.
MA-1004R4 17
Maintenance
4. The Fluoro mA values are obtained by measuring the average mA using

a mA meter in Fluoro.
During Fluoro exposure, mA values are read directly with a mA Meter in

DC connected to the mA Test Points (banana plug connections) on the
HV Transformer. Only for this purpose, remove the link between the
banana plug connections on the HV Transformer.
5. For testing the mA, make a Fluoro exposure at 50 kV, 80 kV and 110 kV.
Check that the mA values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mA
displayed on the Console with a tolerance of ±10 % mA. If the mA value
does not comply with the above values, perform the respective
Calibration procedures.
6. Remove the Dosimeter and the Lead Apron (Blocker).
2.11 ABC CHECK
Note . If the Generator is interfaced with an ATS Image System, ABC

testing procedure has to be performed as explained in the Image
System documentation.


beam.
18 MA-1004R4
Maintenance
4. Select ABC mode.

6. Make a Fluoro exposure and check that Fluoro kVp displayed on the
Console is between 80 kVp and 60 kVp. If it is more than 80 kV or less
than 60 kV modify the Copper thickness in steps of 0.1 mm (or 0.2 mm)
and make Fluoro exposures until the kVp is within the range.
7. Calculate the value of the optimum dose rate (that will give optimum
brightness) to obtain 2μR/frame at 9” FOV.
Examples:
For 25 frame/second optimum dose rate is 3 mR/min.
For 30 frame/second optimum dose rate is 3.6 mR/min.
The optimum dose rate (dose rate) value should be measured at Image
Intensifier Radiation Input. Intensifier grid should be removed, if it can
not be removed, this value should be multiplied by the value specified as
Grid Absorption Factor.
8. Make a Fluoro exposure and measure the dose rate. The dose rate read
on the Dosimeter must be the same as the previously calculated with the
tolerance specified by the Dosimeter accuracy. If the dose rate does not
comply, perform the respective Calibration procedures.
MA-1004R4 19
Maintenance
20 MA-1004R4
Maintenance
SECTION 3 SPECIAL MAINTENANCE RELATED TO

Note . This Section only applies to Battery Powered Generators and

must be performed at least once a year.
3.1 BATTERY STORAGE CONDITIONS
This generator should be stored at a dry environment around 20oC (68oF). The
recommended operating temperature is 15oC to 30oC (59oF to 86oF).
During normal storage conditions (dry environment at 20oC (68oF) the internal
resistance of the batteries will cause a discharge rate of 15% per six month
period. Storage above 30oC (86oF) should be avoided, since it will cause
excessive battery voltage loss.
Within the recommended operating temperature and under optimum float

conditions, the batteries service life is expected to exceed 5 years.
The batteries of the Unit are fully charged when delivered from the factory. If the
Unit is going to be stored or has been stored for a period longer than six months,
batteries must be fully charged during eight hours before operation or service
tasks.
If the unit has not been used or it has been stored for six
months, it should be installed and/or energized to prevent
deep discharge of the batteries. A deep discharge will cause
permanent damage to the batteries. Perform the following
Maintenance Tests.
3.2 BATTERY CHARGER TEST AND BATTERY CONDITION TEST
Refer to Section 2.6 “Procedures related to the Battery Powered Generators”

of the Troubleshooting document in the Service Manual and perform all the
indicated procedures to carry out a correct maintenance of the Battery Charger
Board and Batteries.
MA-1004R4 21
Maintenance
22 MA-1004R4
SC-1005R0
Schematics
Schematics
REVISION HISTORY
Refer to each schematic
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.

SC-1005R0
Schematics
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sch. No. Scheme
POWER CABINET
54302010 Compact Generator (for 2 Tubes or HS with LV-DRAC)
A3274--01 Delayed Switch-Off PCB (only used with HS generators)
A3000--xx HT Controller PCB (12 bits)
A3004--xx Filament Control PCB
A3009--xx Interface Control PCB
A3063--03 IPM Driver PCB
A3212--01 Charge / Discharge Monitor PCB
A3024--xx ATP Console PCB -- Console CPU PCB
A3012--01/02/05 AEC Control PCB
SC-1005R0 i
F E D C B A
POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER --PWR OFF

Note.-- Input Transformer 6T2 could be as shown on ( S3,S4--C4) 6J2
6T2 3F2 sheet 2 of the schematic for input line below 400 VAC 240 VAC SW --PWR ON
LVDC POWER SUPPLY +5V 4
T 1.5A --PWR OFF
44 530 VAC 240 VAC 20 9 5 +5V +12V 5
3LF3 1 3PS1 7 --12V --PWR ON
+12V 3
480 VAC 115 VAC SW 2 10 +12V
10 1 3 3F9 jumper
connect 14 3 --12V 9
3F8 T 0.4A 8 --12V
according 9 440 VAC T 3A 3K3 4 GND 2
2 4 9 +12V UNR
4 with the 115 VAC 18 115 VAC jumper 4
input line 13 8
7 415 VAC 6 +12V UNR
( S3,S4--B3) 6
GND
POWER 8 400 VAC 7
LAMP 0 VAC 17 0 VAC GND
1
5 230 VAC GND
3F6
T 3A
6NL1 4 21 VAC 15
3TS1
0 VAC 14 1 ohm 54
+24V--PSU +24V 240 VAC SPLY
4w
40 110 VAC -- + 10 6 17
3F7 -- + 3BR2 +24V
T 3A 3BR4
11 VAC 12 11 7 3K3 16
3C7 3C6 --12 V
2400 MF 2400 MF 15 +12 V
0 VAC 11 26
240 VAC SW 240 VAC SW
27
3 28 VAC 35 + 115 VAC SW 115 VAC SW 3
-- 3BR1
26 VAC 34
24 VAC 16
3 24 VAC TR
60 VAC 22 VAC 33 12 8 ( S5--F2)
20 VAC 32 +SUPPLY
0 VAC TR
16 VAC 31 ( S3,S4--E1)
2 14 VAC 30 --SUPPLY
12 VAC 19
1 0 VAC 0 VAC 13
Shield Stud
T3 L3
0 VAC RTR
60 VAC RTR ( S8--F4) THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO THREE PHASE GENERATOR
230 VAC RTR
6F13
T 10A
6F12 6R1
20 ohm
T 10A
100w AC1 + BUS +
6F3 6LF1 ( S5--F2)
2 T 50A C3 CR1 CR2 CR3 2
L1 T1 1 nF R1 R3 R5
L1
33 ohm 33 ohm 33 ohm
6F4 C4
T 50A 470 nF C1 C5 C9
MAINS
LOAD
L2 L2 T2 L2 T2 C12
470 nF 470 nF 470 nF
470 nF
6F5 AC2
T 50A
L3 L3 T3 L3 T3
C7
GND 1 nF
C2 C6 C10
C8
NEUTRAL 470 nF 470 nF 470 nF
470 nF
12TS4 Note.- 12TS4, 12F14, 12F15, DELAYED R2 R4 R6
N and 12F16 are optional +24V 33 ohm 33 ohm 33 ohm
AC3 BUS --
U 12F14 A2(B) C11 -- ( S5--F2)
1
T 15A 1 nF INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD
V 12F15 6K6
A1(A) 5A5
W 12F16 T 15A
1 T 15A
+24V--PSU --CHRG DR NAME DATE SHEET / OF
A2(B)
( S3,S4--D4)
DWG:
54302010
6J3 1/8
6K5 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 C B A REV
10 A1(A) C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
--LINE CONT --LINE CONT
( S3,S4--B4) B CN 03/46,55,58,60 F. GARCIA 09/04/03
SEDECAL COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC
A CN 02/197 F. GARCIA 12/12/02
GENERATOR
F E D C B A
POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER --PWR OFF

Note.-- Input Transformer 6T2 could be as shown on sheet 1 ( S3,S4--C4) 6J2
6T2 3F2 of the schematic for input line greater than 240 VAC 240 VAC SW --PWR ON
connect LVDC POWER SUPPLY +5V 4
T 1.5A --PWR OFF
according 7 240 VAC 240 VAC 20 9 5 +5V +12V 5
3LF3 1 3PS1 7 --12V --PWR ON
with the
+12V 3
input line 6 115 VAC SW 2 10 +12V
1 3 3F9 jumper
14 3 --12V 9
3F8 T 0.4A 8 --12V
T 3A 3K3 4 GND 2
115 VAC 18 2 4 9 +12V UNR
4 115 VAC jumper 4
13 8
POWER 6 +12V UNR
( S3,S4--B3) 6
LAMP
GND
5 230 VAC 7
0 VAC 17 0 VAC GND
6NL1 1
4 GND
3F6
T 3A
21 VAC 15
21 208 VAC 3TS1

0 VAC 14 54
23 120 VAC +24V--PSU 1 ohm +24V 240 VAC SPLY
4w
-- + 10 6 17
3F7 -- + 3BR2 +24V
3 110 VAC T 3A 3BR4
11 VAC 12 11 7 3K3 16
3C7 3C6 --12 V
8 2400 MF 2400 MF 15 +12 V
22 100 VAC 0 VAC 11 26
240 VAC SW 240 VAC SW
27
3 28 VAC 35 + 115 VAC SW 115 VAC SW 3
26 VAC --
34 3BR1
24 VAC 16
9 60 VAC 22 VAC 24 VAC TR
33 12 8 ( S5--F2)
20 VAC 32 0 VAC TR +SUPPLY
16 VAC 31 ( S3,S4--E1)
2 14 VAC 30
12 VAC 19 --SUPPLY
1 0 VAC 0 VAC 13
Shield Stud
L1 T1
0 VAC RTR
60 VAC RTR ( S8--F4)
230 VAC RTR
6F13
T 10A
6F12
T 10A 6R1 AC2 +
Note.- For Two Phases, replace 20 ohm, 100w BUS +
Neutral Cartidge (L2/N) by Fuse 6F4. C7 CR2 CR3 ( S5--F2)
2 6F3 6LF1 R3 R5 2
1 nF
T 50A 33 ohm 33 ohm
L1 L1 T1
MAINS
LOAD
Neutral or 6F4 C5 C9
Cartridge T 50A 470 nF 470 nF
L2 T2 L2 T2 C8
N / L2
470 nF
GND
C6 C10
12TS4 470 nF 470 nF
Note.- 12TS4, 12F14
N AC3
and 12F15, are optional
DELAYED R4 R6
V 12F15 +24V C11
33 ohm 33 ohm
1 nF
U T 15A 12F14 BUS --
A2(B) -- ( S5--F2) 1
W T 15A
+24V--PSU 6K6 INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD
A1(A)
A2(B) 5A5
--CHRG DR
6K5 ( S3,S4--D4)
1 6J3 A1(A) NAME DATE SHEET / OF
--LINE CONT
10 DRAWING F. GARCIA 30/09/02
DWG:
54302010
--LINE CONT 2/8
( S3,S4--B4) REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 C B A REV
C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO SINGLE PHASE GENERATOR B CN 03/46,55,58,60 F. GARCIA 09/04/03
A CN 02/197 F. GARCIA 12/12/02
SEDECAL COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC
GENERATOR
F E D
F E D C B A
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO GENERATORS WITH P5

INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD +5V
HT TRANSFORMER FOR TWO X--RAY TUBES 6
3A2 +5V +24V
8 +24V--PSU
P1 +24V
5
7 +24V
--PWR ON --PWR ON 16
( S1, 2--A4 ) 8 +24V DELAYED +24V
--PWR OFF --PWR OFF 2
P2 HT CONTROL BOARD P1 4 DELAYED +24V
4 --12V PT CRL 4
1 3A1 10 1 --LINE CONT ( S1, 2--E1 )
+12V --12V HT--C CLK 3 --LINE CONT
--ON 4 +5V OUT (S5--F3)
2 +12V 11 See NOTE 2 --TUBE 2 SCL +5V OUT
+5V HT--C DAT 2
( S8--F1) +12V GND 12
6J3 3 +5V 12 --T2 SCL 6 DISCHARGE 1 DISCHARGE 1
--TUBE 2 SCL +12V
( S8--F1) 14
(S5--A2)
4 GND 13 1 DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 1 RTN
7 --FIL1 SCL GND
PT CRL 5 GND 14 13
--START --START DISCHARGE 2 DISCHARGE 2
15 ( S8--F1) 10 6J3
--KV UP 15 P3 DISCHARGE 2 RTN DISCHARGE 2 RTN
--PRE CHRG +24V 9 9
8 P1 16
--KV DWN --CHRG DR --CHRG DR 4 GND LINE SYNC
3 1 ( S1, 2--E1 ) +24V 12
HT--C DAT --KV UP 17 2 --BUCKY EXP
6 2 --KV DWN --TUBE 3 GND P3 14
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
HT--C CLK 1 3 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD
1 6 --EXP GND LINE SYNC 11
--EXP P3 ERROR DRAC --BUCKY 2 DR CMD --BUCKY 2 DR CMD
2 4 C--HT DAT 6 ( S3--A2 ) P4 16
C--HT DAT ERROR DRAC P2 GND
5 5 C--HT CLK 1 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 12 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 1
C--HT CLK --KV DR1 --KV DR1 PT SPLY
4 3 --PREP 2 ( S5--F3)
--PREP --KV DR2 --KV DR2 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 13 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 3 3TS1
IC SPLY 1
9 4 9 5 39
GND --FIL DR1 BUCKY SPLY IC SPLY 2 PT SPLY
7 5 5 AUX BUCKY SPLY 7 42
--PREP --CHRG --FIL DR2 IC GND IC GND
3 8 3 3
( S3--A1) --FIL 1 ACK GND 11 --BUCKY 1 MOTION 2 --ROOM LIGHT
--ROOM LIGHT
10 --BUCKY 2 MOTION 4 (S5--B4) 48
--CHRG ROOM LIGHT SW ROOM LIGHT SW
( S5--A2) P4 P5 8 6 47
BUCKY 1 DR ROOM LIGHT SUP ROOM LIGHT SUP
3 5 7
RTR I RTR I BUCKY 2 DR 18
8 --RTR RUN GND
( S8--F1) FIL I 7 18 P4
--ACC --TUBE 2 SCL
4 See NOTE 2 6 19 6
--BRAKE --FIL 1 SCL --BUCKY EXP
1 --KV 9 17 2 115 VAC (S1,2--E4)
115 VAC
--HS SCL FIL PREHEAT 1
2 +KV 4 14 0 VAC NOTE 1.-- For Generators with HT
0 VAC
--RTR RDY FIL RTN 115 VAC SW Transformer for two Tubes:
3TS1 6 --MA 3 3
-- IGBT FAULT 22 115 VAC SW Wires FL 1 RTN (P4--15) and FL 2 RTN
2 -- IGBT FAULT --FIL 1 ACK 15
7 1 ( S5--D3) (P4--16) are factory inverted on the
BUCKY SPLY +MA -- AUTO OFF INH FIL 1 RTN
9 5 10 See NOTE 1 16 INTERFACE CONTROL
BUCKY SPLY GND HI MA FIL 2 RTN
46 20 --BRAKE
AUX BUCKY SPLY SOL DR (S8--F1)
5
--BUCKY 1 MOTION
12 --ACC
--BUCKY 2 MOTION (S8--F1) 6J1
4
BUCKY 1 DR +24V 10
2 11 + 24V 2
BUCKY 2 DR J1 HT TRANSFORMER 8
3 ERROR DRAC ERROR DRAC
0 VAC K 9HT1 ( S3--D3 ) 9
HI MA GND
10 0 VAC A
0 VAC GND 1
6 P3 --RTR RUN
BUCKY 1 MOT RTN B
+KV 2
7 DELAYED P1 2 Red --TUBE 1 RTR
GND FIL PREHEAT C mA
--KV 3
BUCKY 2 MOT RTN
13
+24V 5
6
--FIL DR1 FIL RTN
1
4
D
+MA ] posts
test
4
--TUBE 2 RTR
--HS SCL
14 +5V --FIL DR2 FIL SUP E
GND --MA Black 5
3 --TUBE 2 SCL F --RTR RDY
1 +5V FIL 1 RTN
SUPPLY (BUCKY 1) 8 (S8--F1) 6
DELAYED +24V H --SF PREP --SF PREP
8 J1 FIL 2 RTN ( S5--B4)
SUPPLY (BUCKY 2) 7 HT SW CONTROL P1 HT DR1 7
FIL I G --FL EXP --FL EXP
10A2 1 FIL SUP ( S5--C4 ) 12
1 J2 N --PREP
GND 2 SW COM
1 P3 HT DR2 --PREP 11
U GND
2 3 SW1 ( S5--C4 ) ( S5--F3) 1
P2 FILAMENT V
3 4 SW2 COM 6J3
4 DRIVER 0 VAC SHLD
+SUPPLY +SUPPLY 5 J ( S5--E2 )
BOARD +24V 4 240 VAC SW --HT INTLK 13
( S1, 2--B3 ) 1 --HT INTLK
--SUPPLY --SUPPLY 3A3
1
NOTE 2 :
DWG:
54302010
--T2 SCL signal is shortcircuited with --TUBE 2 SCL signal for High Speed Version 3/8
--ACC and --BRAKE signals for Low Speed Version become --TUBE 1 RTR and C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
--TUBE 2 RTR respectively for High Speed Version B
A
CN 03/46,55,58,60
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
12/12/02 SEDECAL COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC
6J1 connector used only for High Speed Version ( See LV DRAC documentation )
GENERATOR
F E D C B A
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO GENERATORS WITH
P5
HT TRANSFORMER FOR ONLY ONE X--RAY TUBE INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD +5V
6
3A2 +5V +24V
8
P1 +24V +24V--PSU
5
7 +24V
--PWR ON --PWR ON 16
( S1, 2--A4 ) 8 +24V DELAYED +24V
--PWR OFF --PWR OFF 2
P2 HT CONTROL BOARD P1 4 DELAYED +24V
4 --12V PT CRL --LINE CONT ( S1, 2--E1 ) 4
1 3A1 10 1
+12V --12V HT--C CLK 3 --LINE CONT
--ON 4 +5V OUT
2 +12V 11 See NOTE 2 --TUBE 2 SCL +5V OUT ( S5--F3 )
+5V HT--C DAT 2
( S8--F1 ) +12V GND 12
6J3 3 +5V 12 --T2 SCL 6 DISCHARGE 1 DISCHARGE 1
--TUBE 2 SCL
( S5--A2 )
( S8--F1 ) +12V 14
4 GND 13 1 DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 1 RTN
7 --FIL1 SCL GND
PT CRL 5 GND 14 13
--START --START DISCHARGE 2 DISCHARGE 2
15 ( S8--F1 ) 10 6J3
--KV UP 15 P3 DISCHARGE 2 RTN DISCHARGE 2 RTN
8 --PRE CHRG +24V 9 9
--KV DWN P1 16 --CHRG DR GND LINE SYNC
--CHRG DR 4 +24V
3 1 ( S1, 2--E1 ) 12
HT--C DAT --KV UP 17 2 --BUCKY EXP
6 2 --KV DWN --TUBE 3 GND P3 14
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
HT--C CLK 1 3 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD
1 6 --EXP GND LINE SYNC 11
--EXP P3 ERROR DRAC --BUCKY 2 DR CMD --BUCKY 2 DR CMD
2 4 C--HT DAT 6 ( S4--A2 ) P4 16
C--HT DAT ERROR DRAC P2 GND
5 5 C--HT CLK 1 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 12 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 1
C--HT CLK --KV DR1 --KV DR1 PT SPLY
4 3 --PREP 2 ( S5--F3 )
--PREP --KV DR2 --KV DR2 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 13 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 3 3TS1
IC SPLY 1
9 4 9 5 39
GND --FIL DR1 BUCKY SPLY IC SPLY 2 PT SPLY
7 5 5 AUX BUCKY SPLY 7 42
--PREP --CHRG --FIL DR2 IC GND IC GND
3 8 3 3
( S4--A1 ) --FIL 1 ACK GND 11 --BUCKY 1 MOTION 2 --ROOM LIGHT
--ROOM LIGHT
10 --BUCKY 2 MOTION 4 ( S5--B4 ) 48
--CHRG ROOM LIGHT SW ROOM LIGHT SW
( S5--A2 ) P4 P5 8 6 47
BUCKY 1 DR ROOM LIGHT SUP ROOM LIGHT SUP
3 5 7
RTR I RTR I BUCKY 2 DR 18
8 --RTR RUN GND
( S8--F1 ) FIL I 7 18 P4
--ACC --TUBE 2 SCL
4 See NOTE 2 6 19 6
--BRAKE --FIL 1 SCL --BUCKY EXP
1 --KV 2 115 VAC (S1,2--E4) NOTE 1.-- Only for one FL tube :
9 17 115 VAC
--HS SCL FIL PREHEAT Wires FL 1 RTN (P4--15) and FL 2
2 +KV 4 1 0 VAC
14 0 VAC RTN (P4--16) are factory inverted on
--RTR RDY FIL RTN 115 VAC SW
3TS1 6 --MA 3 3 the INTERFACE CONTROL board,
-- IGBT FAULT 22 115 VAC SW
2 -- IGBT FAULT --FIL 1 ACK 15 and 6J3--13 unconnected to J1--J of
7 1 ( S5--D3 )
BUCKY SPLY +MA -- AUTO OFF INH FIL 1 RTN the HT TRANSFORMER
9 5 10 See NOTE 1 16
BUCKY SPLY GND HI MA FIL 2 RTN
46 20 --BRAKE
AUX BUCKY SPLY SOL DR ( S8--F1 )
5
--BUCKY 1 MOTION
12 --ACC
--BUCKY 2 MOTION ( S8--F1 ) 6J1
4
BUCKY 1 DR +24V 10
2 11 + 24V 2
BUCKY 2 DR J1 HT TRANSFORMER 8
3 ERROR DRAC ERROR DRAC
0 VAC K 9HT1 ( S4--D3 ) 9
HI MA GND
10 0 VAC A
0 VAC GND 1
6 P3 --RTR RUN
BUCKY 1 MOT RTN B
+KV 2
7 DELAYED P1 2 Red --TUBE 1 RTR
GND FIL PREHEAT C mA
--KV 3
BUCKY 2 MOT RTN
13
+24V 5
6
--FIL DR1 FIL RTN
1
4
D
+MA ] posts
test
4
--TUBE 2 RTR
--HS SCL
14 +5V --FIL DR2 FIL SUP E
GND --MA Black 5
3 F --RTR RDY
1 +5V FIL 1 RTN
SUPPLY (BUCKY 1) 8 6
DELAYED +24V H --SF PREP --SF PREP
8 FIL 2 RTN P1 HT DR1 ( S5--B4 )
SUPPLY (BUCKY 2) 7 7
FIL I G ( S5--C4 ) --FL EXP --FL EXP
FIL SUP 12
1 N --PREP --PREP
GND SW COM P3 HT DR2
( S5--C4 ) ( S5--F3 ) 11
U GND
SW1 1
P2 FILAMENT V SHLD COM
SW2 ( S5--E2 ) 6J3
4 DRIVER J
+SUPPLY +SUPPLY BOARD --HT INTLK OPEN -- for Fl tube 13
( S1, 2--B3 ) 1 --HT INTLK
--SUPPLY --SUPPLY 3A3 GND -- for RAD tube
1
NOTE 2 :
DWG:
54302010
--T2 SCL signal is shortcircuited with --TUBE 2 SCL signal for High Speed Version 4/8
--ACC and --BRAKE signals for Low Speed Version become --TUBE 1 RTR and C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
--TUBE 2 RTR respectively for High Speed Version CN 03/46,55,58,60
B
A CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
6J1 connector used only for High Speed Version ( See LV DRAC documentation )
GENERATOR
F E D C B A
HT DR2 3TS1
( S3,S4--B1 ) 22 --DOOR
J2--19
5C11 23 DOOR RTN
5C10 2 MF 5R2 J2--18
2 MF 5L1 1 Mohm, 2w 24 --ROOM LIGHT
5C8 ( S3,S4--B3 ) J2--8
2 MF HT DR1 36 --SF PREP to J2 connector of the
4 ( S3,S4--A1 ) J2--4 4
( S3,S4--B1 ) 37 --FL EXP ATP CONSOLE board
( S3,S4--A1 ) J2--17
51 PT INPUT
J2--13
C2E1
C1
E2
C2E1
C1
E2
5C9 52 --ALOE
J2--24
40 MF for Single Phase Generator 53 --READY
5IGBT 2 J2--9
5IGBT 1 10 MF for Three Phase Generator
SPR--+5 REG OUT
SPR--+5 REG OUT

CPI--CONTROL
CPI--CONTROL
FPO--FAULT
FNO--FAULT
FPO--FAULT
FNO--FAULT
VNC--GND
VPC--GND
VNC--GND
VPC--GND
4TS3
VNI--VCC
VPI--VCC
VNI--VCC
VPI--VCC
1 --THERM. 1
SNR--
SNR--
J2--3
CNI--
10/11J7--5
CNI--
2 --THERM. 2
J2--20 10/11J7--6 ( S6,S7,S8--F1 )
J3 J4 J3 J4
2 3 4 1 5 2 3 4 1 5 2 3 4 1 5 2 3 4 1 5 3 THERM. COM
J2--5 10/11J7--7
115 VAC
IPM DRIVER 2
115 VAC
IPM DRIVER 1 7
to J2 connector of the --SFC
FAULT
J2--16
FAULT
0 VAC
5A2
0 VAC
5A1
GND
GND
DR1
DR2
+5V
18
DR1
DR2
+5V
ATP CONSOLE board
J2--11 ABC OUT
19 ( only required for DSI option)
3 J1 1 2 3 4 J2 1 2 3 4 J1 1 2 3 4 J2 1 2 3 4 3
J2--14 FL DSI
20
115 VAC SW J2--15 CAM SYNC
0 VAC
+5V OUT
GND
--KV DR1
( S3,S4--D3 ) For Three Phase Generator
--KV DR2
P2
--IGBT FAULT DC + + 2
5L2 DISCHARGE 1 RTN
200 uH ( S3,S4--D2 ) 5A3 1 ( S3,S4--B4 )
-- DISCHARGE 1
5C3 5C4 CHARGE /
BUS + DC + P1
3900 MF 3900 MF DISCHARGE
( S1, 2--A2 ) To Three Phase Generator MONITOR #1 2 --CHRG
remove 5L2 for Single Phase Generator BOARD 1 ( S3--F3 )
To Single Phase Generator
BUS -- DC -- P1
CHARGE /
( S1, 2--A1 ) DISCHARGE 2
5C1 5C2
COM 3900 MF 3900 MF MONITOR #2 1
2 BOARD 2
( S3,S4--B1 )
+ P2
5A4
2 DISCHARGE 2 RTN
DC -- -- 1 ( S3,S4--B4 )
DISCHARGE 2
LOCKS BOARD TB7
TB7 7A3 3
F14 24 VAC
T 10 Amp To Lamp
1 4 (Collimator)
24 VAC TR 0 VAC For Single Phase Generator
( S1, 2--D3 ) 2 P2
0 VAC TR 7 DC + + 2 DISCHARGE 1 RTN
5A3 1 ( S3,S4--B4 )
+ 5 -- DISCHARGE 1
BR5 +24 VDC 5C1 5C2 5C3 5C4 CHARGE /
P1
F15 3900 MF 3900 MF 3900 MF 3900 MF DISCHARGE
R1 C8,9,10,11 2 --CHRG
T 10 Amp 8 To Locks MONITOR #1
1K5 2200uF 1 ( S3,S4--F3 ) 1
2w BOARD
35V
6 DC --
0 VDC
1
TS4 DRAWING F. GARCIA 30/09/02
DWG:
54302010
5/8
+ REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 C B A REV
+24V
FANS POWER SUPPLY -- C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
GND
CN 03/46,55,58,60
B
A CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
GENERATOR
F E D C B A
Ferrite Ferrite
INTERFASE DRAC--HF PCB
CONTROL DRAC PCB J3 Core Core J1 ( A3240--05 )
( A3243 -- 03 ) Ribbon Cable Connections ( ) for
1 1 only one FL tube
+5 VDC +5 VDC 11A2
2 2
11A1 +5 VDC
3 3
+5 VDC 11TS2
+5 VDC +5 VDC
+5 VDC 4 4 +5 VDC 1 (9)
4 MAIN T1 4
5 5
GND GND 2 (10)
6 6 AUX T1
GND GND
J4 7 7
GND GND COM T1 3 (11)
1 8 8
GND GND GND 4 (12)
ERROR DRAC 2 9 9 --THERM. 1
6J1--8 ERROR CODE +15 VDC +15 VDC
3 NC +15 VDC 10 10 +15 VDC THERM. COM 5 (13)
cable to High Speed Starter connection 6J1 ( S3,S4--A2 )
--RTR RDY 4 11 11
6J1--5 RDY1 +15 VDC +15 VDC 6 (14)
5
RDY1 OUT +15 VDC
12 12
+15 VDC See Note FAN 1
6 13 13 0 VAC 7 (15)
+15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC
GND 7 --15 VDC 14 14 --15 VDC
6J1--11 RDY1 RTN GND 8 (16)
8 VUNR 15 15
NC VUNR
9 16 16
SPARE2 VUNR VUNR
10 17 17
SPARE2 RTN PRECH IF PRECH IF
11 18 18 PRECH IF 115 VAC SW 17
SPARE1 PRECH IF
12 19 19 18
SPARE1 RTN +5 VDC +5 VDC 240 VAC SW
6J1--10 +24 VDC 13 +5 VDC 20 20
SF +5 VDC
--SF PREP 14 T3 IF 21 21
6J1--6 SF RTN T3 IF
15 T3 IF 22 22
3 FL T3 IF 3
--FL EXP 16 T2 IF 23 23
6J1--7 FL RTN T2 IF
17 24 24 Note:
HS T2 IF T2 IF Connect FAN to 11TS2--17
--HS SCL 18 T1 IF 25 25
6J1--4 HS RTN T1 IF or 11TS2--18 as required
19 T1 IF 26 26 T1 IF
ST
6J1--1 --RTR RUN 20 ST RTN
21 AUXILIARY CLAMPING
T3 J1
22 T3 RTN TRANSFORMER
23
T2 P
--TUBE 2 RTR 24 11K2 11K3
6J1--3 T2 RTN 4 1 12 R2 R1 R2 R1 +24 VDC
AUX
J5
10 2 1 2 1 1
11K2 A1 11K3 A1
2
7 8 4 J4
A2 A2
3 1
3 VR1 K1
COM V480LA20A COM T1 2
1 8 AUX T1 Note 3
K3
SHL 2 MAIN T1
2 10 11K2 2
4 3 Note :
11K3
1 7 12 R4 R3 Connections to 11TS2 of
PRIN
R4 R3 the Generator Cabinet J3
P
4 3
240 VAC SW 1
MAIN 2 to 11TS2
J2 Ferrite Ferrite 0 VAC
TRANSFORMER J2
Core Core
1 5
V-- --DC OUT
2 4
V+ +DC OUT
3
GND
2 +DC IN
from DC voltage Bus { 1 --DC IN
( S5--D2 )
Note.-- 11J7 is an aerial connector 11J7
+24 VDC 1
1
+24V DELAYED
3
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO HIGH SPEED STARTER
GND FOR ONE X--RAY TUBE
4
1 240 VAC SW
115 VAC SW
2
DWG:
54302010
--THERM. 1 5 to 11TS2 6/8
4TS3--1 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 C B A REV
( S5--B3 ) THERM. COM 7
4TS3--3 C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
8 CN 03/46,55,58,60
0 VAC B F. GARCIA 09/04/03
A CN 02/197 F. GARCIA 12/12/02 SEDECAL COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC
GENERATOR
F E D
F E D C B A
Ferrite Ferrite
INTERFASE DRAC--HF PCB 11TS2
CONTROL DRAC PCB J3 Core Core J1 ( A3240--05 )
MAIN T1 1
( A3243 -- 03 ) 1
Ribbon Cable 1
+5 VDC +5 VDC AUX T1 2
2 2 11A2
11A1 +5 VDC +5 VDC
COM T1 3
+5 VDC 3 3 +5 VDC
+5 VDC 4 4 +5 VDC --THERM. 1 4
4 5 5 4
GND GND THERM. COM 5
GND 6 6
J4 GND
7 7 FAN 1 6
GND GND
1 8 8
GND GND GND 0 VAC 7
ERROR DRAC 2 +15 VDC 9 9
6J1--8 ERROR CODE +15 VDC
3 NC +15 VDC 10 10 +15 VDC GND 8
11 11
cable to High Speed Starter connection 6J1 ( S3,S4--A2 )
--RTR RDY 4 9
6J1--5 RDY1 +15 VDC +15 VDC MAIN T2
5 12 12
RDY1 OUT +15 VDC +15 VDC 10
6 13 13 AUX T2
+15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC
GND 7 --15 VDC 14 14 --15 VDC 11
6J1--11 RDY1 RTN COM T2
8 VUNR 15 15
NC VUNR 12
9 16 16 --THERM. 2
SPARE2 VUNR VUNR
10 17 17 13
SPARE2 RTN PRECH IF PRECH IF THERM. COM
11 18 18 PRECH IF
SPARE1 PRECH IF FAN 2 14
12 19 19
SPARE1 RTN +5 VDC +5 VDC
6J1--10 +24 VDC 13 +5 VDC 20 20 0 VAC 15
SF +5 VDC
--SF PREP 14 T3 IF 21 21
6J1--6 SF RTN T3 IF GND 16
15 T3 IF 22 22
3 FL T3 IF 3
--FL EXP 16 T2 IF 23 23
6J1--7 FL RTN T2 IF
17 T2 IF 24 24 T2 IF
HS 25 25 +24 VDC
--HS SCL 18 T1 IF T1 IF
6J1--4 HS RTN
19 T1 IF 26 26 T1 IF
ST
--RTR RUN 20 11KT1 A1 11K3 A1
6J1--1 ST RTN
21 Note : 11K2 A1
T3 AUXILIARY CLAMPING J4
22 T3 RTN TRANSFORMER Connections to 11TS2 of A2 A2
J1 1
23 the Generator Cabinet K1
T2 P A2
--TUBE 2 RTR 24 11K2 11K3 11KT1 2
6J1--3 T2 RTN 4 1 12 R2 R1 R2 R1 R2 R1
AUX AUX T2 3
Note J5 K3
AUX T1
10 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
2
7 8 4
3
3 VR1
COM V480LA20A
1 8 COM T1
Note
2 COM T2
2 SHL 2
10 11K2
4 3 11K3 11KT1
1 7 12 R4 R3 R4 R3
PRIN MAIN T2 J3
P R4 R3 Note
MAIN T1
4 3 4 3 240 VAC SW 1
Ferrite MAIN Ferrite 2 to 11TS2
J2 TRANSFORMER J2 0 VAC
Core Core
V-- 1 5
--DC OUT
2 4
V+ +DC OUT
3
GND
2 +DC IN
from DC voltage Bus
( S5--D2 )
{ DC+
DC--
1 --DC IN
Note.-- 11J7 is an aerial connector 11J7
+24 VDC 11KT1 1
1 11TS2 11KT1 for TUBE 2 SCL 72 71
+24V DELAYED tube 2 62 61
4 18
FAN 2
to 11TS2
external TUBE 1 SCL THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO HIGH SPEED STARTER
240 VAC SW 54 53 interface 84 83
2
FAN 1 TUBE SCL COMM FOR TWO X--RAY TUBES
17
1 115 VAC SW tube 1
GND
3
DWG:
54302010
--THERM. 1 5 7/8
4TS3--1 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 C B A REV
--THERM. 2 6
( S5--B3 ) 4TS3--2 C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
THERM. COM 7 to 11TS2
B CN 03/46,55,58,60 F. GARCIA 09/04/03
4TS3--3
8 A CN 02/197 F. GARCIA 12/12/02 SEDECAL COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC
0 VAC
GENERATOR
F E D
F E D C B A
NOTE.-- 10T3, 10C5--1 and 10C5--1 NOTE.-- Use tube 2

THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO LOW SPEED STARTER 10R4--1 for 330 VAC Stator 15uF connections for Fl tube
for external interface
10C5--2
TUBE SCL COM

30uF
240 VAC SW
115 VAC SW
TUBE 1 SCL
TUBE 2 SCL
10TS2
10R4--1
4 1 Mohm, 2w 4
6
FAN 1
10R4--2 14
NOTE.-- 10J7 and 10J8 are FAN 2
aerial connectors 1 Mohm, 2w
30uF 15uF 3
COM T1
11 12 13 14 15 16 24 25 26 27 28 9 10 11 12 11
10J8 TB1 TB1 10 21 22 23
J1 T1/T2 COMM COM T2
1 7
1 0 VAC 0 VAC
230 VAC RTR KACC
K1--1 15
( S1, 2--D2 )
60 VAC RTR
2 TB3 KCT TB3 TB4 KCTRR TB4 0 VAC
3 2 T2 K2--3 T1 T2 K5--1 T1 5
0 VAC RTR KCTR THERM. COMM.
F1 KCTRR K4--2
T 6A 13
3 Tube 2 Tube 1 Tube 2 Tube 1 K5--3 THERM. COM THERM. COMM.
4
47 T2 --THERM 1 --THERM 1
KBR
10RC1 2w 10T3 330V 7 TB2 6 5 K3--2
TB1 12
7 --THERM 2 --THERM 2
8 T1 KCTR
100 nF IAUX CR6 17 2
KBU4J K4--1 AUX T1
+
1 KV 9 9
Tube 1 KCT 10 1 18 10
3 10LF2 10K1 AUX T2 3
220V K2--1
2 4 19 1
MAIN T1
2 1 T1
1 3 6 5 20 9
KBR MAIN T2
6
TB2 7 _ K3--1 KCTR
8
0V 5 T2 IMAIN K4--4 GND
9
10 1 16
4 +24V J1 GND
Tube 2 CR11 TP2
1N4007 +24V
T1/T2 COMM 1
+24V DELAYED
(to 10TS2) CR10 C4
CR12
+24V VM48 1N4007 100uF
Q2 35V
+
+24V DELAYED 2N4401
CR4 TP1
KCTR 1N4007 C3 R8
1K5 GND
3 10R5 K4 100nF 2
+24V _ GND
475
10K1 2w CR8
4 KCT CR5 1N4007
KCTRR 1N4007 LF--RAC BOARD
K2--2 K5 KCTRR
10A1 CR9 CR7 K5--2
VM48 1N4007 4
Q1
2 2
+
KCTR 2N4401
C2 R7
10J7 K4--3
100nF 1K5
_ 3
240 VAC SW 4 +24V KACC
240 VAC SW DS4
HLMP1700 K1--2
115 VAC SW 2 CR1 CR2 CR3
115 VAC SW R1
L R2 R3
4K75 1N4007 KACC 4K75 1N4007 KCT 4K75 1N4007 KBR TP3
+24V DELAYED 1 R4 R5 RTRI
+24V DELAYED K1 K2 K3 6K19 4K75
5
GND 3 DS1 DS2 DS3
GND HLMP1700 HLMP1700 HLMP1700 R6 C1
475 22uF
from HT CONTROL board
--START 9 J1 6 7 8
10
--ACC
11 1
--T2 SCL
12
--BRAKE
13
RTRI
14
1 --TUBE 2 SCL
0 VAC
8
0 VAC DRAWING F. GARCIA 30/09/02
DWG:
54302010
--THERM. 1 5 8/8
4TS3--1 --THERM. 1 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 C B A REV
( S5--B3 )
to 10TS2 C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05

--THERM. 2 6
4TS3--2 --THERM. 2
CN 03/46,55,58,60
4TS3--3
THER. COM 7 THERM. COM
B
A CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
GENERATOR
F E D
CONTROL DRAC BOARD +15VDC +15VDC
J4 J1 +15V
TP3 C4
R10 100nF
6 +15 VDC 2 1K5 14
R1 R2 CR1
10K 1M 1N3595
5 RDY1 OUT 3 2
6 OFF OFF DLY
C1 K1 TP1
DLY
470uF 1 6
25V GND CR6 5
1 GND 4
TP5 1N3595 2
21 5
3 7
23 ADD JUMPER U1
CR5 C3 ICM7556
1N3595 3,3uF C2 DELAYED SWITCH--OFF BOARD
22 T3 RTN 6 100nF
( A3274--01 )
CR4 +15VDC
1N3595
24 T2 RTN 7
U1 CR8 R8
+15VDC ICM7556 1N4148 1M
C7
1uF R4 R3 10 CR2
CR3 10K 1M5 1N3595
R7 1N3595 4
C8 30K1 2 K2
8
10uF OFF OFF MANT
GENERATOR Q1
6 MANT TP2
2N4401 12
CABINET 9
CR9
PWR OFF 1N3595 13
R6 CR7
J2 TP6
10K 1N3595
4 PWR OFF 8 R9 C9
11 100nF
150K
C5 C6
OFF COND R5 3,3uF
TP4 100nF
J1 1K5
8 OFF COND 1 14 7--8 1 7--8
K1 K2
INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD

DWG:
A3274--01
1/1
REVISED A. DIAZ 05/05/98 C B REV
C CN 00/183 F. GARCIA 06/09/00 SEDECAL

B CN 99/003 F. GARCIA 13/01/99 DELAYED SWITCH--OFF
INNERSCAN
A B C D E
C5 +12V +5V C6 (*) Use jumpers only for A3000-34 and 35

C2 100nF 100nF
33pF
+5V (*)
+12V Q4 R2 +5V
2N4403 6K81 U5 RP15 U4 U10 U11 RP7
28
9
C3 XT1 87C51 1 10K AD7582 74HCT574 ULN2803 22 P5
R5 33pF 20MHz 18 39 AD0 AD0 17 mA AD0
AIN0 2 2 19 1 18 1 2
VDD
VCC
XTAL1 P0.0 2 DB0 D1 Q1 I1 Q1 9 -HS SCL
1K 19 38 AD1 AD1 16 AD1 3 18 2 17 3 4
XTAL2 P0.1 3 DB1 D2 Q2 I2 Q2 7 -ACC
R1 R3 37 AD2 AD2 15 3 KVP AD2 4 17 3 16 5 6
P0.2 4 DB2 AIN1 D3 Q3 I3 Q3 6 -BRAKE
1K 100K 36 AD3 AD3 14 AD3 5 16 4 15 7 8
P0.3 5 DB3 D4 Q4 I4 Q4 5 -RTR RUN
9 35 AD4 AD4 13 4 FIL I AD4 6 15 5 14
RESET P0.4 6
AD5 AD5 DB4 AIN2 AD5 D5 Q5 I5 Q5 RP8
4 P0.5 34 7 12 DB5 7 D6 Q6 14 6 I6 Q6 13 4
31 33 AD6 AD6 11 5 RTR I AD6 8 13 7 12 22
Q3 +5V EA/VP P0.6 8 DB6 AIN3 D7 Q7 I7 Q7
Z1 C1 32 AD7 AD7 10 AD7 9 12 8 11 1 2
2N4401 P0.7 9 DB7 D8 Q8 I8 Q8 10 HI mA
BZX55C8V2 1uF R77 4K99 24 A11 3 4
GND
C4 10 A0 A12 8 -BAT TEST
A1 25 11 CLK 5 6
100uF 29 1 7 8
-DESEQ PSEN A8 OC
16 P1.3 P2.0 21 21 BYSL CLK 23
A9
9
R6 P2.1 22 18 RD
R4 -KV SAFETY 5 23 A10 20 6
825 P1.4 P2.2 WR VREF (*)
DGND
AGND
D1 825 24 A11 19 1
VSS
1N4148 -mA SAFETY P2.3 A12 CS CAZ
6 P1.5 P2.4 25
26 A13 -12V
P2.5 A14
27
27
P2.6 A15
7
P2.7 28 Vref
R8
7 30 681
P1.6 ALE/P
8 P1.7
RP1 U1 10 C10 C72 U8 U9 RP5 P1
P1 470 2501 P3.0 C9 2n2 100nF 74HCT574 ULN2803 22
11 P3.1 P3.7 17 17 -TUBE3
2 16 12 4 100nF AD0 2 19 1 18 1 2
-KV UP 1 1 2 K1 C1 P3.2 P3.6 D1 Q1 I1 Q1 10 HT-C CLK
13 3 Z8 AD1 3 18 2 17 3 4
P3.3 P1.2 D2 Q2 I2 Q2 11 HT-C DAT
4 14 14 2 BZX55C5V1 AD2 4 17 3 16 5 6
-KV DWN 2 3 4 K2 C2 P3.4 P1.1 D3 Q3 I3 Q3 12 -TUBE2 SCL
15 1 AD3 5 16 4 15 7 8
P3.5 P1.0 D4 Q4 I4 Q4 13 -FIL 1 SCL
6 12 AD4 6 15 5 14
-PREP 3 5 6 K3 C3 AD5 D5 Q5 I5 Q5
7 D6 Q6 14 6 I6 Q6 13
8 10 -WR DAC AD6 8 13 7 12 RP6
C-HT DAT 4 7 8 K4 C4 AD7 D7 Q7 I7 Q7 22
9 D8 Q8 12 8 I8 Q8 11
RP2 U2 +5V 1 2
GND
14 -START
470 2501 -EXP 11 3 4 -PRE CHRG
3 CLK 15 3
C-HT CLK 5 1 2 2 K1 C1 16 1 OC 5 6 16 -CHRG DR
100nF R9 7 8
D7 D6 C8 C7 56K2
9
-EXP 6 3 4 4 K2 C2 14
1N4148 1N4148 510pF 3n3
6 12 +5V R12
-CHRG 7 5 6 K3 C3 R11 2.7
8 10
A4
-FIL 1 ACK 8 7 8 K4 C4
C19 DS1 475
R7 100nF LED
7
1K21
Q1
U3 IRLZ14 D23
+12V
R70 24C16 U14 1N4148
-CS DAC
+5V DS3 475 C57 1 6 74HCT138 R10
EXP 100nF +5V RP3 A0 SCL A8 475
2 A1 15 Y0 A 1
3K3 3 5 14 2 A9 R13 R14 D2
A2 SDA -L DAC Y1 B A10
1 2 13 3 1K5 1K5 1N4148
R64 C18 Y2 C
3 4 7 TEST 12 Y3 R82
1K 1nF 5 6 11 C81 Q2 C11
Y4 A13 100K 1uF 2N4403 100nF
7 8 10 Y5 G2A 4
9 Y6 G2B 5
R63 R71 C58 7 6
1K DS2 475 100nF Y7 G1 D3
PREP +5V 1N4148
P1 RP10 U15
2 2
470 2501 DATA BUS
BATST 1 18
BATST 2 19 1 2 2 K1 C1 16
BATST 3 20 +5V +5V
9 3 4 4 K2 C2 14
GND
6 12 RP12 U13 U12 RP9
P3 5 6 K3 C3 1 10K 74HCT541 74HCT541 1 10K SW2
8 10 2 18 AD0 AD0 18 2 1 16
ERROR DRAC 6 7 8 K4 C4 2 A1 Y1 Y1 A1 2
3 17 AD1 AD1 17 3 2 15
RP11 U16 3 A2 Y2 AD2 Y2 A2 3
4 16 AD2 16 4 3 14
P5 470 2501 4 A3 Y3 AD3 Y3 A3 4
5 15 AD3 15 5 4 13
5 A4 Y4 AD4 Y4 A4 5
2 16 6 14 AD4 14 6 5 12
-RTR RDY 4 1 2 K1 C1 6 A5 Y5 AD5 Y5 A5 6
R22 7 7 13 AD5 13 7 7 6 11
A6 Y6 AD6 Y6 A6
4 14 8 12 AD6 12 8 7 10
-IGBT FAULT 3 3 4 K2 C2 8 A7 Y7 AD7 Y7 A7 8
9 11 AD7 11 9 8 9
475 9 A8 Y8 Y8 A8 9
-BATT FAULT 2 5 6 6 K3 C3 12
10 10
G2 19 19 G2
8 10 C20 1 1
-AUTO OFF INH 1 7 8 K4 C4 G1 G1
R15 100pF
+5V 3K3
C27
100nF
L2 47uH -RD
FAULT
P2
-12V 1 L1 47uH
TP3 TP4
+12V 2
1 +12V -12V 1
+12V R65 -12V R45
+5V 3 1K 1K
TP2
GND 4 +5V R30 +5V
L3 47uH 1K A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44
GND 5 TP1 TP9 TP10
6-9 K NC 05/061 F. Díaz 01/04/05 DRAWING F. Díaz 26/05/05
C17 C15 GND GND GND 1/3
GND 6 K1 J NC 05/027 F. Díaz 08/02/05 REVISED A. Díaz 26/05/05 K J I H G REV
Z3 100uF C16 Z2 100uF C14
C13 C12 1N4744 100nF 2-13 1N4744 100nF I NC 04/202 F. Díaz 02/12/04
100uF 100nF H AC 01/04 F. Díaz 21/09/04
G NC 03/216 F. Díaz 18/12/03 SEDECAL HT CONTROLLER
A B C D E
A B C D E
HV TANK JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 R73 U3 +5V U5 +5V U8 +5V U10 +5V
16K5 24C16 80C32 74HCT574 74HCT574
Vcc 8 Vcc 40 Vcc 20 Vcc 20
COMPACT 2 1 2 2 1
JP6
VERTICAL 1 2 1 1 R20 (3) C29 C31 C30 C32

36K5 TP16 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF
GND 4 GND 20 GND 10 GND 10

C21 KVP
KV - 100pF
4 4
KV +
TP12 TP11 TP7 1V=33.3KVP
R16 (3) KV- KV+ R18 U18A KVP U12 +5V U13 +5V U14 +5V
P4 1K 100K TL084 D16 R66 1V=16.6 KVP for A3000-36 74HCT541 74HCT541 74HCT138 C36
2 1N4148 10K 20 20 16 +12V 100nF
-KV 1 - Vcc Vcc Vcc
1 KVP
2 3 +
+KV
R17 1 1 R19 1 C28 C33 C34 C35
1K 100K 10nF 100nF 100nF 100nF
JP3 JP4 JP5 GND 10 GND 10 GND 8
C76 C22
C75 C24 C23 R72 R21 (3)
RTR I1 4 1nF 10nF 100pF 16K5 36K5
RTR I2 1nF 10nF
3 Z4 Z5 +5V U1/U15/U16 +5V U2
2501 2501
1 1 -12V C37
1N4744 1N4744 A1 A1 100nF
E7 15 E7 15
3 A2 3 A2
E6 13 E6 13
C25 5 5
100nF A3 A3
E5 11 E5 11
7 A4
+12V D14 D15 -12V 9 9
1N4148 1N4148 E4 E4
3 R25 3
274K
BR1 R26
VM48 1M C79 100pF
4 3 6 - U20-A
AC1 - R24 ULN2803A
7
5 + 4K99 C80 100pF 14
6 1 C26 R81 U18B 5
AC2 + 100nF 1K TL084
R29 C39 +12V
10K 100nF RP14-A
FREQUENCY (7) U20-B 22 P3
ULN2803A 5 6 -KV DR 1
+12V R23 1
12 7 8 2 -KV DR 2
R74 U19
12
7
6K04 34K TL594
R80 D21 R27 6
V+
JP2 10K 1N4148 10K JP1 RT
1 1 5 CT C1 8
9
C2 11
C38 C78 RP13
4nF 1nF 1K
D22 R28 9 7 8
TP6 1N4148 (1) 49K9 16
E1
10 5 6
RTR KV DEM +2 E2
15 -2 REF 14 3 4
3 FB DC 13 1 2
RTR I 2 4
GND
C41 -1 DT C40
1 +1
R75 10nF 100nF
2 2
C63 +12V 49K9 C44
100nF 100nF
7
+12V C67 +12V
U7A 100nF +5V
8
LF353 D19
KV - 3 R53 U18C 1N4148 +5V
+
1 10K R54 TL084 (2)
U17B Vref
11
2 - 10 +
LM319J 4K75 8
C64 9 9
+ -
100nF R33 R32 R78
4
7
10 1K 3K3 1K
-
C66 C77 Z9 D18 D4
100nF 10nF R76
-KV SAFETY
-12V R52 C69 100K
6
10K 100nF 5V1 1N4148 1N4148 D5

-EXP
R55
R50 R51 1K65 1N4148 D20
10K 3K01 -12V
U7B TP15
LF353 R56 U17A 1N4148
KV + 5 10K LM319J Q5 R79
+
7 4 IRLZ14
+ FAULT
6 - 12
5 -DESEQ R31 22
-
100K
1 C65 1
100nF C68
3
100nF R59
R58 R57 10K
10K 3K01 (1) The value of R28 is 86K6 for A3000-35 NAME DATE SHEET / OF
A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44
-12V (2) (REV)1 - Remove D19 for three phase generators K NC 05/061 F. Díaz 01/04/05 DRAWING F. Díaz 26/05/05
2/3
J NC 05/027 F. Díaz 08/02/05 REVISED A. Díaz 26/05/05 K J I H G REV
(3) R16, R17 = 4K02, and R20, R21 = 69K8 for A3000-36 I NC 04/202 F. Díaz 02/12/04
H AC 01/04 F. Díaz
(7) Adjust R29 to have a period of 48 us at U19-5 21/09/04
SEDECAL HT CONTROLLER
G NC 03/216 F. Díaz 18/12/03
for A3000-43 REV DESCRIPTION ISSUED BY DATE
A B C D E
A B C D E
U24B +12V C73

(4) R38, R39 = 226K, and R60, R62 = 25K5 for A3000-36
9
DG300 100nF
+5V
(5) R36, R37 = 200K, and R40 = 2K21 for A3000-44 1V = 10mA (FROM 10mA UP TO 80 mA)
14
R61 R60 1V = 100mA (FROM 100mA UP TO maximum mA)
10K 12K7
(8) Remove Z6 and Z7 for A3000-44 11 13 1V = 20mA (FROM 10mA UP TO 80 mA)
TP5 A3000-44
A15 mA 1V = 200mA (FROM 100mA UP TO maximum mA)
U24
TP14 TP13
(4) DG300
4 4
mA + mA -
C48 R38
10nF 113K C52 C74
R67 10nF 100nF
8
R34 (5) R36 10K
P4 1K 100K D17 (5) R40
13 - 1N4148 10K
-mA 6 mA -12V
14
+mA 7 12 +
R35 (5) R37 U18D
1K 100K TL084
(8) (8) R39 R62 R41
C43 C42 113K C47 12K7 8K87
100nF 100nF C46 Z7 Z6 C45 10nF U24A (4)
250V 250V 100nF 1N4757A 1N4757A 100nF (4) DG300
4 2
6
+12V D8 D9 -12V
3 1N4148 1N4148 3
R42 U21 +12V C51

1K AD536 100nF
1 14 TP8
FIL I 8 VIN +VS FIL
+12V 8
GND 5 C50 ID
7 BI
1uF 6 FIL I U20-C
C49 VD ULN2803A
4 CAV
10nF -12V C70 16 K1
9 100nF 3 1-14 7-8
RL R44
10 G -VS 3
10K
RP14-B
U20-D 22 P3
R46 ULN2803A 3 4 4 -FIL DR 1
-12V 4K99 C60 +12V 18 1 2
C53 -12V +12V C54 100nF 5 -FIL DR 2
100nF 100nF
(6) 1
R43
1K54 R49 FREQUENCY
C55 20K U23
9
12
7
100nF C59 TL594

AD0 24 3 10nF 6
Vss
Vdd
V+
AD1 DB0 VrefA RT
23 DB1 VrefB 10 5 CT C1 8
AD2 22 11
AD3 DB2 C2 RP4
21 DB3
AD4 20 1K
2 DB4 2
AD5 19 V22 9 7 8
AD6 DB5 LM336AZ E1
18 DB6 RfbB 12 16 +2 E2 10 5 6
AD7 17 9 15 14 3 4
DB7 VoutB KV DEM -2 REF
A11 16 3 13 1 2
A12 A0 FB DC
15 1 4
GND
A1 +1 DT
RfbA 2 2 -1
4 R68
DATA BUS VoutA R48 R47 C56 10K
10K 49K9 100nF
7
14 LDAC
DGND
13 5 C62
WR AGDNA 100nF
1 CS AGNDB 8
-L DAC
U6 C71
11
AD7837 100nF C61 R69

-WR DAC 100nF 205
-CS DAC
-mA SAFETY
1 1
(6) Adjust R49 to have a period of 150 us at U23-5

K NC 05/061 F. Díaz DRAWING F. Díaz 26/05/05
A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44
01/04/05
3/3
J NC 05/027 F. Díaz 08/02/05 REVISED A. Díaz 26/05/05 K J I H G REV
I NC 04/202 F. Díaz 02/12/04

H AC 01/04 F. Díaz 21/09/04
G NC 03/216 F. Díaz 18/12/03 SEDECAL HT CONTROLLER
A B C D E
5 4 3 2 1
NOTE 1: W1-A for version A3004-10/11/12, W1-B for version A3004-09

NOTE 1: W1-A para versión A3004-10/11/12, W1-B para versión A3004-09
R13 NOTE 2: R11= 2K68 ohms for A3004-09/10

1 5W R11= 1K4 ohms for A3004-11
R11= 1K ohms for A3004-12
NOTE 2: R11= 2K68 ohms para A3004-09/10

R11= 1K4 ohms para A3004-11
R11= 1K ohms para A3004-12
D D
R12
+15V
100K 3W
D2
1N4148
+5V
+24V
+5V R19 D7
TP1 TP2 33
R7 C1 Green
3K74 TP7 C4
100nF 100nF R2
R4 R3 D3 100
R16
P1 8 10K 10K Q2
UF4006
9
GND R8 10K U1 SGP23N60UFD + C7 + C8
1 2K D5
GND 1 7
VDD
2 UF4006 HO 330uF/450V 330uF/450V
+5V 3 +24V
7 10 HIN
+5V 4 2 VB 6
C3
-FIL DR1 5 3
6 12 5 1uF C6 P3
-FIL DR2 6 R6 R5 D4 4
LIN VS 470nF/630Vdc
FIL I 7 3K74 2K UF4006 FIL SUP
DELAY 8 4
VCC 3 3
5
+24V U2 11 SD 2 FIL PREHEAT
HCPL2232
LO 1 1 FIL RTN
T1
VSS
C TP8 2 D1 1 C
R17 COM 1N4148 2
D8 1K IR2113 C2 Pulse. PE-67300. 1 : 300
13
2 5 1uF 4 3
BZX55C18V U5
R18 H11AA1 R1
10K 100
1 4
Q1
SGP23N60UFD
R10
2K43
W1
A
NOTE 1 1V=0.31 Arms
B
TP3
D6
TP4 1N4007
+24V +15V R11
R9 NOTE 2
10 +5V
B
U3 R14 U4 TP5
B
10K LM7805
1 11 1 IN OUT 3
R15
+ GND + 10K
+ C13 C12 C14 C15
C9 C5 10uF/50V 100nF 2 100nF TP6
1.5uF/250V-X2 10uF/50V
P2 10uF/50V
13 10
2
+SUPPLY 4 EC4A13
3
2
1
-SUPPLY
1
L1
C11 C10
10nF/250V-Y2 10nF/250V-Y2
Ground stud
A A
PCB 90068-03

DRAWING F. Díaz 26/10/04 A3004-09/10/11/12
1/1
REVISED A. Díaz 26/10/04 Cb1 Bb1 Ab1 b2 b1 REV
Cb1 NC 05/112 SEDECAL Filament Driver HC

5 4 3 2 1
A B C D E
P6
GND 4
+11V PERM 3
-PWR ON 2
-PWR OFF 1 P3
DS1
3 LINE SYNC
T2 D4
P4 5
2 13 +24VDC
0 VAC 1 R15 R13 +24VDC
4 K1 4
K1 1 6 D16 15 D15 27 D3 1
9 6 1 4 +24 VDC
3 14
115 VAC 5W 3 5 R7 W2 2
1 15K C22
115 VAC 2 4 3 R14 U1 C2 C23 100nF
4 C4 1K5 D ULN2803A 3 10nF 470uF
470uF 11
DB104 Q1 1 GND
8
OFF G MTD3055
2 GND
P1 R12 R8
10 D14 S 3K3
8 K1
9
-PWR OFF 8 12
ON R11 4
-PWR ON 7 C3 3K3
100nF P4
8 K5
12
8 BUCKY 1 DR
P4 4
8 K4
BUCKY SPLY 9 12
7 BUCKY 2 DR
4
W1
AUX BUCKY SPLY 5
1 2 3
+24VDC
3 8 K3 3
L3 12
+24 VDC 4 6 -BUCKY EXP
500uH K6 1 4
D11 D10 9 K7 4 L1 L2
(4) 13 13 13 13 13 5 12 500uH 500uH
D9 K3 K6 8
K5 K4 K7
(4) 14 14 14 D12 14 D13 14 K7 1
FIL 2 RTN
9 16
-BUCKY 1 DR CMD 12 5
-BUCKY 2 DR CMD 13 15 FIL 1 RTN
K5 1 C6
9 4 1
-BUCKY 1 MOTION 11 22 -FIL 1 ACK
5
4
2.2nF 400V R17
K4 1 6 3 499
21 SPARE
9 D17 C5 R16 U2
-BUCKY 2 MOTION 10 5 K9 4 D18 1N4738 2.2uF 1K AQV210EH
12 DB104
+24VDC 8
-TUBE 2 SCL 18 20 SOL DR
6
-FIL 1 SCL 19
FIL PREHEAT 17 13
FIL RTN 14
K9
D19
14
P5
P5
K8 1
9
2 DISCHARGE 2 13 2
5
10 DISCHARGE 2 RTN
K8 4
12
DISCHARGE 1 12 8
14 DISCHARGE 1 RTN
+24 VDC 16
14
R9 K8
D7
13
47
GND 9
K2 1
9 3 SPARE
+24 VDC 5 5
2 DELAYED +24 VDC
+5 VDC OUT 4 4
K2 7 SPARE
+24VDC 12
+24 VDC 8 8
6 +5 VDC
-LINE CONT 1 NOTES:
14 1.- FILAMENT 1 IS SMALL FOR RAD AND LARGE FOR SF
VERSION USED FOR COMPONENTS ON SHEET 2 L1, L2, L3, K6
+24VDC R3 R4 U1 D8 2.- HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY ON AEC OR ABS UNITS ONLY
K2 A3009-09 RAD + HV REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED 3.- LI, L2, L3 AND K6 NOT USED ON RAD SYSTEM
3K3 U1 10K ULN2803A
D1 D2 R2 ULN2803A 12 13 A3009-10 R&F NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED 4.- K5 AND D11 NOT PRESENT IN A3009-15
C1 1N4733 10K 16 7
100uF A3009-11 ONLY RAD NOT REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED NOTAS:
3
1 A3009-12 R&F + HV REQUIRED REQUIRED 1.- FILAMENTO 1 ES FINO PARA RAD Y GRUESO PARA SF 1
D6 2.- LA FUENTE DE ALTA TENSION SOLO PARA UNIDADES CON AEC O ABS
A3009-15 MAMO NOT REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED 3.- L1, L2, L3 Y K6 NO SE USAN EN SISTEMAS RAD
U1
D5 R5 ULN2803A 4.- K5 Y D11 NO SE MONTAN EN A3009-15
BZX55C10V 10K 17 NAME DATE SHEET / OF
2
A3009-09/10/11/12/15
R6 R1 1/2
REVISED A. Díaz 30/01/06 Jb1 I b2 I b1 REV
100K 2M2
SEDECAL INTERFACE CONTROL

A B C D E
A B C D E
+24VDC
R10
56
5w W7
B A
U3 2 D22
4 T1 FR107 4
PE6189
Vs
5 In1 Out1 3 1
C10 7 C19 R35

2.2 uF C8 R33 10nF 1M
7 In2 Boot1 4
2 33K 1KV 1w
1 1w W6
Out2 2.2uF
9 Vref 8
C9 63V A B
11 8 2.2 uF 3
En Boot2 C18 R34
P1 R42
GND Sense
1KV 1M
22 D21 10nF 1w
L6203 FR107
+12 VDC 6 6 10
+12 VDC 5
W8 C21 C15 R28
100uF 100nF 6K8
PT CRL 4
B A U5 P2
TL594
C14 6 12
R41 RT V+ 1 PT SPLY
R39 2,2nF 8
6K04 10K C1 +Vref
5 CT C2 11
D23
E1 9
16 +2 E2 10
1N4148 15 14
3 -2 REF 3 3
R40
3 FB DC 13
1K C20 R24 R26
100nF R43 R29 C16 R30 R31 1 4 10K 10K
10K 22K1 100nF 2M2 100K +1 DT
2 -1 GND 7
R23
10K R18 R19
10K 10K 5
-ON 3
R32
R22 W4 47K5
GND 2 GND 10K
A B R25 R27
10K 332
C13
GND 1 100nF
7
C17
100pF
6 ROOM LIGHT SUP

R38 R37 R36
4M75 4M75 4M75 K10 4
A B 12
8
2 2
W5 +Vref
C12 K10 1
100nF +24VDC 9
5
4 ROOM LIGHT SW
A B
13
R21 W3 K10
10K 8 7 D20
14
2
6 SD
2 -ROOM LIGHT
3 R20
U4A 5K
TLV2460
4 C11
100nF
NOTE.- BE SURE THAT THE VALUE OF THE PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT IN P2-1
PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT ( P2-1) IS THE REQUIRED BEFORE CONECTING THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
+500 VDC OR +300 VDC : JUMPERS W3 TO W8 IN POS "A", AND ADJUSTING WITH R20 NOTA.- ASEGURESE DE QUE EL VALOR DE LA SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY EN P2-1
VARIABLE NEGATIVE OUTPUT : JUMPERS W3 TO W10 IN POS "B" ES EL REQUERIDO ANTES DE HACER LA INTERCONEXION DEL SISTEMA
1 1
SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY (P2-1)
+500 VDC O +300 VDC : PUENTES W3 A W8 EN POS "A",Y AJUSTAR CON R20
SALIDA NEGATIVA VARIABLE : PUENTES W3 A W10 EN POS "B" A3009-09/10/11/12/15
2/2
REVISED A. Díaz 30/01/06 Jb1 I b2 I b1 REV
SEDECAL INTERFACE CONTROL

A B C D E
A B C D E
NOTE.- TWO TRANSFORMER FORMATS CAN BE USED, USA AND ROW.

NOTA.- LOS TRANSFORMADORES PUEDEN TENER DOS FORMATOS, USA Y ROW.
U2
4 HCPL4503 4
REG1 2 8
7815
2 3 CR3 6
VI VO 1N4007 R2 J3/J5
BR1 3 5 6K81 C7
COM
VM48 100nF
C1 C3 C2 2 SPR (+5V INPUT 1)
4 1
470uF 470uF 100nF
3 CP1 (-KV DR1)
1
6 3 4 VPC (GND 1)
SEE NOTE
T1
1 VPI (+15V OUTPUT 1)
J2 5
115 VAC U1 5 FPD (-FAULT 1)
1 1
6 HCPL4503
8 2
7
115 VAC RTN 4 6
2
8 5 3
-FAULT
4
3 3
U4
HCPL4503
BR2 REG2 2 8
VM48 7815
4 1 2 3 CR4 6
VI VO
IPM 1N4007
3 5
R3
6K81 C8
J4/J6
COM
DRIVER 6 3
C6 C5 C4
100nF
2 SNR (+5V INPUT 2)
1 470uF 470uF 100nF

3 CN1 (-KV DR2)
1
4 VNC (GND 2)
1 VNI (+15V OUTPUT 2)
U3 5 FND (-FAULT 2)
HCPL4503
8 2
J1
C9 6
+5VDC 100nF R5 R6
4 332 332 5 3
-DR1
1
2 2
-DR2
2
GND
3
J1
+5VDC
4
-DR1
1
-DR2
2 IPM
GND
3 DRIVER
J2 2
115 VAC
1
115 VAC RTN
2
1 1
3
-FAULT
4

A3063-03
1/1
REVISED A. Díaz 26/11/04 B REV
B NC 04/195 F. Díaz 23/11/04 SEDECAL IPM DRIVER

A B C D E
A B C D E
4
+ 4
R2 R3 R4 R5 R1 R6
100K 3W 10K 15W 10K 15W 10K 15W 39K 15W 27K 4W
CR2
TO MAIN STORAGE BZX85C56V
CAPACITORS Q1
IRF840
DS1
CR3
BZX85C56V
CR1
3 1N4733A 3
U1 R7
H11B1 3M9
1 6 P1
5 2 CHRG
- 2 4 1 GND
P2
2 DISCHARGE RTN
1 DISCHARGE
2 2
1 1
E CN 98/114 F.GARCIA 10/10/98 ENG F. GARCIA
D CN 98/057 F.GARCIA 29/04/98 CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR CHK A. DIAZ
REV CN99/80 (22/07/99)

C CN 96/033 F.GARCIA 06/03/96
3212-01 REV. F
B CN 95/080 F.GARCIA 10/05/95 DWG
A CN 95/74 F.GARCIA 25/04/95 SEDECAL S.A. REV.
REV.
REV DESCRIPTION ISSUED BY DATE DATE 11/01/95
A B C D E
A B C D E
EXT SYNC K4
from J2-14 14 HT-C CLK AEC STOP
7, 8 +5V
LINE SYNC JP4 1
from J3-9 A B ABC IN U19F C55
K5 TPx FL-C CLK R34 R5 R6 R7 74HCT14 100nF
CAM SYNC +5V U33A 1K 10K 10K 2K55 13 12 U29
from J4-9 1, 14 7, 8 U32A 74HCT32 C59 8259A
+12V ISO 74HCT00 1 100nF 18 11 AD0
U19E IR0 D0 AD1
1 3 D1 10
3 2 RP16 U27 74HCT14 CLK 500 19 9 AD2
2 13 470 2501 IR1 D2 AD3
2 11 10 D3 8
CR15 K4 K5 U33B 2 16 -EXPT 20 7 AD4
1N4148 74HCT32 1 2 K1 C1 IR2 D4 AD5
4 D5 6 4
6 6 4 4 14 U19D 21 5 AD6
-DS PREP 3 4 K2 C2 74HCT14 IR3 D6 AD7
6 22 IR4 D7 4
5 5 6 6 K3 C3 12 9 8 23 IR5
U33C 8 10 TMR 1 24
-INTEN 74HCT32 7 8 K4 C4 C60 IR6
MASTER RESET 9 100nF UART RQ 25 12
+5V IR7 CAS0
8
C51 10 A9 1 13
1nF R14 -MWR CS CAS1
+5V U30 10K U33D -MRD A0 27 15
U28 8088 74HCT32 A0 CAS2
71084C 21 28 12 -IOWR 2
R9 RESET IO/M -IORD WR
4 RDY1 RDY 5 22 READY WR 29 11 3 RD EN 16
CR7 10K 6 8 R28 330 19 32 13
1N4148 RDY2 CLK CLK RD -IOWR -INTA 26 INTA INT 17
11 17 U32C
R X1 U32B 74HCT00 -IORD INTR
3 XT1 C42 74HCT00 9
C50 AEN1 10MHz 33pF DATA BUS -INTEN
7 AEN2 4 8
10uF 13 16 26 6 10 U20
16V F/C X2 DEN 74HCT245
15 ASYN 5
1 2 C43 19
CSYNPCLK 33pF G
DT/R 27 1 DIR
+5V 33 16 2 18 D0
MN/MX AD0 A0 B0 D1
23 T AD1 15 3 A1 B1 17
U34 14 4 16 D2
74HCT573 AD2 A2 B2 D3
AD3 13 5 A3 B3 15
3 A15 19 2 39 12 6 14 D4 3
A16 Q1 D1 A15 AD4 A4 B4 D5 U19 U20 U21
18 Q2 D2 3 38 A16 AD5 11 7 A5 B5 13
A17 17 4 37 10 8 12 D6 74HCT14 +5V 74HCT245 +5V 8253 +5V
A18 Q3 D3 A17 AD6 A6 B6 D7
16 Q4 D4 5 36 A18 AD7 9 9 A7 B7 11 Vcc 14 Vcc 20 Vcc 24
15 Q5 D5 6 31 HLD
14 7 17 DATA BUS
Q6 D6 NMI C17 C20 C18
13 Q7 D7 8 1 GND
12 9 8 100nF 100nF 100nF
Q8 D8 A8
A9 7 GND 7 GND 10 GND 12
C 11 25 ALE A10 6
1 5 A0..........A7
+5V OE A11 U23
A12 4
INTR 18 3 MK48T08 U22 U23 U24
INTR A13 A0 D0 74HCT573 +5V MK48T08 +5V 27C256 +5V
A14 2 10 A0 D0 11
R18 -INTA 24 35 AD0 A1 9 12 D1 20 28 32
10K INTA A19 AD1 A2 A1 D1 D2 Vcc Vcc Vcc
8 A2 D2 13
AD2 A3 7 15 D3
AD3 A4 A3 D3 D4 C22 C25 C26
6 A4 D4 16
1.665 MHz AD4 A5 5 17 D5 100nF 100nF 100nF
CLK AD5 A6 A5 D5 D6
4 A6 D6 18 GND 10 GND 14 GND 16
AD6 A7 3 19 D7
AD7 A8 A7 D7
25 A8
U26 A9 24
74HC4040 A10 A9 U26 U28 U29
21 A10
10 9 A11 23 74HC4040 +5V 71084C +5V 8259A +5V
CLK Q1 A12 A11
Q2 7 2 A12 Vcc 16 Vcc 18 Vcc 28
11 RST Q3 6
5 U22 20 +5V
Q4 74HCT573 CS C41 C44 C45
2 Q5 3 27 WR E2 26 2
2 2 19 A0 22 100nF 100nF 100nF
Q6 13KHz D1 Q1 A1 OE
Q7 4 3 D2 Q2 18 GND 8 GND 9 GND 14
13 6.5KHz 4 17 A2
Q8 D3 Q3 A3 U24
Q9 12 5 D4 Q4 16
14 6 15 A4 27C512/27C1001/27C4001
Q10 D5 Q5 A5 A0 D0 U30 U31 U32
Q11 15 7 D6 Q6 14 12 A0 D0 13
1 8 13 A6 A1 11 A1 D1 8088 +5V 74HCT573 +5V 74HCT00 +5V
Q12 U21 D7 Q7 A7 A2 D1 14 D2
9 D8 Q8 12 10 A2 D2 15 Vcc 40 Vcc 20 Vcc 14
8253 A3 9 A3 D3
CLK 500 500Hz A0 A4 D3 17 D4
19 A0 11 C 8 A4 D4 18
to U29-19 8 D0 1 A5 7 A5 D5 C46 C48 C27
A1 D0 D1 OE A6 D5 19 D6 100nF 100nF 100nF
20 A1 D1 7 6 A6 D6 20
U38 6 D2 A7 5 A7 D7
74HC4040 -IORD D2 D3 U31 A8 D7 21 GND 20 GND 10 GND 7
22 RD D3 5 27 A8
10 9 4 D4 74HCT573 A9 26 A9 to U34-17 (sheet 1)
CLK Q1 -IOWR D4 D5 A8 A10 A17
Q2 7 23 WR D5 3 2 D1 Q1 19 23 A10 NC 30
11 6 2 D6 3 18 A9 A11 25 A11 U33 U34 U38
RST Q3 A8 D6 D7 D2 Q2 A10 A12 A18 74HCT32 +5V 74HCT573 +5V 74HC4040 +5V
Q4 5 21 CS D7 1 4 D3 Q3 17 4 A12 PGM 31
3 5 16 A11 A13 28 A13 to U34-16 (sheet 1) 14 20 16
Q5 R21 D4 Q4 A12 A14 Vcc Vcc Vcc
Q6 2 18 CLK2 6 D5 Q5 15 29 A14
4 100 15 7 14 A13 3 A15
Q7 CLK1 D6 Q6 A14 A16 +5V C28 C47 C61
Q8 13 9 CLK0 8 D7 Q7 13 2 A16
12 11 10 9 12 24 OE 100nF 100nF 100nF
Q9 C36 G0 OUT0 D8 Q8 Vpp 1
Q10 14 14 G1 OUT1 13 22 CE GND 7 GND 10 GND 8
15 1nF 16 17 11
Q11 G2 OUT2 C
Q12 1 1 OE 12
11
CONNECTED TO PIN 14 TMR 1 13 PAGE 1 OF 4
1 FOR A3024-50/90 VERSION to U29-24 1
U32D
ENG F. GARCIA
-EXPT 74HCT00
ATP CONSOLE CHK A. DIAZ
+5V
D SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
REV CN 04/158 (04-10-04)
R13
A1 + 22 G A3024-XX REV.
SPK CR6 S A15
DWG
1N4148 Q4 to J12A-16, J12B-16 and U34-19
MTD3055 SEDECAL S.A. REV.
REV.
DATE 10/10/00
A B C D E
A B C D E
J15
2 PREP V ON
3 EXP TP2
V ON 4 R1 CR1
1 COMM 475 1N4007
K3
K1 K2 +12V ISO R29
1, 14 7, 8 1, 14 7, 8 1, 14 7, 8 J14 1K V ON
+12V ISO R4 1 COMM Q1 Q2

330 2 PREP MTD3055 D MTD3055 D
3 EXP C3
13 13 13 4 POWER OFF ON G OFF G 100uF C4 CR2
4 K1 K3 S S 100nF 1N4733 4
K2 5 POWER ON
CR5 CR4 CR3
1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 R3 V ON 6 V ( ON )
6 6 6
330
R2 J1
100
-PWR OFF 4
-AUTO OFF C39
-PWR ON 5
JP1, JP2, AND JP3 ON to J2-21 (page 3) 100nF
GND 7
POSITION "A" FOR -12V 9
NOVEL CONSOLE C38
+12V 3
100nF
A B A B A B +12V UNREG 8 +12V UNREG +12V ISO +5V +12V -12V
+12V UNREG 2 TP9 TP10 TP3 TP7 TP8
GND UNREG 6
JP1 JP2 JP3 U25
GND UNREG 1
COMM PREP EXP 8279
D0 12 4 R33 R31 R32 R35 R36
D1 D0 IRQ 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K
13 D1 CN/ST 37
D2 14 36 +12V UNREG REG2 REG1
D3 D2 SHFT U17 DC-DC CONVERTER +12V ISO 78SR105 +5V +12V -12V
15 D3
D4 16 74HCT138
D5 D4 -COL0 +Vin +Vout +Vin +Vout
17 D5 SL0 32 1 A Y0 15
D6 18 33 2 14 -COL1
GND
D7 D6 SL1 B Y1 -COL2
19 D7 SL2 34 3 C Y2 13 -Vin -Vout
35 12 -COL3 C9 C54 C56 C2 C57 C1 C6 C5 C7 C8
V ON SL3 +5V Y3 -COL4 470uF 470uF 470uF 100nF 2200uF 10uF 10uF 100nF 10uF 100nF
Y4 11
-IOWR 11 6 10 -COL5 TP11
WR G1 Y5 GND UNREG
4 9
J9 -IORD 10 5
G2A Y6
7
RD G2B Y7 TP1 TP6
11-12 BD 23
3 V (ON) -COL0 A12 J11 GND PT CRL 3
1-2 22 CS
COL 0 -COL1
COL 1 3-4 -COL2 A0 8 SL2
J12A-J12B J1
AEC
21 SL1
COL 2
COL 3
5-6
7-8
-COL3 A0 7
5 SL0
PT CRL
1 PT CRL CONTROL
-COL4 CLK
COL 4 9-10 -COL5
3 CLK OA0 27
26
15 CS1
A0 BOARD
COL 5 13-14 OA1 16 CS2 3 A0
ROW 0 23-24 38 RL0 OA2 25 13 CS3 (A3012-01/02/05/06)
39 24 A1
ROW 1 27-28 RL1 OA3 14 CS4 DATA BUS 4 A1
ROW 2 29-30 1 RL2 OB0 31 11 CS5
2 30 -IOWR
ROW 3 25-26 RL3 OB1 12 CS6 5 -IDWR
ROW 4 15-16 5 RL4 OB2 29 9 CS7
6 28 -KV UP
ROW 5 17-18 RL5 OB3 10 CS8 6 -KV UP
ROW 6 19-20 7 RL6
ROW 7 21-22 8 RL7 RESET 9 2 GND
+5V
POWER OFF 39-40
6 +5V
2 9 D0
POWER ON 37-38 D1 8 D0
3 ON 10 OFF +12V ISO
33-34 D2 7 D1
1 13 4 +12V ISO 10 D2
4 11 D3
35-36 3 +12V ISO D4 9 D3
31-32 5 12 2 GND 12 D4
U1A U1B D5
1 GND D6 11 D5
U2E MC14072B MC14072B
D7 14 D6
RP1 MC14050B U11 PT INPUT
13 D7
10K 11 12 8255A (82C55 ) to J2-13 (page 3)
10 D0 34 DB0.....DB7 AEC STOP
D0 15 AEC STOP
9 D1 33 to J16 (page 4)
8 U2B D2 D1 A15
2 32 D2 16 A15 2
7 MC14050B D3 31 J10
6 D4 D3 DB0 DB0 -12V
5 4 30 D4 PA0 4 7 DB0
5 D5 29 3 DB1 DB1 +12V
D5 PA1 10 DB1 JP5 POSITION: 17 -12V
4 D6 28 2 DB2 DB2 +5V
D6 PA2 12 DB2 18 +12V
3 U2F D7 27 1 DB3 DB3 A.- VD SELECTION
+5V 2 MC14050B D7 PA3 DB4 DB4 11 DB3 B.- IC4 SELECTION
JP5 A B C 20 +5V
PA4 40 14 DB4
13 14 39 DB5 DB5 C.- PT INPUT SELECTION -KV DWN
PA5 13 DB5 19 -KV DWN
1 1 -IOWR 36 38 DB6 DB6
10
WR PA6 DB7 DB7 16 DB6
PA7 37 15 DB7 21 PT INPUT
9 to U37 -IORD 5 not supplied in
RP15 8
RD EN2 ABC OUT A3012-01/02/05
(sheet 3) 22 ABC OUT
10K 7 IN1 A11 6 to J16-7 (page 4) to JP19-A (page 3)
6 IN2 CS
PC0 14 6 RS
5 A0 8 15 J5 J6A J6B J2
4 U2A A1 PC1 8 EN1
PC2 16 9 EN2 1 1 1 1 IC1
MC14050B A1 IC1
3 9 A0 PC3 17 5 R/W IC2 6 2 2 2 IC2
2 3 2 13 -CSE2PROM
PC4 SI IC3 2 3 3 3 IC3
18 PB0 PC5 12 IC4/VD 7 4 4 4 IC4/PT INPUT
19 11 C/-D +5V
PB1 PC6 SCK -FLD1 3 5 5 5 -FLD1
U2C 20 10
PB2 PC7 4 +5V -FLD2 8 6 6 6 -FLD2
MC14050B 21 PB3 3 VD -FLD3 4 7 7 7 -FLD3
7 6 22 PB4 2 GND -STRT DR 9 8 8 8 -STRT DR
23 PB5 1 GND GND 5 9 9 9 GND
24 PB6 10 10 10 VD
SW1 25 35
PB7 RESET C / -D
1 8
2 7 to J16-8 (page 4)
3 6
+5V
PAGE 2 OF 4 RIBBON CABLE
1 4 5 1
ENG F. GARCIA
U1 V ON U2 +5V U11 +5V U17 +5V U25 +5V
U18
X25320 U19B DS2 ATP CONSOLE CHK A. DIAZ
MC14072B MC14050B 8255A (82C55) 74HCT138 8279 1 5 74HCT14 R8
CS SI 1K SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
Vcc 14 Vcc 1 Vcc 26 Vcc 16 Vcc 40 REV CN 04/158 (04-10-04)
2 SD SCK 6 3 4
+5V A3024-XX REV.
C11 C12 C14 C13 C40 3 7 +5V
WP HLD DWG
100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF C49
GND 7 GND 8 GND 7 GND 8 GND 20 4 GND VCC 8 100nF SEDECAL S.A. REV.
REV.
DATE 10/10/00
A B C D E
A B C D E
NOTE.- ALL DIODES 1N4148 UNLESS SPECIFIED U5A

74HCT02
SET JP13 FOR DIGITAL MODE 2 +5V J3
CR17 CR9
JP13 1 10 -LINE CONT
+5V to U29-18 (page 1) AEC STOP 3 D
R41
2K7 CR8 G Q3 PT CRL
to U21-10 (page 1) -EXPT S MTD3055 to J8-1 and J7-1 (page 4) 7 PT CRL
U4 DS1 U5B -ACT EXP - KV UP
74HCT123 +5V CR18 R40 74HCT02 15 -KV UP
R11 1 10K 5 - KV DWN
CR16 330K 1A R17 R12 C52 8 -KV DWN
2 1B 4
4 3 10K PREP 6 150K 1uF +5V HT-C DAT 4
1CLR RP20 470 3 HT-C DAT
14 1CX
15 R10 +5V LINE SYNC
1RX/CX 1K U5C 1 2 9 LINE SYNC
R20 74HCT02 3 4 -BUCK EXP
9 2A 1Q 13 DATA BUS 5 6 12 -BUCK EXP
C21 10 4 10K 8
1.0 2B 1Q 7 8 HT-C CLK
11 2CLR 10 6 HT-C CLK
6 12 U6 9
2CX 2Q 8255A RP3 22 -HT INTLK
7 2RX/CX 2Q 5 13 -HT INTLK
D0 34 37 U7
D1 D0 PA7 ULN2803 7 8
33 D1 PA6 38 11 5 6 1 -EXP
D2 32 39 13 8 11
D3 D2 PA5 I8 Q8 3 4 4 -PREP
31 D3 PA4 40 12 7 I7 Q7 12 1 2
+5V U3/U12/U14/U27/U37 U35/U36 D4 30 U5D 6 13 -PREP
2501 2501 D5 D4 74HCT02 I6 Q6 to J13-9
29 D5 5 I5 Q5 14
1 A1 D6
E7 15 E7 15
D7
28 D6 PA3 1 1 I1 Q1 18 1 2 2 C-HT DAT
27 D7 PA2 2 2 I2 Q2 17 3 4 5 C-HT CLK
3 13 13 -IOWR 36 3 3 16
GND
A2 E6 E6 WR PA1 I3 Q3 5 6 11 -BUCKY2 DR CMD
PA0 4 4 I4 Q4 15 7 8 14 -BUCKY1 DR CMD
5 11 11 -IORD 5
A3 E5 E5 RD R19 RP4 22 -AUTO OFF
7 9 9 A13 6 2K74 -DS PREP (PAGE 2, R2) J2
9
A4 E4 E4 CS (PAGE 1, K4) RP11 22
A1 U13 25 -ACT EXP
8 A1 1 2 23 ALOE
ULN2803
A0 3 4 21 -AUTO OFF
9 A0 1 I1 Q1 18 5 6 10 EXP OK
PC7 10 2 I2 Q2 17 7 8 8 -ROOM LIGHT
HT-C DAT RP2 U3 +5V 11 3 16
470 2501 1
PC6 I3 Q3 -SPARE IN1
PC5 12 4 I4 Q4 15 22 -SPARE IN1
3 -BUCK EXP 2 16 25 13 5 14 3
1 2 K1 C1 8 PB7 PC4 I5 Q5 7 8
3 4 4 K2 C2 14 6 24 PB6 PC3 17 8 I8 Q8 11 5 6 9 -READY
FL-C DAT 6 12 23 16 7 12
GND
5 6 K3 C3 4 PB5 PC2 I7 Q7 3 4 24 -ALOE
7 8 8 K4 C4 10 2 22 PB4 PC0 14 6 I6 Q6 13 1 2
-THERMOSTAT 1 21 -DOOR
9 PB3 19 -DOOR
20 15 -DRD RP13 22
-DOOR RP10 U12
7 PB2 PC1 to J16-6 (page 4) -COL
19
9
5 PB1 6 -COL
470 2501 18 35 JP19
-COL 3 PB0 RESET MASTER RESET ABC OUT ABC OUT -LEFT -COMP
7 8 8 K4 C4 10 7 -COMP
6 12 RP9 C10 to J12-22 (page 2) A B
-COMP 5 6 K3 C3 10K 1nF
3 4 4 K2 C2 14 11 ABC OUT/ -LEFT
2 16 -DWR
1 2 K1 C1 DATA BUS
-THERMOSTAT 2 to J16-5 (page 4) -THERMOSTAT 2
RP6 22 20 -THERMOSTAT 2
U15 FS U8
8255A to J16-19 (page 4) ULN2803 7 8 2 -SFD SEL
5 6 1 -GEN OK
JUMPER NORMAL MOBILE D0
D1
34 D0 PA7 37 4 I4 Q4 15 3 4 -THERMOSTAT 1
33 D1 PA6 38 3 I3 Q3 16 1 2 3 -THERMOSTAT 1
JP14 set removed D2 32 D2 PA5 39 2 I2 Q2 17
D3 31 40 1 18
D3 PA4 I1 Q1
JP15 removed set D4 30 D4 PA3 1 5 I5 Q5 14 3 4 12 -DIRECT SEL
D5 29 2 6 13
D5 PA2 I6 Q6 5 6 CR12
JP16 removed set D6 28 3 7 12 -SF PREP
GND
D7 D6 PA1 I7 Q7 1 2 4 -SF PREP
27 D7 PA0 4 8 I8 Q8 11 7 8
JP17 removed set -IDWR 36 WR
CR13
+5V RP7 22 -FL EXP
17 -FL EXP
JP18 removed set -IDRD 5 1 SW3
9
RD -PT SEL
PC0 14 2 1 16 16 -PT SEL/ -SFC
A14 6 15 2 15
2 CS PC1 3 2
16 3 14 PT INPUT
+5V A1 PC2 4 13 PT INPUT
8 A1 PC3 17 5
4 13
13 5 12 EXT SYNC
A0 PC4 6 14 EXT SYNC
9 A0 PC5 12 7 6 11
100nF 11 7 10 -SPARE IN2
1K RP12 U14 +5V PC6 8 15 -SPARE IN2
PC7 10 9
8 9
470 2501 1
-HT INTLK RP5 5 GND
1 2 2 K1 C1 16 6 25 PB7 18
10K GND
3 4 4 K2 C2 14 7 24 PB6
-PT SEL 6 12 23 CR20
5 6 K3 C3 8 PB5 1N4148
7 8 8 K4 C4 10 9 22 PB4
-FL EXP 18 -PREP J4 (to J4 - FLUORO CPU)
3 PB0
19
-SF PREP SW2
4
20
PB1 J13 2 -CAM FL EXP
5 PB2 1 C-FL DAT
1 8 10 21 PB3 RESET 35 15 -FS 7 C-FL CLK
2 7 U36 2501 RP18
2 10 -TOMO EXP
3 6 1 470 FL-C DAT
RP14 A1 11 TOMO ON 3 FL-C DAT
4 5 16 C1 K1 2 2 1 9 -TOMO PREP
10K 3 FL-C CLK
A2 1 TIME 1 4 FL-C CLK
14 C2 K2 4 4 3 2 TIME 2
RP19 U37 5 CAM SYNC
470 2501 to RP15 A3 3 TIME 3 9 CAM SYNC
12 C3 K3 6 6 5 4 TIME 4
to J2-15 2 16 (sheet 2) 7 +12V ISO
-SPARE IN2 1 2 K1 C1 IN2 A4 5 -PS (DSI) SEL 5 +12V ISO
3 4 4 K2 C2 14 10 C4 K4 8 8 7 6 -CINE (DSA) SEL 6 GND
5 6 6 K3 C3 12 7 -HCF SEL 8 GND
-SPARE IN1 8 10 IN1 +5V
to J2-22 7 8 K4 C4 8 SPARE IN
12 EXT REF
14 EXP STOP PAGE 3 OF 4
1 1
U4 +5V U5 +5V U6 +5V U15 +5V U35 2501 RP17 13 GND
JP14 JP15 JP16 JP17 JP18 ENG F. GARCIA
74HCT123
Vcc 16
74HCT02
Vcc 14
8255A
Vcc 26
8255A
Vcc 26 16
A1
C1 K1
1
2
470
2 1
ATP CONSOLE CHK A. DIAZ
3 J20
A2 SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
14 C2 K2 4 4 3 2 EXP STOP REV CN 04/158 (04-10-04)
C19 C23 C24 C15 5
A3 1 EXT REF
100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 12 C3 K3 6 6 5 A3024-XX REV.
GND 8 GND 7 GND 7 GND 7 A4 7 DWG
10 8 JP23
C4 K4 8 7
CR19
EXT SYNC
to J2-14
SEDECAL S.A. REV.
REV.
1N4148
DATE 10/10/00
A B C D E
A B C D E
VERSION HYBRID REV NOTE.- SOME COMPONENTS COULD

NOT BE REQUIRED ACCORDING TO
11 55 H
THE VERSION USED
21 61 N
SERIAL COMMUNICATION REQUIRES THE
25 70 N
COMPONENTS SHOWN IN THIS BOX -ACT EXP
31 62 N
+5V (PAGE 3, J2-25)
32 63 N
40 80 N
4 R15 4
50 90 N 4K7 RS485
92 132 N JP8 RS485
JP22 JP21 +5V C34 JP7
93 133 N
485 422 485 422 100nF A B
94 134 N A B A B A B
R16
U10 75
14
MAX489
+5V J8
Vcc
1 NC NC 13 4 +5V
2 R A 12 1 -ACT EXP
3 REB B 11 8 RXD-
4 DE Z 10 7 TXD-
5 D Y 9
+5V C35 6 8 RS232/422
GND
100nF GND NC RS232/422 JP9 9
JP10 232 422
DATA BUS 232 422 6
A B
U16 A B
7
2681 2 RXD+ (RXD)
40
+5V 3 TXD+ (TXD)
D0 5 GND
25 15
Vcc
RS232/422 D1 DO DP7 C31
16 D1 DP6 26
JP11 D2 24 14 10uF
232 422 D3 D2 DP5 16V U9 +5V
17 D3 DP4 27
A B D4 23 13 C33 C32 C30 MAX232
D5 18
D4 DP3
28 10uF 10uF 10uF 2 16 +5V J7
3 D6 D5 DP2 16V 16V 16V V+ Vcc 3
22 D6 DP1 12 1 C1+ 4 DTR
D7 19 29 3 C29 SET JP12 FOR
D7 DP0 C1- 10uF FLUOROSCAN 1 -ACT EXP
4 C2+ 8
-IOWR 8 5 16V
WR C2- +12V UNREG JP12 7
6 V- GND 15
-IORD 9 RD 9
TXDA 30
A10 35 11 11 14
CS TXDB 3 TXD
A0 1 12 13
RS1 2 RXD
A1 6
3 SW4 10 7 GND
RS2 CR24 CR23 5
IP6 37 1 8
A2 5 38 2 7 9 8 1.5KE15CA 1.5KE15CA
RS3 IP5
IP4 39 3 6
A3 6 2 4 5
RS4 IP3 CR22 CR21
IP2 36
31 4 1.5KE15CA 1.5KE15CA
RXDA IP1
10 RXDB IP0 7
32 +5V
X1
21
C37 XT2 IRQ 1 RP8 J16
GND
33pF 3.6864MHz 33 34 10K

X2 D0 2 1 FGND
3 +5V 2 GND
4
20
5
6 3 VDD
7 4 VEE
R38
2 8 2
10K -DWR
UART RQ 9 Q7 R39 (PAGE 3, U15-3) 5 -WR
2 1
(PAGE 1, U29-25) 10 2N4401 1K -DRD
U19A R37 (PAGE 3, U6-15) 6 -RD
74HCT14 1K EN2
(PAGE 2, J10-9) 7 -CE
C/ -D
(PAGE 2, U11-11) 8 C/ -D
-12V R30 FS
+5V 10K (PAGE 3, U15-2) 19 FS
9
10 -RESET
DB0
C58 DB1 11 DB0
+5V 1nF DB2 12 DB1
13 DB2
J2 +12V ISO Q5 CR14 DB3
14 DB3
INTEGRATED 2N4403 1N4148
R24
DB4
DB5 15 DB4
16 DB5
KEYBOARD J4 FLUORO CPU R22 R23
1K DB6
DB7 17 DB6
18 DB7
J3
BOARD 1K 100K
MASTER RESET TP12
(PAGE 3, U6-35) DB0......DB7 GND
and (PAGE 2, J10) 20 RV
C53 CR10 R27 (PAGE 1, U30-21)
100uF BZX55C C16 6K81
6V2 1uF
PAGE 4 OF 4
1 J9 Q6 1
2N4401
ENG F. GARCIA
ATP J4
CR11
1N4148
R25
825 R26 ATP CONSOLE
CONSOLE DISPLAY 681
CHK A. DIAZ
SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
BOARD J10 BOARD
REV CN 04/158 (04/10/04)
A3024-XX REV.
DWG
J11
SEDECAL S.A. REV.
REV.
DATE 10/10/00
A B C D E
A B C D E
AEC/ABC SW
J1 U6
U3 +12V U2 U4 ULN2803 J2
D0 7224 AD7590 74HCT574
D0 8 D1 D0 13 17 D0 3 D0 2 19 1 18
D1 7 D0 RESET A1 D1 Q1 I1 Q1 5 -FLD 1
D2 D1 12 D1 4 D1 3 18 2 17
D2 10 D1 A2 D2 Q2 I2 Q2 6 -FLD 2
D3 +5V U7 D2 11 D2 5 D2 4 17 3 16
D3 9 D2 A3 D3 Q3 I3 Q3 7 -FLD 3
D4 74HCT138 D3 10 D3 6 D3 5 16 4 15
D4 12 D3 A4 D4 Q4 I4 Q4 8 -STRT DR
D5 6 D4 9 D4 6 15 5 14
D5 11 G1 D4 D5 Q5 I5 Q5 9 GND
D6 D5 8 D5 7 14 6 13
D6 14 D5 D6 Q6 I6 Q6 10 VD
D7 5 D6 7 2 D6 8 13 7 12
D7 13 G2B D6 VOUT D7 Q7 I7 Q7
D7 6 D7 9 12 8 11
GND
D7 D8 Q8 I8 Q8
4 VREF 3 7 W 4
-IOWR 5 4 G2A DGND 5 11 CLK OC 1
9
A15 16 3 C Y2 13 15 WR VSS 1
A1 4 2 B Y1 14 LDAC 16
SCL 2
A0 3 1 A Y0 15 CS 14
SCL 1
REFERENCE (as calibration number)
TP4 J1
J2 RP2 U5 RAMP 6 -
1K 5108 1 15 AEC STOP
IC 1 1 1 2 4 S1 D 8 7 +
3 4 5 U8A
IC 2 2 S2 R16 LM339
IC 3 3 5 6 6 S3 A0 1 SCL 1
7 8 1M C12
PT INPUT 4 +12V 100nF
A1 16 SCL 2
C8 C9 C10 12 U8B
100nF 100nF 100nF S5 LM339 R15
11 S6 VC 2
10 7 R8 4 - 100
S7 S4 +5V 2K2
9 S8 A2 15 2 1 PT CRL
U2C R4 5
3 + 3
AD7590 22K
12 11 C13
S D 100nF
R6
JP4 R7 1M C7 +5V
B A R10 10K 470nF
10K
U2D R13 R12

JP3 AD7590 10K 10K
R3 U2A 10 9
1K AD7590 B A +12V S D
FL RAD
16 15 See Note
S D
TP2 TP1 R9
INTEGRATION RESET UP PT DWN PT U8C 100K
LM339 J1
8 -
R1 U2B R14 R11 14 19 -KV DWN
604K AD7590 10K 10K 9 +
13 14 RP1 +12V
D S 1K
8 7
6 5 +5V
FLUORO ABC TP3 U8D 4 3
ABC IN LM339 2 1
C24 C6 R2 R5 10 -
100nF 1nF 1K 10K 13
2 6 -KV UP 2
11 +
JP1 INTEGRATION CR3
C11 R18 IN3595 R17
C U1 1nF +12V 1K 1K +5V
CA3140
2 - JP2
B 6 B A
3 +
CR1 CR2 BOARD VERSION JP1 JP2 JP4
A 1N4148 1N4148
C1
1
100pF +12V C14 3012-01 PHOTOMULTIPLIER B B A

+12V C22 100nF
1uF 3012-02 FOR TV CAMERA A A A
7
U1 3012-05 4 ION CHAMBERS C A B
3
- CA3140
4 -
2 + NOTE.- JUMPER JP3 IN POSITION A FOR ION CHAMBERS
J1 5 +
C15 WITH HIGH SENSIBILITY (GAIN 2V / mR )
U8B 100nF
LM339
4
+5V 20
12
+12V 18 -12V
-12V +12V +5V U2 +12V C16 U5 +12V C20
AD7590 100nF U3 +12V U4 +5V 5108 100nF
1 8 7224 74HCT574 13 U7 +5V 1
-12V 17 +V +V
18 20 74HCT138
Vcc Vcc ENG F. GARCIA
16
C3 C2 C4
C5
100nF TP5
Vcc
AEC CONTROL CHK A. DIAZ
10uF 10uF 10uF GND C17 C18 C19 C21
REV CN 00/155 (07/07/00)
100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF C23
GND
GND
GND 2 -V 1 -V 3 100nF A3012-01/02 REV. I

GND 4 GND 10 DWG
8 A3012-05 B
GND
SEDECAL S.A. REV.
14
-12V -12V
2
REV.
DATE 05/05/97
A B C D E
RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts
KODAK
Renewal Parts
REVISION HISTORY
0 OCT 1, 2005 New edition
ADVISORY SYMBOLS


DATA.

or data.

RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts
FRU CODES
FRU column identifies the Field Replaceable Units (FRU) with the codes:
1 = Replacement Part that should be in stock.

2 = No need to have it in stock, easy to get after order.
X-RAY GENERATOR SHF 535 / 635 / 835
Item Designation Qty FRU Rep Mfg. Ref. Remarks
1 FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3) Refer to pages 6-5
2 BACK PANEL (MOD. 4) Refer to pages 6-6
3 IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY INVERTER (MOD. 5) Refer to pages 6-7
4 RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6) Refer to pages 6-8
5 LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12) Refer to pages 6-9
6 HV TRANSFORMER Refer to pages 6-9
7 LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11) Refer to pages 6-10
MISCELLANEOUS Refer to pages 6-11
6 5
7 3 2
RP-1024R0 1
Renewal Parts
FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3)

FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3)
1 PCB, HT Controller 12 bits 1 1 Y A3000--33
2 U5 EPROM for 50, 64, or 80 kW 1 2 N SOFT--HT It can not be ordered without Generator Serial Number
3 PCB, Interface Control Rad without HV. 1 1 Y A3009--11 For only Rad Generator
4 PCB, Filament Driver 1 1 Y A3004--05
5 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit 1 1 Y 53418001
6 Rectifier Bridge FAGOR / 10 A 3 2 N 53404002 BR1, BR2, BR4
7 Filter Line 1 2 N 50208001 LF3
8 ON/OFF Relay K3 / 4PDT /110V 1 2 N 51401012 K3
9 Capacitor ELE 2400 Micro/50V 2 2 N 54002007 C6, C7
10 Fuse F2 (1.5 A, 250 V) SB See Fuse Kit
11 Fuses F6, F7, F8 (3 A, 250 V) SB See Fuse Kit
12 Fuses F9 (0.4 A, 250 V) SB See Fuse Kit
1 2 3
11
11
10
11
4 6 12 7 5 9 6
2 RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts
BACK PANEL (MOD. 4)

BACK PANEL (MOD. 4)
13 PCB, Delayed Switch OFF 1 2 N A3274--01 Only for High Speed Generator
14 PCB, ATP Console 1 1 Y A3024--21 Standard
15 PCB, AEC Control 1 1 Y A3012--05 Used for AEC
16 U24 EPROM 1 1 N SOFT--ATP It can not be ordered without Generator Serial Number
13
15
16
14
RP-1024R0 3
Renewal Parts
IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- INVERTER (MOD. 5)

IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- INVERTER (MOD. 5) 1 1 Y A6362--56S Inverter 3 Ph, 380-480 VAC R&F, High kW
17 IGBT 300A/1200V for 3 Ph equipment 2 2 N 53416011S Selected IGBT
18 Capacitor 10 Micro /1000DCV 1 2 N 54001011 C9
19 Capacitor ELE 3700 Micro /450V 4 2 N 54002011 C1, C2, C3, C4
20 Capacitor 2 Micro/1000 V 3 2 N 54008002 C8, C10, C11
21 PCB, IPM Driver 2 1 N A3063--03
22 PCB, Charge/Disharge Monitor 2 1 N A3212--01
23 PCB, Input Rectifier 3 Phase 1 1 N A3255--01
24 Rectifier SKKD 40F10 3 2 N 53404019 CR1, CR2, CR3 Behind Input Rectifier
18
17
23
24
22
21
20
19
4 RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts
RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6)

RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6)
25 Contactor 3 Phase / 24V / 50 A 2 2 N 51405007 K5, K6
26 Resistor 20 Ohms / 100 W / 10% 1 1 N 52707021 R1
27 Transformer T2 1 2 N 50509029 T2
28 Green Light Lamp 220 VAC 1 2 N 54203006
29 Input Filter for 3 Phase 1 2 N A6371--01 LF1
30 Fuses F12, F13 (10 A, 250V) SB See Fuse Kit
31 Input Line Fuses F3 ,F4, F5 (50 A, 600V) See Fuse Kit
30
27
25
28
26
31
29
RP-1024R0 5
Renewal Parts
LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12) / HV TRANSFORMER

LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12)
32 PCB, Locks 1 1 N A3214--01
33 PCB, AEC Cabinet Adaptation -- 4 Ion Chambers 1 2 Y A3263--03 Used for 4 Ion Chambers
34 Fuses F14, F15 (10 A, 250V) SB See Fuse Kit
HV TRANSFORMER
35 HV Transformer (150 kV ) 1 Tube, 400 VAC 1 1 Y A6097--07
35 HV Transformer (150 kV ) 1 Tubes, 480 VAC 1 1 Y A6097--08
32 33
34
35
6 RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts
LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11)
LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11)
36 LV-DRAC -- High Speed Starter for 400 VAC 1 2 Y A6378--26 For 1 or 2 Tubes
36 LV-DRAC -- High Speed Starter for 480 VAC 1 2 Y A6378--27 For 1 or 2 Tubes
37 PCB, Control DRAC 1 1 Y A3243--04
38 PCB, Interface DRAC with Cable 1 1 Y A3240--05
39 Fuses F3, F4 (15 A) and F1, F2 (0.5 A) See Fuse Kit
40 PCB, Clamping (A3) 1 1 N A3109--01
41 LV-DRAC Transformer 380 VAC 2 2 N 6456--11 Main and Auxiliary Transformer 380 VAC
41 LV-DRAC Transformer 480 VAC 2 2 N 6456--12 Main and Auxiliary Transformer 480 VAC
42 DC BUS Cable 1 2 N A3237--02
43 Contactor 24 V / 15 A 3 2 N 51405004 K2, K3, KT1
44 U17 EPROM DRAC 1 2 N 53406157 It can not be ordered without Generator Serial Number
45 Auxiliar Contactor 1 2 N 51405006
46 Fans Micro Boxer 24 VDC 3 2 N 53103001
46
45
43 42
40
41
39
41
36 44 37 38
RP-1024R0 7
Renewal Parts
MISCELLANEOUS
LIST OF PARTS WITHOUT ILLUSTRATION
FUSE KIT
F2 (1.5 A, 250V ) SB 1 2 N 53801012 On the Front Panel (Mod. 3)
F3, F4, F5 (50 A, 600VAC) SB 3 2 N 53801011 Input Line Fuses (Mod. 6)
F9 (0.4 A, 250V ) SB 1 2 N 53801015 On the Power Supply at the Front Panel (Mod. 3)
F6, F7, F8 (3 A, 250V) SB 3 2 N 53801003 On the Front Panel (Mod. 3)
F12, F13 ( 10 A, 250 V, T) SB 2 2 N 53801008 On Transformer T2 (Mod. 6)
F14, F15 ( 10 A, 250 V, T) SB 2 2 N 53801008 On Looks PCB (Mod. 12)
Fuses F3, F4 (15 A, 600 V) for LV-DRAC 2 2 N 53801018 On Interface DRAC PCB (Mod. 11)
Fuses F1, F2 (0.5 A, 250 V) for LV-DRAC 2 2 N 53801019 On Interface DRAC PCB (Mod. 11)
CABLES
Interface AEC Cable 1 2 N A3251--02
Ion Chamber Cable 1 2 N A3252--03
Cable Generator -- Interface Box 1 2 N A3352--01
Cable Interface Box -- PC 1 2 N A3363--01
HAND SWITCH
Hand Switch with Sub--D 1 2 N A3223--05 For PC On/Off Box
COVER
Generator Cover 1 2 N A6470--08
DOCUMENTATION
Pre-installation Manual 1 2 N --
Service Manual 1 2 N --
8 RP-1024R0
IMPORTANT NOTE
FOR X-RAY TUBE SEASONING
The seasoning procedure should be carried out to assure a correct operation of the
X-ray Tube when it is putting into operation for the first time (new X-ray Tubes). This
action establishes a favorable distribution of the electrical charges and electrostatic
stresses in the insulation system of the tube and the associated equipment.
Included in each X-ray Tube, the manufacturer gives the instructions to perform the
Tube seasoning. It is mandatory to follow these instructions, calibrating previously
the combinations of kV / mA stations required for carrying out the seasoning
procedure. (Refer to Calibration document for calibration of kV / mA combinations).
A correct seasoning will assure the most accurate calibration of the Generator
(Filament Current Numbers) and a subsequent trouble-free operation.
IMPORTANT NOTE FOR AUTO-CALIBRATION
Auto-calibration procedure of “Digital mA Loop Open” (Filament Current Numbers)

is the recommended method to achieve the most accurate calibration. In any case,
Auto-Calibration is a help for the Manual Calibration procedure that can be
performed at any moment or when Auto-calibration procedure is not fully performed.
(Refer to Section 2.5 “Digital mA Loop Open” in the Calibration document).
During the Auto-calibration process, the Generator informs about different conditions
through messages or codes displayed on the Console. The table below is a resume of
these situations:
MESSAGE / CODE SITUATION
The Generator can not calibrate in this moment the selected kV / mA combination
“TUBE OVERLOAD”, (because anode overheated, space charge, generator power limit, etc...). In this
“GENERATOR OVERLOAD”, case, the Generator will continue with Auto-calibration of the following available
ETC kV/mA combination for the selected Focal Spot. At the end of the process it will try
to calibrate or calculate the combinations previously uncalibrated.
“CONFIRM” / “DISMISS” This message / code appears at the beginning of the Auto-calibration procedure to
“222” confirm or leave the Auto-calibration procedure.
“TUBE TOO HOT” Exposures are inhibited momentarily because the Heat Units capacity that remain
is 40% or less
less. Wait until the X-ray
X ray Tube begins to cool and recovers the Heat Units
“111” capacity.
Auto-calibration procedure has been cancelled after ten attempts of calibration of

“AUTOCALIBRATION
the same kV / mA combination. In this case, calibrate manually the kV / mA
FAILURE”
combinations uncalibrated.
C d “777” appears iinstead
Code t d coded “888” whenh A t
Auto-calibration
lib ti procedure
d is
i
“777” or “888” cancelled due to “space charge” during calibration of 40 kV at any mA station for
Small Focal Spot.
“AUTO CALIBRATION OK” Auto-calibration procedure has been successfully performed for the selected
“999” Focal Spot.
Auto-calibration procedure is independent for each Focal Spot. If Auto-calibration

has been successful for one of the Focal Spots and aborted for the other Focal Spot,
it is only required to perform the Manual Calibration of the mA station uncalibrated
for the other Focal Spot. Enter in “Manual Calibration” mode, select each kV / mA
combination and identify the combinations that require to be manually calibrated
(these combinations keep the Filament Stand-by value as Filament Current
Number).

Sedecal HF Series X Ray Generator Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sedecal HF Series X Ray Generator Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Publication

REVISION DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

0 JUL 15, 2002 First edition

1 SEP 20, 2003 kW corrections for SHF-5xx model

2 FEB 17, 2004 New equipments

3 SEP 15, 2005 Revision of environmental and electrical requirements

DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT

ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT

Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or

Note . Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent

1.1 Responsibility of Purchaser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

3.1 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3.2 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3.3 Line Powered Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3.4 Line Powered Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3.5 Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

3.6 Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

3.7 Battery Powered generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

3.8 Battery Powered Ggenerators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

3.9 Interconnection and Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

3.10 Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

This Pre-Installation document provides the information and data needed to

For system-related requirements, such as room layout, and system

1.1 RESPONSIBILITY OF PURCHASER

• Install required material prior the delivery of the system components.

• Complete room floor, ceiling and wall finish.

• Install conduit, duct, and raceway.

Note . Complete and proper Pre-Installation will avoid delays and

This page intentionally left blank.

SECTION 2 PRE-INSTALLATION DATA

This section provides product information and illustrations showing physical

LINE POWERED GENERATORS

Vertical Generator Cabinet

Compact Generator Cabinet

Compact Generator Cabinet

CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS

Compact Generator Cabinet

BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS

Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet

Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet

STANDARD CONTROL CONSOLES

w/o Pedestal 433 mm 298 mm 123 mm 8 kg

w/o Pedestal 554 mm 360 mm 124 mm 12 kg

with Handswitch support 545 mm 290 mm 50 mm 6 kg

with Handswitch support 468 mm 290 mm 114 mm 8 kg

Optional Pedestal for

TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE AND PC UNIT

PC Unit 480 mm 200 mm 400 mm 15 kg

PC Interface Box 130 mm 140 mm 46 mm 0.6 kg

Floor freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to floor with

Control Consoles Desk freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to an optional pedestal.

MINIMUM RECOMMENDED FREE AREA FOR SERVICE ACCESS

Wall and Floor Supports are options

Illustration 2-1 (cont.)

Wall and Floor Supports are options

Illustration 2-1 (cont.)

Illustration 2-1 (cont.)

TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE PC UNIT PC INTERFACE BOX

Illustration 2-1 (cont.)

RAD CONSOLES -- GRAPHIC DISPLAY

TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES (TPC)

THESE CONSOLES CAN BE MOUNTED ON A TABLE SUPPORT, WALL SUPPORT OR PEDESTAL

SECTION 3 ROOM REQUIREMENTS